CA2256449A1 - Apl immunoreactive peptides, conjugates thereof and methods of treatment for apl antibody-mediated pathologies - Google Patents
Apl immunoreactive peptides, conjugates thereof and methods of treatment for apl antibody-mediated pathologies Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- CA2256449A1 CA2256449A1 CA002256449A CA2256449A CA2256449A1 CA 2256449 A1 CA2256449 A1 CA 2256449A1 CA 002256449 A CA002256449 A CA 002256449A CA 2256449 A CA2256449 A CA 2256449A CA 2256449 A1 CA2256449 A1 CA 2256449A1
- Authority
- CA
- Canada
- Prior art keywords
- apl
- phage
- antibody
- peptide
- analog
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
Classifications
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides
- A61K38/03—Peptides having up to 20 amino acids in an undefined or only partially defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K39/00—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
- A61K39/0005—Vertebrate antigens
- A61K39/0008—Antigens related to auto-immune diseases; Preparations to induce self-tolerance
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
- A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
- A61P37/06—Immunosuppressants, e.g. drugs for graft rejection
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
- A61P9/10—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07K—PEPTIDES
- C07K14/00—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
- C07K14/435—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
- C07K14/46—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans from vertebrates
- C07K14/47—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans from vertebrates from mammals
- C07K14/4701—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans from vertebrates from mammals not used
- C07K14/4713—Autoimmune diseases, e.g. Insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus, multiple sclerosis, rheumathoid arthritis, systemic lupus erythematosus; Autoantigens
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
- G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
- G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
- G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
- G01N33/53—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor
- G01N33/543—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor with an insoluble carrier for immobilising immunochemicals
- G01N33/54353—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor with an insoluble carrier for immobilising immunochemicals with ligand attached to the carrier via a chemical coupling agent
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
- G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
- G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
- G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
- G01N33/53—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor
- G01N33/564—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor for pre-existing immune complex or autoimmune disease, i.e. systemic lupus erythematosus, rheumatoid arthritis, multiple sclerosis, rheumatoid factors or complement components C1-C9
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
- G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
- G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
- G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
- G01N33/68—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving proteins, peptides or amino acids
- G01N33/6878—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving proteins, peptides or amino acids in eptitope analysis
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
- G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
- G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
- G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
- G01N33/92—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving lipids, e.g. cholesterol, lipoproteins, or their receptors
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K39/00—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
- A61K2039/60—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies characteristics by the carrier linked to the antigen
- A61K2039/6093—Synthetic polymers, e.g. polyethyleneglycol [PEG], Polymers or copolymers of (D) glutamate and (D) lysine
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides
Landscapes
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Immunology (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
- Molecular Biology (AREA)
- Hematology (AREA)
- Biomedical Technology (AREA)
- Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
- Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
- Public Health (AREA)
- Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
- Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
- Biochemistry (AREA)
- Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
- Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
- Microbiology (AREA)
- General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Biotechnology (AREA)
- Food Science & Technology (AREA)
- Pathology (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Cell Biology (AREA)
- Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Rheumatology (AREA)
- Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
- Cardiology (AREA)
- Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
- Epidemiology (AREA)
- Rehabilitation Therapy (AREA)
- Biophysics (AREA)
- Zoology (AREA)
- Neurology (AREA)
- Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)
- Diabetes (AREA)
Abstract
aPL analogs that (a) bind specifially to B cells to which an aPL epitope binds and are disclosed. Optimized analogs lack T cell epitope(s) are useful as conjugates for treating aPL antibody-mediated diseases. Conjugates comprising aPL analogs and nonimmunogenic valency platform molecules are provided as are novel nonimmunogenic valency platform molecules and linkers. Methods of preparing and identifying said analogs, methods of treatment using said analogs, methods and compositions for preparing conjugates of said analogs and diagnostic immunoassays for aPL antibodies are disclosed.
Description
CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 aPL IMMUNOREACTIVE PEPTIDES, CONJUGATES THEREOF AND
METHODS OF TREATMENT FOR APL ANTIBODY-l~IEDIATED
PATHOLOGIES
CROSS-REFERENCE APPLICATIONS
This application is a continuation-in-part application of U.S. Serial No. 08/660,092, filed June 6, 1996, which is a continuation in-part of U.S. Serial No. 08/482,651, filed June 7, 1995.
TECHNICAL FIELD
This invention is in the field of immunology and relates to compositions and methods for treating and diagnosing antiphospholipid (aPL) antibody-mediated pathologies. More specifically, the invention relates to conjugates of chemically-defined nonimmunogenic valency platform molecules and immunospecific analogs of aPL-binding epitopes as well as m-ethods and compositions for producing these conjugates. Optimized analogs lack T cell epitopes. In addition, the invention relates to diagnostic assays for detecting the presence of and quantitating the amount of antiphospholipid antibodies in a biological sample. The invention also relates to a method of utili7in~ random peptide libraries to identify immunospecific analogs of aPL-binding epitopes.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Antiphospholipid antibodies occur in autoimmune ~ e~ce~ such as systemic lupus eryth~m~tosus (SLE) and antiphospholipid antibody syndrome (APS) as well as in association with infections and dru~ therapy. APS is characterized by one or more clinical features such as arterial or venous thrombosis, thrombocytopenia and fetal loss. APS may be primary or it may be associated with other conditions, primarily, SLE. (PHOSPHOLIPID-BINDING
ANTIBODIES (Harris et al., eds., CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, 1991); McNeil et al. ADVANCES IN IMMUNOLOGY, Vol. 49, FP- 193-2~1 (Austen et al., eds., SUBSTIIU~E SHEl' ff~ULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 - W O97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 Academic Press, San Diego, CA, 1991)). Approximately 30-40% of patients with SLE have aPL, however, 50% of patients with aPL antibodies do not have SLE.
This 50% may have other autoimmune rheurnatic ~ e~es, miscellaneous conditions or they may have been subjected to drug therapy, particularly chlorpromazine. In one study of 70 patients, 26 males and 44 females, with primary APS (PAPS) but no evidence of S~E, the following features were observed: deep venous thrombosis (DVT) in 31; arterial occlusion in 31, particularly stroke or transient ischemia; myocardial infarctions in 15; l'eCUllellt fetal loss in 24; thrombocytopenia (TCP) in 32; 10 had a positive Coombs' test;
l 0 Evans' syndrome in 7; anti-nuclear antibody (ANA) in 32, but less than 1: 160 in 29; and antimitochondrial antibody (AMA) in approximately 24. (McNeil et al., supra). Estimates vary but in about 5% of all stroke patients, aPL antibodies are thought to be an important contributing factor.
Transient aPL antibodies, such as those detected in a VDRL test, occur during many infections. Approximately 30% of patients po~cessing persistent aPL
antibodies have suffered a thrombic event. The presence of aPL antibodies defines a group of patients within SLE who display a syndrome of clinical features consisting of one or more of thrombosis, TCP, and fetal loss. The risk of this syndrome in SLE overall is around 25%; this risk increases to 40% in the presence of aPL antibodies and decreases to 15% in their absence. Because aPL
antibodies were thought to be directed at phospholipids in plasma membranes, it has been postulated that they may exert di-e~,t ~dlhogenic effects in vivo by interfering with hemostatic processes that take place on the phospholipid membranes of cells such as platelets or endothelium. ln patients ~,vith PAPS, the fact that aPL antibodies appear to be the only risk factor present is further evidence that these antibodies have a direct pathogenic role. Induction of PAPS
by immunizing mice with human anticardiolipin antibodies is the best evidence yet that aPL antibodies are directly pathogenic (Bakimer et al. 1992 J. Clin.
Invest. 89:1558-1563; Blank et al. 1991 Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 88:3069-3073).
SlJBSmUrE SHEEr ~(IJLE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 Measurement of aPL antibodies in the clinical environment is still an imperfect art. A commercially available set of standard antisera (APL
Diagnostics, Inc., Louisville, KY) allow generation of a standard curve for - comparison of assays performed in various laboratories. A great deal of inconsistency exists, however, between the results obtained at these laboratories regarding the exact GPL and MPL, the unit of mea~u~e~ ,nl for IgG and IgM
antiphospholipid antibodies, respectively, ratings for given sera and the levels of GPL and MPL that are categorized as high, medium or low titer. The available commercial kits vary greatly in the values assigned to the commercially available standards (Reber et al. (1995) Thrombosis and Haemostat. 73:444-452). In spite of these limitations, there is general agreement that the epitopes recognized byantibodies in APS, PAPS and other aPL antibody-me~ ted Ai~e~ces including recurrent stroke and recurrent fetal loss are located in the 5th domain of ~2-GPI
and are exposed to the antibody following binding Of ,B2-GPI to cardiolipin.
It is now generally accepted that aPL antibodies recognize an antigenic complex comprised of ~2-glycoprotein I (~2-GPI) and negatively-charged phospholipid, e.g., cardiolipin (McNeil et al. (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
87:4120-4124; Galli et al. (1990) Lancet I:1544-1547) (hereinafter "aPL
imrnunogen"). ~2-GPI is a minor plasma glycoprotein found free and in ''O association with lipoprotein lipids where it is also known as apolipoprotein H
(apo H). It consists of five independently folding domains referred to as Sushi or short consensus repeat domains that resemble similar domains in other proteins.
~2-GPI has been reported to undergo antigenic and conformational changes upon -- binding phospholipid (Wag~onkneckt et al. (1991) Thromb. Haemostas.
69:361-365; Jones et al. (1992) Proc. 5th Intl. Symp. Antiphospholipid Antibodies (Abstract S5)). The fifth domain contains the putative sites of lipid binding and - aPL antibody binding (Hunt J. and S. Krilis, (1994) J. Immunol. 152:653-659;
Lauer et al. (1993) Immunol. 80:22-28). The pathological meç~h~ni~m for aPL is unknown (McNeil et al., supra). Most explanations invoke endothelial cell function or platelet involvement (Haselaar et al. (1990) Thromb. Haemostas.
SUBSlllU~E SHEET ~lll~ 26) ' CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 97146251 PCTrUS97/10075 63: 169- 173). These explanations suggest that following blood vessel endothelial cell injury or platelet activation, the exposure or transbilayer migration of anionic phospholipid to the plasma-exposed surface may lead to ~2-GPI-binding and trigger aPL antibody formation.
aPL antibodies may be directly l~lvlhlolnbotic by reducing prostacyclin forrnation (Vermylen, J. and J. Amout (1992) J. Clin. Lab. Med 120:10-12); by direct interference with the action of coagulation proteins; or by blocking the ability of ,~2-GPI to inhibit the intrinsic blood coagulation pathway, platelet p~.~thlolllbinase activity, and ADP-mediated platelet aggregation (Arvieux et al.
(1993) Thromb. Haemostas. 60:336-341).
A major new tool in medicinal chPrni~try in the search for lead compounds has been the advent of combinatorial libraries providing vast molecular diversity.
Molecular diversity may arise from chemical synthesis or from biological systems(Scott., J.K. RATIONAL DRUG DESIGN (CRC Press~ ~- einer, D.B. and W.V. Williarns, eds., Boca, Raton, FL., 1994); Moos et al. (1993) Ann. Reports Med. Chem. 28:315324). By displaying random peptides on the surface of filarnentous phage, epitope libraries cont~ining hundreds of millions of clones for probing by clinically significant antibodies have been created (Scott, J.K. and G.P.
Smith (1990) Science 249:286-390; Cesareni, G. (1992) FEBS Lett. 307:66-70).
Such phage libraries are prepared by incorporating randomized oligonucleotide sequences into the phage genome, usually the pIII gene, which encode unique peptide sequences on the surface of each phage. Following sequential rounds of affinity purification and arnplification, those phage that bind antibody are prop~g~t~d in E. coli and the binding peptides identified by sequ~nring the col,es~onding coding region of viral DNA. In most cases, subsequent study will involve corresponding synthetic peptides after establishing their ability to bind antibody. Phage-based libraries have been used to rnimic discontinuous epitopes (Luzzago et al. (1993) Gene 128:51-57; BaLass et al. (1993) Proc. Matl. Acad Sci.
90:10638-10642). The potential plasma instability of peptide-based drugs has SUBSTIIU~E SHEEr ffWLE 26) .. . . _ CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 97146251 PCTrUS97/10075 S ~ ' been succes~fully overcome by N-terrninal blocking or by the judicious use of amino acid analogs (Powell, M.F. (1993) Ann. Reports Med. Chem. 28:285-293).
At present there is no selective, immunospecific therapy for patients showing high titers of aPL antibodies. In many cases use of drugs such as aspirin, S steroids, and warfarin has proven to be largely inadequate (PHOSPHOLIPID-BINDING ANTIBODIES (Harris et al., eds., CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, 1991);
McNeil et al., supra). Synthetic mimetic peptides, characterized by (i) the inability to activate T cells while (ii) ret~inine the ability to bind immune B cells, are used to tolerize B cells in an antigen-specific manner. This technology is disclosed in co-owned, co-pending U.S. Patent Application, Serial No. 08/118,055, filed September 8, 1993, and U.S. Patent No. 5,268,454, which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. As disclosed in the application and patent cited above, B cell tolerance entails ~flmini~tçring suchpeptides conjugated to multivalent, stable, non-immunogenic valency platforms inorder to abrogate antibody production via B cell anergy or clonal deletion aftercross-linking surfare irnmunoglobulin.
Although the exact molecular nature of the target epitopes recognized by aPL antibodies is unknown, the use of peptides derived from epitope libraries will allow for the construction of s.lcces~ful tolerogens. B cell tolerogens for the treatment of human systemic lupus erythem~tosus-related nephritis have also beendisclosed in co-owned U.S. Patent Nos. 5,276,013 and 5,162,515 which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.
DISCLOSURE OF THE ~NVENTION
This invention resides in the discovery of a method for identifying analogs of key epitopes recognized by aPL antibodies in patients suffering from PAPS, APS and other aPL antibody-me~ te~ e~ces, such as recurrent stroke and recurrent fetal loss, using random peptide phage libraries.
Accordingly, one aspect of the invention is an improved method for screening random peptide phage libraries in order to identify the peptide SUBSmUrE SHEET ff'~(llE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W Og7/46251 PCT~US97/1007S
sequences which best mimic the epitopes recognized by aPL antibodies. This method comprises the steps of. (a) biopanning the library using methods modifiedfrom those known in the art; (b) elimin~ting very weakly-binding phage by rnicropA~ g the phage screened from step (a) by (i) incubating the phage in microplate wells coated with aPL antibody bound to Protein G, (ii) washing the microplate wells to remove unbound phage, (iii) eluting the bound phage, and (iv) infecting a microorganism such as E. coli with the eluted phage and counting the number of infected microorg~ni.cmc by plating on agar; (c) determining the strongest-binding clones recovered in (b) by evaluation via phagecapture ELISA
by (i) coating the wells of a microplate with aPL antibody, (ii) incubating the strongest-binding clones identified by micl~palmillg in (b) in the coated wells and washing away unbound plialye, III I ing the nurnber of phage bound to the antibody using an enzyme-conjugated goat anti-phage antibody in a calorimetric ELISA assay and, if several equivalent strongly-binding clones are identified, an additional round of (d) phage-ELISA on the strongest-binding phagecapture-ELISA clone.
In this regard, the invention encomp~csec a method for identifying analogs of epitopes which specifically bind aPL antibodies isolated from hum~n~ suffering from an aPL antibody-mediated disease comprising: (a) pr~pa~ g phage random peptide libraries; (b) screening said libraries with aPL antibodies to identify aPL
mimetic epitopes, wherein said screening comprises (i) screening said libraries by biopal~ning; (ii) further screening phage isolated by biopa~ g in (i) by mi~;loyal~ling; and (iii) identifying phage cont~ining aPL antibody high-affinity binding peptides recovered in (ii) by imm-lno~cc~y.
The invention also encomp~cses a method of biop~ ing phage random peptide libraries to identify and isolate peptides which bind to aPL antibody comprising: (a) reacting affmity-purified aPL antibody with phage bearing random peptide inserts; (b) recovering phage bearing random peptide inserts which bind to the aPL antibody; (c) infecting a microorganism with phage SUBSllTUrE SHEEr ffWlE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 97/46251 PCTrUS97110075 recovered in (b); and (d) culturing the infected microorganism in an antibiotic-cont~ining medium in order to isolate the phage.
The invention further encomr~ses a method of micrup~ ing phage . random peptide libraries to identify and isolate peptides having a high binding affinity to aPL antibodies comprising: (a) isolating phage bearing random peptide inserts by biop~nning; (b) incubating the phage recovered in step (a) in microplate wells coated with aPL antibody bound to Protein G; (c) washing the microplate wells to remove unbound phage; (d) eluting bound phage; and (e) infecting a microorganism with phage recovered in (d); and (f) culturing the infected microorganism in an antibiotic-cont~ining medium in order to isolate the phage.
The invention also encompacses the above method described wherein the immunoassay is a phage-capture ELISA comprising: (a) incubating phage bearing random peptide inserts isolated by mi~lupalming in the microplate wells coated with aPL antibody; (b) washing away unbound phage;(c) incubating an enzyme-labeled anti-phage antibody to the wells; (d) washing away unbound enzyme-labeled anti-phage antibody; (e) adding a calorimetric substrate; and (f) measuring the absorbance of the substrate to identify lilgt-t affinity-binding pliage.
Also encomp~sed by the invention is the method described above and further comprising performing an additional phage-capture ELISA assay of the high affinitybinding phage comprising: (a) coating a uniform amount of the phageon microplate wells; (b) incubating aPL antibody in the wells; (c) washing away unbound antibody; (e) incubating an enzyme-labeled anti-aPL antibody with the bound aPL antibody; (f) washing away unbound enzyme-labeled anti-aPL
antibody; (g) adding a calorimetric substrate to the wells; and (h) measuring the absorbance of the substrate to measure the relative binding affinity of the phage.
The invention also encomp~c.ces the method described above wherein the immunoassay is a colony-blot imm--no~cs~y comprising: (a) culturing a microorganism infected with phage bearing random peptide inserts on a nitrocellulose membrane atop an agar-cont~ining culture medium; (b) replicate transferring the microorganism cultured in (a) by blotting the microorganism on a SlJBSmUrE SHEET ffWLE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 97/46251 PCTrUS97/1007S
8 ~ -second nitrocellulose membrane atop an agarcont~ining culture medium;
(c) in~ubatin~ the transferred microorg~ni~m;(d) Iysing the microorg~ni.cm;
(e) digesting the microorganism with Iysozyme; (f) blocking the membrane with a gelatin solution; (g) incub~ting the membrane with aPL antibody; (h) washing away unbound aPL antibody; (i) incub~tine a enzyme-labeled anti-aPL antibody with the nitrocellulose membrane; (j) washing away unbound enzyme-labeled anti-aPL antibody; (k) adding a calorimetric substrate; and (I) measuring the abso~ ce of the substrate to identify high affmity-binding phage.
A method for assaying and ranking, for affinity-binding characteristics, epitopes which specifically bind aPL antibodies isolated from humzln~ suffering from an aPL antibody-me~liated disease is also encompassed, the method comprising: (a) coating wells of a microtitration plate with cardiolipin; (b) adding adult bovine or human serum as a source of ~2-GPI to bind to the cardiolipin andto prevent non-specific binding to the wells of the plate; (c) incubating a solution of monomeric analog and a high-titered aPL antibody for a pre-determined time;
(d) adding the aPL antibody/analog mixture to wells of the microtitration plate and incubating for a pre-determined time; (e) washing the wells to wash away unbound aPL antibody; (f) adding anti-human IgG conjugated with a label (e.g., an enzyme) to the wells of the plate and incubating for a pre-determined time;
(g) washing the wells to wash away unbound anti-human IgG conjugate;
(h) adding a substrate for the labeled conjugate and developing the substrate/label reaction for a pre-determined time; (i) measuring the end-product of the substrate/label reaction to quantitate the amount of aPL antibody bound to the well; (j) calculating the percentage inhibition, if any, of binding of the aPL
antibody to determine the affinity of the analog to the aPL antibody.
Another aspect of the invention encomp~cses a fluorescence polarization peptide binding assay for determining the dissociation constants for peptides that bind to aPL antibodies. This assay detects direct binding of peptides to aPL
antibodies.
SUBSmU~E SHEr ffUlLE 26) - CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 W O97/46251 PCT~US97/10075 g The invention also encompasses a diagnostic immunoassay, for deterrnining the presence of aPL antibody in body fluids taken from subjects suspected of suffering from an aPL antibody-me~ te~l disease comprising contacting a sample of a body fluid with an analog of an epitope which specifically binds aPL antibodies and det~ hling by methods well known in the art whether aPL antibodies are present in the body fluid and, if present, ' quanlilaLing the amount of aPL antibodies present in the fluid. One such immunoassay comprises: (a) coating wells of a microlil~Lion plate with an analogof an epitope which specifically binds aPL antibodies; (b) washing the wells to wash away unbound analog; (cladding a test sarnple of a body fluid to the wells and incubating for a pre-deterrnined time; (d) washing the wells to remove unbound test sample; (e) adding anti-human IgG conjugated with a label to the wells of the plate and incubating for a predetermined time; (f) washing the wells to wash away unbound anti-human IgG conjugate; (g) adding a substrate for the labeled conjugate and developing the substrate/label reaction for a pre-determined time; (h) measuring the end-product of the substrate/label reaction to determinethe presence of anti-aPL antibody in the test sarnple. A diagnostic imrnunoassayas described above wherein the imm~.no~cs~y is quantitative is also encomp~cseclThe phage-ELISA assay consists of (i) coating a uniform arnount of dirre,c.,~ clones on wells of a microtitration plate followed by (ii) identifying the peptide inserts which most strongly bind aPL antibody by adding antibody to the wells and developing the reaction with an enzyme-labeled anti-hurnan IgG
conjugate. The random peptides displayed by the phage which have a high binding affinity to aPL antibody as measured by phage-ELISA, colony blot or phage-capture-ELISA represent the analogs of the aPL-specific epitope. These peptides are then synth-oci7ed and ranked for strength of binding using col,~l,elilion assays.
Another aspect of the invention is aPL antibody-binding analogs that bind specifically to B cells to which an aPL epitope binds. Optimized analogs lack ~ cell epitope(s).
SUBS~ E SHEEr ~RULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 Wo 97/46251 PcTrus97lloo75 Yet another aspect of the invention is a composition for inducing specific B cell tolerance to an aPL immunogen comprising a conjugate of a nonimmlmogenic valency platform molecule and an aPL antibody-binding analog that (a) binds specifically to B cells to which an aPL inlinllnogen binds and (b) lacks T cell epitope(s).
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
Figure 1 shows that the substitution of fish gelatin for adult bovine senitn abolished all anticardiolipin (ACA) activity in an ELISA assay of a commercial aPL antibody standard. This result supported the fin-1ings of McNeil et al., supra, and Galli et al., supra, concerning the importance of ~2-glycoprotein I (~2-GPI) in defining the target epitope(s) of ACA.
Figure 2 shows that resin-bound analog SAI2 immunospecifically binds to affinity-purified IgG designated ACA-6501.
Figure 3 illustrates that the aPL antibody-binding analogs derived from screening with ACA-6626 bound aPL antisera but did not bind normal sera.
Figure 4 also illustrates that the ACA-6501/5A12 analog immunospecifically binds ACA-6501 antiserum and is crossreactive with ACA-6626.
Figures 4 and 5 illustrate that while the ACA-6501/5A12 and ACA-6626/4D3 aPL antibody-binding analogs derived from screening with methods within the instant invention bind pre~elel-lially with the s~l~ellillg antibody, a significant degree of crossreactivity was detecte-l Figure 6 illustrates method for calcul~ting the GPL value for ACA-6501 aPL antibody.
Figure 7 shows the activity of affinity-isolated ACA-6501 compared to GPL standard sera.
Figure 8 illustrates the dramatic drop in se~uence diversity of the isolated clones by the fourth round of biopanning.
SUBSmlrrE SffER ff~ULE 28) ~ , CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 - wo 97/46251 PCT/US97tlOo75 11 ' Figure 9 illustrates that three clones (3AI2, 3B3 and 3A5) exhibited a very strong imrnunospecific signal in the phage-capture ELISA using ACA-6635 whereas all clones tested were unreactive with normal IgG.
Figure 10 shows the strong signal exhibited by seven clones in a phage-ELISA using ACA-65 0 1.
Figure 11 shows the results of a co~ e-binding ELISA obtained with peptides 5A12, CB2 and 3B10 using ACA-6501. 0.16 ~lg of Peptide 5AI2 produced 50% inhibition of binding of ACA-6501 aPL antibody to tetravalent peptide ACA6501/3B10 bound to polystyrene microplate wells, whereas 0.08 ~lg of CB2 and 0.54 ~g of 3B10 were required to produce 50% inhibition.
Figure 12 illustrates the comparative activity of modified ACA-6641 /3G3 analogs.
Figure 13 illustrates that the 50% inhibition values for peptides 139, 142 and 143 in a competitive-binding ELISA usi ng ACA-6501 aPL antibody were 6.9, 0.7 and 0.9 llg, respectively.
Figure 14 illustrates the effects of sub~liluling a-Me-Pro at positions 3, 9 and both 3 and 9 in peptide 3B 10. Substitution of a-Me-Pro at position 9 increased activity of the peptide four-fold co~ ~ed to the "native" peptide.
Figure 15 shows that peptide 6641/3G3 (LJP 688) is highly cross-reactive with nine affmity-purified ACA antibodies.
Figures 16 and 17 show the dose-dependent reduction in anti-685 antibody ABC at 108M using spleen cells from mice -immnni7Pd with LJP 685-KLH after the spleen cells were incubated with 100, 20 and 4 ~lM of LJP 685-MTU-DABA-PEG conjugate (compound 36 and LJP 685-ATU-MTU-AHAB-TEG conjugate (compound 35), respectively, for 2 hours.
Figure 18 displays the NMR structure closest to the centroid of the nine - structures elucidated for peptide 925 and is a reasonable re~leselltation of the shape of the peptide 925 molecule.
SllBSmUrE SHEEr ffWLE 26) - CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W 0971462~1 PCTrUS97/1007 Figure 19 compares the structure of peptide 925 (labeled at the bottom of the figure as 3G33 with the str~cture of peptide 5A12. Both peptides have turns at approximately the same positions in the peptide sequence.
Figures 20A and 20B illustrate that the pharmacophore of aPL analogs has been tentatively identified as a small hydrophobic group and a positively charged group. The gem-dimethyl and amino groups of peptide 92S are tentatively identified as the ph~ cophore of this peptide as shown in Figure 20A. The lengths of the hydrocarbon linkers that tether the phan-nacophore groups to somescaffold are specified in Figure 20A as well as the distances s~ g the points at which these linkers are attached to the scaffold.
Figure 21 illustrates inhibition of ~2GPI by 6501-derived peptides with diluted 6501 serum.
Figure 22 shows the ACA-6701 titration of CB2*-F;
FITCGPCILLARDRCG .
Figure 23 shows the ACA-6501 titration of CB2*-F:
FITCGPCILLARDRCG .
Figure 24 shows complete ACA-6501 titration of CB2*-F:
FITCGPCILLARDRCG .
Figure 25 shows the displacement of CB2*-F from ACA-6701 using 1.04 equivalents of CB2*.
Figure 26 shows cFP titration using CB2* to displace CB2*-F from ACA6701.
Figure 27 shows cFP titration using 3B10 to displace CB2* -F from ACA6701.
Figure 28 shows the dose response of the (LJP685)4/MTU-AHAB-TEG
conjugate for tolerance activity.
Figure 29 shows the dose response of the (LJP685)4/MTU-DABA-TEG
conjugate for tolerance activity.
Figure 30 shows the dose response of tolerance activity of the (LJP685)4/MTI~-DABA-TEG conjugate tested in the in vitro model.
SUBSTI~UrE SHEl ~(lJLE 2S) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 wO 97/46251 PCT/US97/10075 Figure 31 shows the dose response of tolerance activity of the (L~P685)4/MTU-DABA-TEG conjugate tested in the in vitro model.
Figure 32 shows the tolerizing effect of the (LJP685)4/MTU-AHAB-TEG
- conjugate co~ )~;ng various ~rlmini~trative routes and dosage ranges.
s MODES FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION
A. Definitions As used herein the term "aPL antibody" means any antibody which specifically binds ~2-GPI that mediates disease.
As used herein the term "B cell anergy" intends unresponsiveness of those B cells requiring T cell help to produce and secrete antibody and includes, without limitation, clonal deletion of imm~tllre and/or mature B cells and/or the inability of B cells to produce antibody.
"Unresponsiveness" means a therapeutically effective reduction in the humoral response to an immunogen. Qu~lli~lively the reduction (as measured by reduction in antibody production) is at least 50%, preferably at least 75%, and mostpreferably 100%.
"AntibodY" means those antibodies which are T cell dependent.
As used herein the term "immunogen" means an entity that elicits a humoral immune response comprising aPL antibodies. Immunogens have both B cell epitopes and T cell epitopes. aPL immunogens that are involved in aPL
antibody-mediated pathologies may be external (foreign to the individual) immunogens such as drugs, including native biological substances foreign to the individual such as theld~,~ulic proteins, peptides and antibodies, and the like or self-imrnunogens (autoi,l.nlullogens) such as those associated with antibody-mediated hypercoagulability (stroke).
The term "analog" of an immunogen intends a molecule that (a) binds specifically to an antibody to wl-iich the immunogen binds specifically and (b) lacks T cell epitopes. Although the analog will normally be a fragment or SUBSmU~E SHEEr (RULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 W O 97/46251 PCT~US97/10075 derivative of the immunogen and thus be of the sarne chemical class as the immunogen (e.g., the immunogen is a polypeptide and the analog is a polypeptide), chemical similarity is not essential. Accordingly, the analog may be of a different chemical class than the inllmmogen (e.g., the imrnunogen is a carbohydrate and the analog is a polypeptide) as long as it has the functional characteristics (a) and (b) above. The analog may be a peptide, earbohydrate, lipid, lipopolysaccharide, nucleic acid or other biochemical entity. Further, the chemical structure of neither the inununogen nor the analog need be defined for the purposes of this invention.
The terrn "analog" of an immunogen also encomp~ses the terrn "mimotope." The term "mimotope" intends a molecule which co"lpelilively inhibits the antibody from binding the immunogen. Because it specifically binds the antibody, the mimotope is considered to mimic the antigenic detennin~ntc of the immunogen.
As used herein "valency platforrn molecule" means a nonimmnnogenic molecule cont~ining sites which facilitate the at~chment of a discreet number ofanalogs of imrnunogens.
~'Nonimmuno~enic" is used to describe the valency platform molecule and means that the valency platform molecule elicits substantially no imrnune response when it is ~1minictered by itself to an individual.
As used herein "individual" denotes a member of the m~mm~ n species and includes hllm~nc, primates, mice and dornestic ~nimz~lc such as cattle and sheep, sports ~nim~lc such as horses, and pets such as dogs and eats.
As used herein "pharmaeophore" means the three ~1imPncional orientation and chemical plupel Lies of key groups involved in binding of an aPL analog to the antibody target.
B. Identification of aPL Antibody-binding Analo~s aPL antibody-binding analogs may be identified by screening candidate molecules to determine whether or not they (a) bind specifieally to aPL antibodies SUBSllTUrE SHEEr ff~(uLE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 and (b) lack T cell epitopes. Specific binding to aPL antibodies may be determined using conventional immllno~ ys such as the ELISA assays described in the examples below and the presence or absence of T cell epitopes may be determined by conventional T cell activation assays also described in the examples. In this regard, an analo~ which "binds specificàlly" to serum antibodies to the immunogen exhibits a reasonable affinity thereto, e.g, 107M-I.The presence or absence of T cell epitopes may be determined using a tritiated thymidine incorporation assay disclosed in Serial No. 08/118,055. The presence of T cell epitopes can also be determined by measuring secretion of T cell-derived 0 Iymphokines by methods well known in the art. Analogs that fail to induce statistically significant incorporation of thymidine above background are deemedto lack T cell epitopes. It will be appreciated that the ~uantitative amount of thymidine incorporation may vary with the immunogen. Typically a stimulation index below about 2-3~ more usually about 1-2, is indicative of a lack of T cell1 5 epitopes.
C. Pl~p~.llion of Conju,eates The aPL antibody-binding analogs are coupled to a nonimmunogemc valency platfor;n molecule to prepare the conjugates of the invention. Preferredvalency platform molecules are biologically stabilized, i.e., they exhibit an in vivo excretion half-life oRen of hours to days to months to confer therapeutic efficacy, and are preferably composed of a synthetic single chain of defined composition.
They -will normally have a molecular weight in the range of about 200 to about 200,000, usually about 200 to about 20,000. Examples of valency platform -- molecules within the present invention are polymers such as polyethylene glycol (PEG), poly-D-lysine, polyvinyl alcohol and polyvinylpyrrollidone. P~efe.led polymers are based on polyethylene glycols (PEGS) having a molecular weight of about 200 to about 8,000.
Other valency platform molecules suitable for use within the present invention are the chemically-defined, non-polymeric valency platform molecules SUBSmUI E SHEEr ~IJLE 26) ' CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 . 16 disclosed in co-owned, co-pending U.S. patent application Serial No. 08/152,506,filed November 15, 1993, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
Particularly plcr~ d homogeneous chemically-defined valency platform molecules suitable for use within the present invention are derivatized 2,2'-ethylenedioxydiethylarnine (EDDA) and triethylene glycol (TEG).
Additional suitable valency platform molecules include t~ obenzene~ hept~minobetacyclodextrin, tetraaminol)enlaerytbritol~
1,4,8,1 I tetraazacyclotetra(~ec~ne (Cyclam) and 1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane (Cyclen).
Con}ugation of the aPL antibody-binding analog to the valency platform molecule may be effected in any number of ways, typically involving one or more crossliriking agents and functional groups on the analog and valency platform molecule.
Polypeptide analogs will contain amino acid sid;~..ain moieties containing functional groups such as amino, carboxyl, or sulfhydryl groups that will serve as sites for coupling the analog to the carrier. Residues that have such functionalgroups may be added to the analog if the analog does not already contain these groups. Such residues may be incorporated by solid phase synthesis techniques orrecombinant techniques, both of which are well known in the peptide synthesis arts. In the case of carbohydrate or lipid analogs, functional amino and sulfhydryl groups may be incorporated therein by conventional ch~ try. For in~t~nce, primary amino groups may be incorporated by reaction with ethylen~ mine in the presence of sodium cyanoborohydride and sulffiydryls may be introduced by reaction of c~ ehn.~ dihydrochloride followed by reduction with a standard disulfide reducing agent. In a similar fashion, the valency platform molecule may also be derivatized to contain functional groups if it does not already possess applopl;ate functional groups.
Hydrophilic linkers of variable lengths are useful for connecting peptides or other bioactive molecules to valency platform molecules. Suitable linkers include linear oligomers or polymers of ethylene glycol. Such linkers include SUBSTllUrE SI~ llJlE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 linkers with the formula RlS(CH2CH20)n.CH2CH20(CH2)mCO2R2 wherein n = 0-200? m = 1 or 2, Rl = H or a protecting group such as trityl, R2 = H or alkyl oraryl, e.g., 4-nitrophenyl ester. These linkers are useful in connecting a molecule cont~ining a thiol reactive group such as haloaceyl, maleiamide, etc., via a thioether to a second molecule which conlains an amino group via an amide bond.
These linkers are flexible with regard to the order of ~tt~chm~nt i.e., the thioether can be formed first or last.
The conjugates will normally be formulated for ~lmini~tration by injection (e.g., intraperitoneally, intravenously, subcutaneously, intramuscularly, etc.).Accordingly, they will typically combined with pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles such as saline, Ringer's solution, dextrose solution, and the like. Theconjugate will normally constitute about 0.01% to 10% by weight ofthe formulation. The conjugate is ~imini~tered to an individual in a ''therapeutically e~fective amount", i.e., an amount sufficient to produce B cell anergy to the involved irnmunogen and effect prophylaxis, improvement or elimin~tion of the antibody-mediated condition being addressed. The particular dosage regimen, i.e., dose, timing and repetition, will depend on the particular individual and that individual's medical history. Normally, a dose of about 1 ,ug to about 100 mg conjugate/kg body weight, preferably about 100 ~lg to about 10 mg/kg body weight, will be given weekly. Other a,o,ulo~iate dosing schedules would be as frequent as daily or 3 doses per week, or one dose per week, or one dose every two to four weeks, or one dose on a monthly or less frequent schedule depending on the individual or the disease state. Repetitive ~mini~trations, norrnally timed according to B cell turnover rates, may be required to achieve and/or m~int~in astate of humoral anergy. Such re~elili.le ~lmini~trations will typically involvetreatments of about 1 llg to about 10 mg/kg body weight or higher every 3 0 to 60 days, or sooner, if an increase in antibody titer is detected. Alternatively, sllct~ined continuous release formulations of the conjugates may be indicated for some pathologies. Various forrnulations and devices for achieving sustained release are known in the art.
SUBS~lTUlE SHEEr ff~ULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 WO 97/46251 PCT/USg7/10075 Anti-helper T ceil treatments may be ~rlmini~tered together with the conjugates. Such treatments usually employ agents that suppress T cells such as steroids or cyclosporin.
D. Nature of the anti~een for aPL antibodies S Initial studies on aPL antibodies by the inventors coincided with the publication of reports questioning the nature of the antigenic site recognized by these antibodies. Initially these antibodies were thought to recognize the cardiolipin molecule much like those antibodies detected in a VDRL test. As shown in Figure 1, substitution of fish gelatin for adult bovine serum in the anticardiolipin antibody (ACA) solid phase ELISA essentially abolished all ACA
activity of an antibody plep~dlion obtained commercially as an ACA standard.
This finding indicated the ACA antibodies recognized a determin~nt on a serum protein as proposed by McNeil et al., supra and Galli et al., supra, rather thancardiolipin itself This protein was shown by these authors to be ~2-GPI and, thus, the terms "ACA" or '~anti-cardiolipin antibodies" are really misnomers but are still used today to refer to these antibodies.
The majority of autoimmune, IgG aPL antibodies recognize determin~nt.
on the ,B2-GPI molecule. These epitopes may be formed or exposed on ~2-GPI
only upon its binding to cardiolipin (a neo epitope). Alternatively, the epitope on ,B2-GPI may exist in a single copy per ,B2-GPI molecule and may have low affinity for aPL antibodies. Sufficient avidity to m~int~in an antibody-antigen interaction might be reached only with the alignment of two of these sites on adjacent ~2-GPI
molecules by their binding to cardiolipin.
-- Additional insight into the ~2-GPI epitope structure has been gained by nuclear magnetic .~sonallce (NMR) analysis of aPL analogs within the present invention which mimic the native epitope(s) of ~2-GPI. For, example, a comparison of the NMR solution structure of two peptide aPL analogs that are highly crossreactive with aPL antibodies showed that both peptides have turns atapproximately the same positions in the peptide sequence (see Figures 18 and 19).
SUBSlllUrE SHEEr ~LE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 ~
WO 97/462~1 PCT/US97110075 E. ACA ELISA
The necessity of large-scale testing in connection with GPL scoring of clinical samples and chromatographic purifications of research antibodies and ~2-GPI led to the development of an ELISA assay for aPL antibodies with perforrnance in close agreement with a cornmercial kit and similar to the designfound to have the best reproducibility (Reber et al., supra). A modified ACA
ELISA has also been performed wherein ~2-GPI bound directly to certain microplates is used to bind aPL IgG directly in the absence of any cardiolipin first added to the microplate wells. (See, Roubey et al. (1996) Arthritis & ~h~llm~ticm 39:1606-1607; R.A.S. Roubey (1996) Arthritis & Rhenm~ti~m 39:1444 1454 F. Imrnnnoaffinity Purification of aPL Antibodies In order to isolate the aPL antibodies, multilarnellar, cardiolipin-cont~ining dispersions (liposomes; also containing cholesterol and dicetylphosphate) are incubated with aPL plasma (or serum). These liposomes are pelleted from the serum by centrifugation. After washing, the liposome mixture is disrupted by 2% octylglucoside detergent and applied to a protein A-agarose colurrm. Following extensive washings to first remove lipids and then to remove non-IgG components, IgG aPL antibody is eluted from protein A with mild acid, neutralized bufferexchanged, and tested in the ACA ELISA. This procedure yields aPL antibody enriched up to I 0,000-fold that is devoid of any cont~min~ting ~2-GPI as shown by western blotting with rabbit IgG anti-human ~2-GPI antisera. An additional affinitypurification step is performed by chromatography of the affinity-purified antibody on solid phase ~2-GPI. This second affinity-purification step is ~co,l~l~.ended as a result of the new awareness rega~ dhlg the greater clinical relevance of aPL antibodies that directly bind to ~2-GPI. It also serves to further ensure a final p,e~dlion devoid of cont~min~nt~, in particular ,B2-GPI.
SUBSllTUlE SffEEr ~RULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 G. Construction of Filamentous Pha~e Random Peptide Libraries Eleven different FTJSE 5 filamentous phage random peptide libraries on the p-III protein (five copies of p-III with peptide per phage) are constructed.These libraries provide a vast array of shapes and structures for the discovery of mimetic epitopes. Four libraries, .~esign~te.l "x" libraries, have peptide inserts that are 8, 10, 12, and 15 residues in length, respectively, and are flanked by proline residues on both the amino and carboxyl ends. The purpose of these proline residues is to disrupt any contribution to secondary structure that might arise from the native P-III protein and to project the insert into the solvent. The "y' " libraries contain eysteine-bounded inserts that are 6, 7, 8, 9, 1 1, and 13 amino acids long. The "y" library is the same as the "y"' library except that itlacks the 6 and 8 arnino acid inserts. These peptide inserts for both "y" and "y"' libraries are flanked by cysteine residues at both the amino and carboxyl ends to form cyclic, more rigid structures. Proline residues are incorporated outside these cysteine residues-for reasons similar to those for the "x" libraries above. The " x", "y"', and "y" libraries are located five residues from the amino terrninllc of the native p-III protein. The "z" library consists of random eight amino acid inserts located at the amino terrninus of the p-III protein and do not contain any fl~nking proline or cysteine residues. A cornbination of the "x," "y"' and "z" libraries represents eleven different libraries each with approximately one hundred million different peptide inserts.
These libraries are constructed by incorporation of random oligonucleotide sequences of the length app,opl;ate to give the desired length insert into the p-III
gene of fUSE 5 using standard molecular biology techniques. Following restriction endonuclease digestion of the fUSE 5 DNA, an excess of kin~ecl oligonucleotides provided as gapped duplexes is added and ligated. The DNA is then electroporated into E. coli and inserts are selected by culturing in tetracycline-cont~ining media. The phage from this culture (which contain the peptide insert) are isolated from the supernatant~ washed and resuspended in SUBSmUrE SHEEr ~IULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 buffer. Typically libraries are shown to have 7X108 independent clones at 8X10l2transducing units per mL.
~. Pha~e-screenin~ Methodology The essence of screening phage display peptide libraries lies in the ability to collapse billions of potential candidate phage to a relative few with 0l1tct~n-1ing l,lo~e.lies. The original screening protocols reco.. ~n-led by Scott, J.K. and G.P. Smith, (1990) Science 249:315-324 are significantly modified to facilitate the selection of the best epitopes for various aPL antibodies. These procedures are designed to apply greater stringency of selection as the screen progressed until a point is reached where a useful number of clones representing the best sequencescan be thoroughly investig~te~l With some antibodies, the library does not appear to have sequences which bind very tightly and if a method with a high degree of stringency is applied to the screen, no clones survive that are specific. On theother hand, the library frequently yields many clones that represent good analogs of the antigen and it is necessary to employ a method with a high degree of stringency to identify the best epitopes. For that reason, assays were developedwith varying degrees of stringency in order to identify the best epitopes from an epitope library screen. The assays are listed here in order of increasing stringency: BiopAnning < MicropAnning < Phage-Capture ELISA < Phage ELISA
= Colony Blot = Peptide ELISA.
(i) Biopanning "Biopa ~ g" describes the technique wherein affinity-purified aPL
antibody and phage bearing random peptide inserts are allowed to mix, following which antibody-specific recovery c~ ,s the bound phage. The phage confer tetracycline re~i~t~nce to E. coli that are prop~gAted in a tetracycline-cont~ining medium and then isolated. Multiple rounds of biopA~ g enrich the number of immunospecific phage in a sample. Phage are always recovered at the end of three to five rounds of selection but may represent only sequences that are SUBSlllUl E SHEEr ffUllE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 nonspecifically bound at low affinities for the selecting antibodies. A method for further evaluating these phage (miclop~ ing) is required.
(ii) Mi-,~ op~ ~lling An estim~tion of the relative strength of binding of the phage to the aPL
antibody can be determined by "microl)An~ -g " Miclopal~l~,ng is carried out following three or more rounds of bio,oalllling and uses the same antibody as employed in the bio~ g method. The method consists of dilution of the phage from the !ast round of bi(,p~ g and analyzing fifty or more of these clones by miclol,a~ g. Miclop~l~"ing is accomplished by growing each clone to a similar density and then incubating dilute phage at an optimal single concentration in microtitration wells previously coated with a constant amount of antibody. The optimal single concentration of phage is that cor.centration most likely to reveal the widest range of miclop~ g scores (from 0 to 4+) and~ thus, permit the greatest discrimination among the clones being tested. Il lS based on the 'mi~,lvpdl)llmg behavior of six randomly selected clones where the score is determined at each of several concentrations of phage obtained by serial dilution.
Following the incubation with antibody, the unbound phage are washed away and the amount of bound phage is used as an indication of the affinity of the phage insert for the antibody. The amount of bound phage is determined by elution withmild acid followed by neutralization and infection of E. coli. The nurnber of infected ~. coli are then quantitated by plating the microorg~ni~m~ on agar plates cont~ining tetracycline and then dete~ inillg colony densities achieved by each clone.
(iii) Phage-Capture ELISA
The phage-capture ELISA test was developed to provide an intermediate level assay to bridge the gap between the relatively low stringency of the micl~ ing assay and the high stringency of the phage- or peptide-ELISA
assays. Preliminary studies show that some antibody plepaldlions give too many positive clones by micropanning but none by phage-ELISA or peptide-ELISA.
SUBSmUrE SHEEr ff'~
.
CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 wo 97/46251 PCT/US97/10075 The limitation of the phage-ELlSA described below is that only five copies of p-III are located on each phage and even with a large nurnber of phage coated on a well, few copies of the insert are represented and detection requires that the antibody have a very high affinity for the insert. With the phage-capture ELISA,the signal is amplified many times which facilitates the detection of lower affinity, stable interactions between the antibody and the insert.
The phage-capture ELISA consists of the following steps. Microtitration wells are coated with aPL antibody and phage clones are added as in the mi~;lop~ ing assay. Unbound phage are washed away and the amount of bound phage is quantitated using an enzyme-conjugated goat antiserum which binds the major coat protein of the phage. Phage screened using phage-capture ELISA react with many aPL antibodies and provide a strong signal in subsequent ELISA
assays. This intermediate level of sensitivity allows for greater efficiency in the peptide synthesis effort since few microp~nning-positive phage are phage-captureELISA positive. As a result, peptides synthesized from positive phage-capture ELISA phage are generally immunoreactive.
(iv) Phage-FLISA
This method of selecting phage requires very tight binding of the insert to the screening antibody. Phage are directly coated onto wells of a microtitrationplate and incubated with the screening antibody. Following washes to remove unbound antibody, an anti-human IgG ~ lin~o phosph~t~ce conjugate is added to bind any aPL antibodies bound to the phage. APL antibodies are then detected by adding a calorimetric substrate to the well which will react with alkaline phosphatase according to methods well known in the art.
(v) Colony Blot This assay allows large-scale colony scleening of ~. coli infected by biopanned phage. This procedure is an alternative to phage-ELISA for identifyingimmunoreactive clones and exhibits a comparable level of sensitivity without requiring culturing of individual phage clones prior to testing. In this assay, E.
StlBSTllUI E SHEEr ~UlE 26) CA 022~6449 l998-ll-23 W 0 97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 coli infected with phage from a round of biop~nning are spread on a large diameter nitrocellulose (NC) membrane and cultured overnight on the surface of an agar plate cont~ining tetracycline (Barbas et al. (1991) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
USA 88:7978-7982). Each colony results from infection by phage cont~ining identical sequences. Several replicate transfer blots on NC are made using this NC "master" and are allowed to grow on the surface of an agar plate. Following the chemical and enzymatic disruption of phage-infected colonies on the blots, the phage may be probed by the techniques commonly used in Western blotting, i.e., staining or iitm-iunobtotting. Blots that have been blocked may be insub~t~d with the screening aPL antibody. Following washes to remove unbound antibody, an anti-human IgG horseradish peroxidase conjugate is added to bind to any aPL-antibody that is bound to phage. The addition of a calorimetric substrate allowsone to localize the discrete colonies in the master plate which replese immunospecific phage that may be cloned for further study.
(vi) Peptide-ELISA
Following DNA sequencing to determine the peptide insert sequences of the best-reacting phage in the assays described above, the corresponding peptides are made using standard Fmoc peptide chemistry as is well known in the art. For the peptide-ELlSA assay, the peptides can be made, for exarnple, as branched tetravalent molecules, i. e., each molecule has four copies of the insert. Such a molecule can coat the well of a microlill~tion plate and still have epitopes exposed to the solution to allow binding by an antibody. The tetravalent peptides are synthPsi7Pd by incorporating Iysines as branch points at the first two couplingsanalogous to the methods used for Multiple Antigenic Peptides (MAPS) (Posnett et al. (1988) J. Biol. C~em. 263:1719-1725). A spacer con~i~ting of glycine-serine-glycine-serine is added on each arm after the Iysines and then the insert, including the framework amino acids found in the phage, proline-glycine at the carboxyl ten-ninus and alanine-glycineproline at the amino terminus. All amino acids in this synthesis are added one at a time using standard Fmoc methods.
SUBSrllUlE SHEEl p'~lJLE 26) , . . .
- CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 W O97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 These peptides are then assayed by ELISA which is carried out by coating the peptides on miclo~ dLion wells and then assaying their reactivity with aPL
antibody in a standard ELISA format. In practice, the peptides usually bind verystrongly to the original screening antibody and show some cross-reactivity with other aPL antibodies. Controls of non-aPL antibodies are included to elimin~te nonspecific binding peptides.
(vii) Competitive Binding Peptide-ELlSA
Once ELISA-positive peptides are identified, it is necessary to quantitate their relative binding affinity to the aPL antibodies and to deterrnine whether or not two peptides bind the same population of antibodies in a given patient serumvia a peptide-competition ELISA assay. In this assay, various monomeric peptides compete with tetravalent peptides coated on a microtitration plate well.
To perform the assay, the peptides to be evaluated are synthesized as monomers, i.e., without the Iysine branches employed in the synthesis of the tetravalent peptides, using standard Fmoc chemistry. The monomeric peptides are then purified and dissolved at known concentrations. Wells of a miclotilldlion plate are coated with a tetravalent peptide known to bind to the aPL antibody. Serial dilutions of the monomeric peptides are incubated with a constant dilution of the aPL antibody. The dilution of the aPL antibody was previously determined by titering the antibody against the tetravalent peptide and selecting a dilution on the downslope of the titration curve. After inrllb~tin~ the antibody and monomeric peptides for one hour, the antibody/peptide solutions are added to the miclolilldlion wells and a standard calorimetric ELISA is performed. The concentration of each monomeric peptide that decreases binding of the aPL
antibody with the tetravalent peptide is dçtçrrninPrl by plotting the calorimetric readings obtained for each well. The 50% inhibition point is used as the measureof the relative strength of binding for the monomeric peptides.
A variation of this assay uses micloLil-dlion plates coated with human -glycoprotein I/cardiolipin (~2.GPI/CL) instead of tetravalent peptide and tests SUBSmUrE SHEEI a'~ULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 the ability of monomeric peptides to block the binding of aPL antibody to the epitope(s) on ~2 GPI/CL. In this assay, IgG-depleted hurnan serum at an optimized concentration is used as a source of ~2 GPI. The monomeric peptides atseveral concentrations are incubatecl with an optimized concentration of aPL
antibody in a manner analogous to the assay which employs tetravalent peptide asa plate substrate. Following the incubation of aPL/peptide in (~2 GPI/CL) plates, antibody binding and the peptide concentration required for 50% inhibition is deterrnined at half-maxim-al absorbance as in the tetravalent assay.
An additional variation of this assay tests the ability of monomeric peptides to block the binding of aPL antibody to ,~2 GPI coated directly on the wells of Nunc Maxisorp microtitration plates. In this variation, the use of cardiolipin is omitted and instead of fish gelatin, the reagent diluent and blocker used is nonfat milk/Tween.
(viii) Fluorescence Polarization Peptide Binding Assay This assay detects direct binding of the peptide to aPL antibody. Since aPL antibodies bind to ,B2 GPI (the antigen~, the ELISA competitive inhibition assay can show inhibition due to binding to ,B2-GPI as well inhibition due to binding of the peptide to the aPL antibody. Because binding to antibodies is required in order for the peptide to function as a Toleragen, it is essenti~l toestablish that a peptide can directly bind to an aPL antibody. This assay is used to deterrnine the dissociation con~t~nt~ for peptides that bind to two aPL antibodies, ACA-6501 and ACA-6701. While the ELISA assay is useful for high throughput s~ g because it requires less antibody than the Fluor~sct~n~e Polarization assay, however, ELISA-positive peptides should be fflfther evaluated by the Fluorescence Polarization assay to deterrnine whether they are capable of directly binding with aPL antibody.
SUBSrlTUrE SHEEr ~IJLE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 -(ix) Evaluation of amino acid contributions to-binding by substitution and deletion synthesis The desired epitope for tolerance induction should have as strong an interaction with as many of the aPL antibodies as possible but not contain any s ~Innecess~ry residues. In order to .~.duce the minimllm constitution of an epitope, analogs of each peptide are made (i) that lack given residues, for example, the framework residues at the carboxyl and/or amino terrnini are deleted, or (ii) inwhich amino acid substitutions have been made which differ from sequences found in the epitope library screen. These amino acid substitutions may be either natural, e.g., isoleucine for ieucine, or unnatural, e.g., alpha methyl proline for proline. The effect of these deletions and/or substitutions are then measured via peptide-competition ELISA.
(x) Grouping of aPL Sera Specificities by Mutagenesis of the 5th domain Of ~2 GPI
For a Tolerogen to be generally effective, it must bind a major portion of the aPL antibodies in the majority of patients. It is important to deterrnine ifseveral antibodies from different patients bind identical residues within the eighty-four amino acid 5th domain of ~2-GPI which has been suggested by others to contain the target epitope. If several antibodies bind identical residues, a single '0 mimotope derived from the structural data of the peptides can be constructed which will react with all the antibodies. On the other hand, if the antibodies bind to different residues, a unique tolerogen would be required for each antibody.
Site-directed mutagenesis was performed to identify if key residues involved in aPL antibody binding reside in the 5th domain of ,B2-GPI. The resl.lting mutant ~2-GPIs were assayed for reactivity with several aPL antibodies. The results were inconclusive. A fusion protein comprising the 5th domain Of ~2 GPI and glutathionine S transferase (GST) was obtained from A. Steink~c~erer and expressed in E coli (Steink~serer et al. (1992) FEBS Lett. 313:193-197). This fusion protein was sllcces~fully substituted for native ~2 GPI in the ACA ELISA.Amino acid substitutions are engineered using standard sitedirected mutagenesis.
SUBSlllUrE SHEEI ffUJlE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 W O 97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 . 28 I. Isolation of SYnthetic aPL Epitopes Antibody ACA-6501, from a patient with a GPL score of 151 (high titer) and a historyof recurrent stroke, fetal loss, lupus and three aortic valve replacements was immunoaffinity purified on dardiolipin liposomes. The antibody was used in four separate phage library screens, using the xy, the xyz,the xy'z, and a special pro/cysbounded 7-mer library where, based on the previous screens, Arg was fixed at the seventh position. As shown in Table 1, 36 sequences were obtained in phage that micropalmed (out of 140 tested). These appear quite homologous and the conserved DR residues at positions 6 and 7 are l O notably striking. The consensus sequence is CLLLAPDRC. Despite this homology, only seven phage (see Table 2) were positive after phage-ELISA
calorimetric testing. Screening the xy'z phage with affinity purified ACA-6626 (from a patient with a high, but lower than ACA-6501, titer) yielded five uniquesequences that were phage-ELISA tested. None were coi~)r positive but two were positive when the ELISA immunoconjugate was developed with a chemiluminescent substrate. The sequence motif associated with ACA-6626 appears related but is different from that seen with ACA-6501 (see Table 3). Both antibodies preferred the cys-bounded (probably cyclized and constrained) epitopes over the open pro-bounded sequences.
SUBSTlIUTE SHEEr ff~ULE 26) - PCr/US97/10075 TABLE I
ACA-6501 Pha~e Library Sequences Clone Sequence Clone Sequence xy Library 2101 CNILV~LDRC
xyz Library 3E4 ' CLFVALDRC SBI CWFRSQSSC
3E7 CILLAHDRC 3El ICSPILRGNC
xy'z Library 2FlO CNILVLDRC 2D3 CPLHTHHTC
Custom (X)6R Library Gll CTILTPDRC IA4 CNLLALDRC
2H2 CTILTLDRC lC3 CLLLAIDRC
2HIO CTLLTPDRC ~ IDIOCTIITQDRC
SUBSmU~E SHEEr ff~ULE 26) CA 02256449 l998-ll-23 W O 97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 ACA-6501 Phage Library Sequences Clone Sequence CloneSequence 2Hl CLILTPDRC IA9 CSSKSYWRC
xy'z Libraly, Colony Blot Screening Assay SUBSmUlE SHEEr (~UlE 26) .
W O 97/46251 PCTrUS97/1007 ACA-6501 Colorimetric ELISA-positive Phage Clone Sequence Clone Sequence 3BlO CLLLAPDRC* 3E7 CILLAHDRC
* Corresponds to consensus or average sequence ACA-6626 xy'z Phage Library Sequences Clone Sequence Clone Sequence ACA-6644 is another high-titered aPL antibody that was used to screen thepooled P-IlI phage libraries according to mPthorl~ described herein. The following sequences were discovered:
ACA-6644/CBe GILLNEFA
ACA-6644/CBd GILTIDNL
ACA-66644/CBf GILALDYV
SUBSnTUTE SHEEr ~n~ 26) CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 WO 97/46251 PCTAU~97/10075 These sequences all were derived from the component "z" epitope library that lacks phage framework residues at the N-terrninus. When synthesized as peptides the sequences were im.munoreactive with several ACA sera including ACA-6644 and ACA-6501. Analysis revealed unsuspected homologies with the S sequences previously obtained with ACA-6501 as illustrated in Table 4.
ACA-6644/CBdGILTIDNL
ACA-6644/CBf GILALDW
ACA-6501/2FIOCNILVLD~C
ACA-6644/CBcGILLNEFA
ACA-6501/lDIOCTIITODRC
The convergent sequence homology from two very ~ imil~r source libraries screened by these two aPL antibodies suggests that the sequences may mimic a major, perhaps imrnunodominant, region in the native target antigen.
Screening of the P-III libraries with ACA-6701 yielded two unique sequences with a high degree of internal homology but unlike others previously obtained with other aPL antibody. The sequences are as shown:
ACA-6701/3BI L SD P G yv R NIF H
As resin-bound peptides, the sequences were strongly immunoreactive with the parent serum (ACA-670 1) but were minim~lly cross-reactive with other aPL antibodies.
Continued screening of random pIlI phage libraries with affinity purified ACA antibody resulted in the discovery of a peptide that displayed significant crossreactivity with all nine affinity purified ACA antibodies against which it was initially tested. The perfonnance of this peptide as we}l as four others is shown in SUBSlllUI E SHEEr fflULE 26) Table 5. Peptide sequences for all five peptides inunediately follow the table. All were tested using the competitive binding peptide ACA ELISA using CL/~2 GPI
plates as described herein.
SUBSmUrE SHEET ffWlE 26) W O97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 Percent Inhibition of Af~ACA bY Peptide Monomers Peptide 6626 6638 6641 6644 6701 7004 7005 6903 6501 Ave.
I m ~mL
6501/3BIO 76 87 52 55 5] 87 47 69 60 I m ~mL
I m ~mL
1 m ~mL
6644/CBf 37 60 28 18 22 54 57 43 37 200~mL
Peptide Sequence ACA-6641/3G3: - AGP CLGVLGKLC PG
ACA-6501/3BIO: AGP CLLLAPDRC PG
ACA-6626/4C7: AGPDNIADPRC PG
ACA-6701/3BI: AGP LSDPGYVRNIFH PG
ACA-6644/CBf: GILALDYV GG
-SUBSrllUlE SHEEr ff~UlE 26) - CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 WO97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 Subsequent testing deterrnined that this peptide, ACA-6641/3G3 having the sequence AGP-CLGVLGKLC-PG (LJP 688) was cross-reactive with a number of ACA antisera. Chemical optimization of this peptide was pursued by truncation, systematic amino acid substitution, and non-di~ulfide cyclization studies.
The motifs of several peptides selected from the random phage library screening is set forth below.
ACA Antibody Phage Insert Sequence 6501 C L L L A P D R C (3BIO) 6641 C L G V L G K L C (3G3) J. Immunoreactiviiv of aPL-related Peptides with Affiniiy Purified IgG aPL Antibody Phage sequences obtained with affinity-purified ACA-6501 and found to be phage-ELlSA-posit ive were synth~i7~d on a solid support recently developed for combinatorial synthetic peptide libraries. This support, a Rapp resin, has ahigh peptide density and uses a hydrophilic polyethylene glycol spacer before the first amino acid is coupled. The synthesis resulted in resin-bound peptide that was ideally suited for antibody binding studies. As shown in Figure 2, peptide 5AI2 (sequence CLILAPDRC) dramatically outperformed an unrelated control peptide while not significantly binding normal IgG. Similar results were obtained with the other phageELlSA-positive peptides tested. In the experiment shown, resin sussrrru E ~Er ~U~ 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 peptide-bound affinity-purified ACA-6501 aPL antibody was detected by an irnmunoconjugate color reaction.
K. aPL Serum Antibody ReactivitY with Synthetic Peptides The discovery that resin-bound peptides could bind aPL
immunospecifically using serum significantly ~nh~nred the ability to test aPL
antibodies. As shown in Figure 3, the-peptide derived from screening with ACA-6626 bound aPL antiserum but did not demonstrate significant binding of normal serum. Figure 3 also illustrates the immunospecific-binding behavior of ACA-6501 -5A12 peptide towards aPL serum. Binding of norrnal serum to peptide 5A12was nil in data not shown.
L. CrossreactivitY of Synthetic Peptides Towards aPL Antiserum That Was Not the Source of the Library Screenin~ Antibody Two peptides were selected for aPL sera testing, one (5A12) Icplesellting the ACA-6501 screen and another one (4D3) representing the ACA-6626 screen.
As shown in Figures 4 and 5, each of the peptides reacted preferentially with the parent serum of the screening antibody. However, a significant degree of crossreactivity was detectable especially between ACA-6501 and ACA-6626. A
survey of 19 patient sera with low or no GPL score and of 13 patho!ogic sera with moderate to high GPL carried out with the 5A12 resin-bound peptide showed 8 of the 13 pathologic samples with detectable peptide binding while only 2 out of 19control sa~nples showed low peptide binding. These results evidence that synthetic peptides are useful for diagnostic or prognostic assays in stroke patient care.
As noted in Section I above, one synthetic peptide, 6641/3G3 was tested against several high titer ACA antisera. This peptide appeared to be crossreactive with the vast majority of ACA antisera tested as illustrated in Figure 14.
66~1/3G3 demonstrated dose-dependent cross-reactivity with 10 of 10 ACA
antibodies with complete inhibition (>80%) at 1.8 mg/mL and appeared to be specific for ACA antibodies as demonstrated in Table 7 below.
SUBSmUrE SHEEr ff~ULE 26) -. .
- CA 02256449 1998-ll-23 W O 97/462~1 PCTAUS97/10075 CROSSREACTIVITY DATA FOR
AGP-CLGVLGKLC-PG (LJP 688) ACA SERA WITH CARDIOLlPfN/~2.GPI-COATED PLATES
ACA SERUM Nr. ICso~ mg/mL, for peptide LJP
[1~ 6501 RS, RFI, 0.8991.1 [2] 6626 RS 1.09 [3] 6635 RS
METHODS OF TREATMENT FOR APL ANTIBODY-l~IEDIATED
PATHOLOGIES
CROSS-REFERENCE APPLICATIONS
This application is a continuation-in-part application of U.S. Serial No. 08/660,092, filed June 6, 1996, which is a continuation in-part of U.S. Serial No. 08/482,651, filed June 7, 1995.
TECHNICAL FIELD
This invention is in the field of immunology and relates to compositions and methods for treating and diagnosing antiphospholipid (aPL) antibody-mediated pathologies. More specifically, the invention relates to conjugates of chemically-defined nonimmunogenic valency platform molecules and immunospecific analogs of aPL-binding epitopes as well as m-ethods and compositions for producing these conjugates. Optimized analogs lack T cell epitopes. In addition, the invention relates to diagnostic assays for detecting the presence of and quantitating the amount of antiphospholipid antibodies in a biological sample. The invention also relates to a method of utili7in~ random peptide libraries to identify immunospecific analogs of aPL-binding epitopes.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Antiphospholipid antibodies occur in autoimmune ~ e~ce~ such as systemic lupus eryth~m~tosus (SLE) and antiphospholipid antibody syndrome (APS) as well as in association with infections and dru~ therapy. APS is characterized by one or more clinical features such as arterial or venous thrombosis, thrombocytopenia and fetal loss. APS may be primary or it may be associated with other conditions, primarily, SLE. (PHOSPHOLIPID-BINDING
ANTIBODIES (Harris et al., eds., CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, 1991); McNeil et al. ADVANCES IN IMMUNOLOGY, Vol. 49, FP- 193-2~1 (Austen et al., eds., SUBSTIIU~E SHEl' ff~ULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 - W O97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 Academic Press, San Diego, CA, 1991)). Approximately 30-40% of patients with SLE have aPL, however, 50% of patients with aPL antibodies do not have SLE.
This 50% may have other autoimmune rheurnatic ~ e~es, miscellaneous conditions or they may have been subjected to drug therapy, particularly chlorpromazine. In one study of 70 patients, 26 males and 44 females, with primary APS (PAPS) but no evidence of S~E, the following features were observed: deep venous thrombosis (DVT) in 31; arterial occlusion in 31, particularly stroke or transient ischemia; myocardial infarctions in 15; l'eCUllellt fetal loss in 24; thrombocytopenia (TCP) in 32; 10 had a positive Coombs' test;
l 0 Evans' syndrome in 7; anti-nuclear antibody (ANA) in 32, but less than 1: 160 in 29; and antimitochondrial antibody (AMA) in approximately 24. (McNeil et al., supra). Estimates vary but in about 5% of all stroke patients, aPL antibodies are thought to be an important contributing factor.
Transient aPL antibodies, such as those detected in a VDRL test, occur during many infections. Approximately 30% of patients po~cessing persistent aPL
antibodies have suffered a thrombic event. The presence of aPL antibodies defines a group of patients within SLE who display a syndrome of clinical features consisting of one or more of thrombosis, TCP, and fetal loss. The risk of this syndrome in SLE overall is around 25%; this risk increases to 40% in the presence of aPL antibodies and decreases to 15% in their absence. Because aPL
antibodies were thought to be directed at phospholipids in plasma membranes, it has been postulated that they may exert di-e~,t ~dlhogenic effects in vivo by interfering with hemostatic processes that take place on the phospholipid membranes of cells such as platelets or endothelium. ln patients ~,vith PAPS, the fact that aPL antibodies appear to be the only risk factor present is further evidence that these antibodies have a direct pathogenic role. Induction of PAPS
by immunizing mice with human anticardiolipin antibodies is the best evidence yet that aPL antibodies are directly pathogenic (Bakimer et al. 1992 J. Clin.
Invest. 89:1558-1563; Blank et al. 1991 Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 88:3069-3073).
SlJBSmUrE SHEEr ~(IJLE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 Measurement of aPL antibodies in the clinical environment is still an imperfect art. A commercially available set of standard antisera (APL
Diagnostics, Inc., Louisville, KY) allow generation of a standard curve for - comparison of assays performed in various laboratories. A great deal of inconsistency exists, however, between the results obtained at these laboratories regarding the exact GPL and MPL, the unit of mea~u~e~ ,nl for IgG and IgM
antiphospholipid antibodies, respectively, ratings for given sera and the levels of GPL and MPL that are categorized as high, medium or low titer. The available commercial kits vary greatly in the values assigned to the commercially available standards (Reber et al. (1995) Thrombosis and Haemostat. 73:444-452). In spite of these limitations, there is general agreement that the epitopes recognized byantibodies in APS, PAPS and other aPL antibody-me~ ted Ai~e~ces including recurrent stroke and recurrent fetal loss are located in the 5th domain of ~2-GPI
and are exposed to the antibody following binding Of ,B2-GPI to cardiolipin.
It is now generally accepted that aPL antibodies recognize an antigenic complex comprised of ~2-glycoprotein I (~2-GPI) and negatively-charged phospholipid, e.g., cardiolipin (McNeil et al. (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
87:4120-4124; Galli et al. (1990) Lancet I:1544-1547) (hereinafter "aPL
imrnunogen"). ~2-GPI is a minor plasma glycoprotein found free and in ''O association with lipoprotein lipids where it is also known as apolipoprotein H
(apo H). It consists of five independently folding domains referred to as Sushi or short consensus repeat domains that resemble similar domains in other proteins.
~2-GPI has been reported to undergo antigenic and conformational changes upon -- binding phospholipid (Wag~onkneckt et al. (1991) Thromb. Haemostas.
69:361-365; Jones et al. (1992) Proc. 5th Intl. Symp. Antiphospholipid Antibodies (Abstract S5)). The fifth domain contains the putative sites of lipid binding and - aPL antibody binding (Hunt J. and S. Krilis, (1994) J. Immunol. 152:653-659;
Lauer et al. (1993) Immunol. 80:22-28). The pathological meç~h~ni~m for aPL is unknown (McNeil et al., supra). Most explanations invoke endothelial cell function or platelet involvement (Haselaar et al. (1990) Thromb. Haemostas.
SUBSlllU~E SHEET ~lll~ 26) ' CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 97146251 PCTrUS97/10075 63: 169- 173). These explanations suggest that following blood vessel endothelial cell injury or platelet activation, the exposure or transbilayer migration of anionic phospholipid to the plasma-exposed surface may lead to ~2-GPI-binding and trigger aPL antibody formation.
aPL antibodies may be directly l~lvlhlolnbotic by reducing prostacyclin forrnation (Vermylen, J. and J. Amout (1992) J. Clin. Lab. Med 120:10-12); by direct interference with the action of coagulation proteins; or by blocking the ability of ,~2-GPI to inhibit the intrinsic blood coagulation pathway, platelet p~.~thlolllbinase activity, and ADP-mediated platelet aggregation (Arvieux et al.
(1993) Thromb. Haemostas. 60:336-341).
A major new tool in medicinal chPrni~try in the search for lead compounds has been the advent of combinatorial libraries providing vast molecular diversity.
Molecular diversity may arise from chemical synthesis or from biological systems(Scott., J.K. RATIONAL DRUG DESIGN (CRC Press~ ~- einer, D.B. and W.V. Williarns, eds., Boca, Raton, FL., 1994); Moos et al. (1993) Ann. Reports Med. Chem. 28:315324). By displaying random peptides on the surface of filarnentous phage, epitope libraries cont~ining hundreds of millions of clones for probing by clinically significant antibodies have been created (Scott, J.K. and G.P.
Smith (1990) Science 249:286-390; Cesareni, G. (1992) FEBS Lett. 307:66-70).
Such phage libraries are prepared by incorporating randomized oligonucleotide sequences into the phage genome, usually the pIII gene, which encode unique peptide sequences on the surface of each phage. Following sequential rounds of affinity purification and arnplification, those phage that bind antibody are prop~g~t~d in E. coli and the binding peptides identified by sequ~nring the col,es~onding coding region of viral DNA. In most cases, subsequent study will involve corresponding synthetic peptides after establishing their ability to bind antibody. Phage-based libraries have been used to rnimic discontinuous epitopes (Luzzago et al. (1993) Gene 128:51-57; BaLass et al. (1993) Proc. Matl. Acad Sci.
90:10638-10642). The potential plasma instability of peptide-based drugs has SUBSTIIU~E SHEEr ffWLE 26) .. . . _ CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 97146251 PCTrUS97/10075 S ~ ' been succes~fully overcome by N-terrninal blocking or by the judicious use of amino acid analogs (Powell, M.F. (1993) Ann. Reports Med. Chem. 28:285-293).
At present there is no selective, immunospecific therapy for patients showing high titers of aPL antibodies. In many cases use of drugs such as aspirin, S steroids, and warfarin has proven to be largely inadequate (PHOSPHOLIPID-BINDING ANTIBODIES (Harris et al., eds., CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, 1991);
McNeil et al., supra). Synthetic mimetic peptides, characterized by (i) the inability to activate T cells while (ii) ret~inine the ability to bind immune B cells, are used to tolerize B cells in an antigen-specific manner. This technology is disclosed in co-owned, co-pending U.S. Patent Application, Serial No. 08/118,055, filed September 8, 1993, and U.S. Patent No. 5,268,454, which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. As disclosed in the application and patent cited above, B cell tolerance entails ~flmini~tçring suchpeptides conjugated to multivalent, stable, non-immunogenic valency platforms inorder to abrogate antibody production via B cell anergy or clonal deletion aftercross-linking surfare irnmunoglobulin.
Although the exact molecular nature of the target epitopes recognized by aPL antibodies is unknown, the use of peptides derived from epitope libraries will allow for the construction of s.lcces~ful tolerogens. B cell tolerogens for the treatment of human systemic lupus erythem~tosus-related nephritis have also beendisclosed in co-owned U.S. Patent Nos. 5,276,013 and 5,162,515 which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.
DISCLOSURE OF THE ~NVENTION
This invention resides in the discovery of a method for identifying analogs of key epitopes recognized by aPL antibodies in patients suffering from PAPS, APS and other aPL antibody-me~ te~ e~ces, such as recurrent stroke and recurrent fetal loss, using random peptide phage libraries.
Accordingly, one aspect of the invention is an improved method for screening random peptide phage libraries in order to identify the peptide SUBSmUrE SHEET ff'~(llE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W Og7/46251 PCT~US97/1007S
sequences which best mimic the epitopes recognized by aPL antibodies. This method comprises the steps of. (a) biopanning the library using methods modifiedfrom those known in the art; (b) elimin~ting very weakly-binding phage by rnicropA~ g the phage screened from step (a) by (i) incubating the phage in microplate wells coated with aPL antibody bound to Protein G, (ii) washing the microplate wells to remove unbound phage, (iii) eluting the bound phage, and (iv) infecting a microorganism such as E. coli with the eluted phage and counting the number of infected microorg~ni.cmc by plating on agar; (c) determining the strongest-binding clones recovered in (b) by evaluation via phagecapture ELISA
by (i) coating the wells of a microplate with aPL antibody, (ii) incubating the strongest-binding clones identified by micl~palmillg in (b) in the coated wells and washing away unbound plialye, III I ing the nurnber of phage bound to the antibody using an enzyme-conjugated goat anti-phage antibody in a calorimetric ELISA assay and, if several equivalent strongly-binding clones are identified, an additional round of (d) phage-ELISA on the strongest-binding phagecapture-ELISA clone.
In this regard, the invention encomp~csec a method for identifying analogs of epitopes which specifically bind aPL antibodies isolated from hum~n~ suffering from an aPL antibody-mediated disease comprising: (a) pr~pa~ g phage random peptide libraries; (b) screening said libraries with aPL antibodies to identify aPL
mimetic epitopes, wherein said screening comprises (i) screening said libraries by biopal~ning; (ii) further screening phage isolated by biopa~ g in (i) by mi~;loyal~ling; and (iii) identifying phage cont~ining aPL antibody high-affinity binding peptides recovered in (ii) by imm-lno~cc~y.
The invention also encomp~cses a method of biop~ ing phage random peptide libraries to identify and isolate peptides which bind to aPL antibody comprising: (a) reacting affmity-purified aPL antibody with phage bearing random peptide inserts; (b) recovering phage bearing random peptide inserts which bind to the aPL antibody; (c) infecting a microorganism with phage SUBSllTUrE SHEEr ffWlE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 97/46251 PCTrUS97110075 recovered in (b); and (d) culturing the infected microorganism in an antibiotic-cont~ining medium in order to isolate the phage.
The invention further encomr~ses a method of micrup~ ing phage . random peptide libraries to identify and isolate peptides having a high binding affinity to aPL antibodies comprising: (a) isolating phage bearing random peptide inserts by biop~nning; (b) incubating the phage recovered in step (a) in microplate wells coated with aPL antibody bound to Protein G; (c) washing the microplate wells to remove unbound phage; (d) eluting bound phage; and (e) infecting a microorganism with phage recovered in (d); and (f) culturing the infected microorganism in an antibiotic-cont~ining medium in order to isolate the phage.
The invention also encompacses the above method described wherein the immunoassay is a phage-capture ELISA comprising: (a) incubating phage bearing random peptide inserts isolated by mi~lupalming in the microplate wells coated with aPL antibody; (b) washing away unbound phage;(c) incubating an enzyme-labeled anti-phage antibody to the wells; (d) washing away unbound enzyme-labeled anti-phage antibody; (e) adding a calorimetric substrate; and (f) measuring the absorbance of the substrate to identify lilgt-t affinity-binding pliage.
Also encomp~sed by the invention is the method described above and further comprising performing an additional phage-capture ELISA assay of the high affinitybinding phage comprising: (a) coating a uniform amount of the phageon microplate wells; (b) incubating aPL antibody in the wells; (c) washing away unbound antibody; (e) incubating an enzyme-labeled anti-aPL antibody with the bound aPL antibody; (f) washing away unbound enzyme-labeled anti-aPL
antibody; (g) adding a calorimetric substrate to the wells; and (h) measuring the absorbance of the substrate to measure the relative binding affinity of the phage.
The invention also encomp~c.ces the method described above wherein the immunoassay is a colony-blot imm--no~cs~y comprising: (a) culturing a microorganism infected with phage bearing random peptide inserts on a nitrocellulose membrane atop an agar-cont~ining culture medium; (b) replicate transferring the microorganism cultured in (a) by blotting the microorganism on a SlJBSmUrE SHEET ffWLE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 97/46251 PCTrUS97/1007S
8 ~ -second nitrocellulose membrane atop an agarcont~ining culture medium;
(c) in~ubatin~ the transferred microorg~ni~m;(d) Iysing the microorg~ni.cm;
(e) digesting the microorganism with Iysozyme; (f) blocking the membrane with a gelatin solution; (g) incub~ting the membrane with aPL antibody; (h) washing away unbound aPL antibody; (i) incub~tine a enzyme-labeled anti-aPL antibody with the nitrocellulose membrane; (j) washing away unbound enzyme-labeled anti-aPL antibody; (k) adding a calorimetric substrate; and (I) measuring the abso~ ce of the substrate to identify high affmity-binding phage.
A method for assaying and ranking, for affinity-binding characteristics, epitopes which specifically bind aPL antibodies isolated from humzln~ suffering from an aPL antibody-me~liated disease is also encompassed, the method comprising: (a) coating wells of a microtitration plate with cardiolipin; (b) adding adult bovine or human serum as a source of ~2-GPI to bind to the cardiolipin andto prevent non-specific binding to the wells of the plate; (c) incubating a solution of monomeric analog and a high-titered aPL antibody for a pre-determined time;
(d) adding the aPL antibody/analog mixture to wells of the microtitration plate and incubating for a pre-determined time; (e) washing the wells to wash away unbound aPL antibody; (f) adding anti-human IgG conjugated with a label (e.g., an enzyme) to the wells of the plate and incubating for a pre-determined time;
(g) washing the wells to wash away unbound anti-human IgG conjugate;
(h) adding a substrate for the labeled conjugate and developing the substrate/label reaction for a pre-determined time; (i) measuring the end-product of the substrate/label reaction to quantitate the amount of aPL antibody bound to the well; (j) calculating the percentage inhibition, if any, of binding of the aPL
antibody to determine the affinity of the analog to the aPL antibody.
Another aspect of the invention encomp~cses a fluorescence polarization peptide binding assay for determining the dissociation constants for peptides that bind to aPL antibodies. This assay detects direct binding of peptides to aPL
antibodies.
SUBSmU~E SHEr ffUlLE 26) - CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 W O97/46251 PCT~US97/10075 g The invention also encompasses a diagnostic immunoassay, for deterrnining the presence of aPL antibody in body fluids taken from subjects suspected of suffering from an aPL antibody-me~ te~l disease comprising contacting a sample of a body fluid with an analog of an epitope which specifically binds aPL antibodies and det~ hling by methods well known in the art whether aPL antibodies are present in the body fluid and, if present, ' quanlilaLing the amount of aPL antibodies present in the fluid. One such immunoassay comprises: (a) coating wells of a microlil~Lion plate with an analogof an epitope which specifically binds aPL antibodies; (b) washing the wells to wash away unbound analog; (cladding a test sarnple of a body fluid to the wells and incubating for a pre-deterrnined time; (d) washing the wells to remove unbound test sample; (e) adding anti-human IgG conjugated with a label to the wells of the plate and incubating for a predetermined time; (f) washing the wells to wash away unbound anti-human IgG conjugate; (g) adding a substrate for the labeled conjugate and developing the substrate/label reaction for a pre-determined time; (h) measuring the end-product of the substrate/label reaction to determinethe presence of anti-aPL antibody in the test sarnple. A diagnostic imrnunoassayas described above wherein the imm~.no~cs~y is quantitative is also encomp~cseclThe phage-ELISA assay consists of (i) coating a uniform arnount of dirre,c.,~ clones on wells of a microtitration plate followed by (ii) identifying the peptide inserts which most strongly bind aPL antibody by adding antibody to the wells and developing the reaction with an enzyme-labeled anti-hurnan IgG
conjugate. The random peptides displayed by the phage which have a high binding affinity to aPL antibody as measured by phage-ELISA, colony blot or phage-capture-ELISA represent the analogs of the aPL-specific epitope. These peptides are then synth-oci7ed and ranked for strength of binding using col,~l,elilion assays.
Another aspect of the invention is aPL antibody-binding analogs that bind specifically to B cells to which an aPL epitope binds. Optimized analogs lack ~ cell epitope(s).
SUBS~ E SHEEr ~RULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 Wo 97/46251 PcTrus97lloo75 Yet another aspect of the invention is a composition for inducing specific B cell tolerance to an aPL immunogen comprising a conjugate of a nonimmlmogenic valency platform molecule and an aPL antibody-binding analog that (a) binds specifically to B cells to which an aPL inlinllnogen binds and (b) lacks T cell epitope(s).
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
Figure 1 shows that the substitution of fish gelatin for adult bovine senitn abolished all anticardiolipin (ACA) activity in an ELISA assay of a commercial aPL antibody standard. This result supported the fin-1ings of McNeil et al., supra, and Galli et al., supra, concerning the importance of ~2-glycoprotein I (~2-GPI) in defining the target epitope(s) of ACA.
Figure 2 shows that resin-bound analog SAI2 immunospecifically binds to affinity-purified IgG designated ACA-6501.
Figure 3 illustrates that the aPL antibody-binding analogs derived from screening with ACA-6626 bound aPL antisera but did not bind normal sera.
Figure 4 also illustrates that the ACA-6501/5A12 analog immunospecifically binds ACA-6501 antiserum and is crossreactive with ACA-6626.
Figures 4 and 5 illustrate that while the ACA-6501/5A12 and ACA-6626/4D3 aPL antibody-binding analogs derived from screening with methods within the instant invention bind pre~elel-lially with the s~l~ellillg antibody, a significant degree of crossreactivity was detecte-l Figure 6 illustrates method for calcul~ting the GPL value for ACA-6501 aPL antibody.
Figure 7 shows the activity of affinity-isolated ACA-6501 compared to GPL standard sera.
Figure 8 illustrates the dramatic drop in se~uence diversity of the isolated clones by the fourth round of biopanning.
SUBSmlrrE SffER ff~ULE 28) ~ , CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 - wo 97/46251 PCT/US97tlOo75 11 ' Figure 9 illustrates that three clones (3AI2, 3B3 and 3A5) exhibited a very strong imrnunospecific signal in the phage-capture ELISA using ACA-6635 whereas all clones tested were unreactive with normal IgG.
Figure 10 shows the strong signal exhibited by seven clones in a phage-ELISA using ACA-65 0 1.
Figure 11 shows the results of a co~ e-binding ELISA obtained with peptides 5A12, CB2 and 3B10 using ACA-6501. 0.16 ~lg of Peptide 5AI2 produced 50% inhibition of binding of ACA-6501 aPL antibody to tetravalent peptide ACA6501/3B10 bound to polystyrene microplate wells, whereas 0.08 ~lg of CB2 and 0.54 ~g of 3B10 were required to produce 50% inhibition.
Figure 12 illustrates the comparative activity of modified ACA-6641 /3G3 analogs.
Figure 13 illustrates that the 50% inhibition values for peptides 139, 142 and 143 in a competitive-binding ELISA usi ng ACA-6501 aPL antibody were 6.9, 0.7 and 0.9 llg, respectively.
Figure 14 illustrates the effects of sub~liluling a-Me-Pro at positions 3, 9 and both 3 and 9 in peptide 3B 10. Substitution of a-Me-Pro at position 9 increased activity of the peptide four-fold co~ ~ed to the "native" peptide.
Figure 15 shows that peptide 6641/3G3 (LJP 688) is highly cross-reactive with nine affmity-purified ACA antibodies.
Figures 16 and 17 show the dose-dependent reduction in anti-685 antibody ABC at 108M using spleen cells from mice -immnni7Pd with LJP 685-KLH after the spleen cells were incubated with 100, 20 and 4 ~lM of LJP 685-MTU-DABA-PEG conjugate (compound 36 and LJP 685-ATU-MTU-AHAB-TEG conjugate (compound 35), respectively, for 2 hours.
Figure 18 displays the NMR structure closest to the centroid of the nine - structures elucidated for peptide 925 and is a reasonable re~leselltation of the shape of the peptide 925 molecule.
SllBSmUrE SHEEr ffWLE 26) - CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W 0971462~1 PCTrUS97/1007 Figure 19 compares the structure of peptide 925 (labeled at the bottom of the figure as 3G33 with the str~cture of peptide 5A12. Both peptides have turns at approximately the same positions in the peptide sequence.
Figures 20A and 20B illustrate that the pharmacophore of aPL analogs has been tentatively identified as a small hydrophobic group and a positively charged group. The gem-dimethyl and amino groups of peptide 92S are tentatively identified as the ph~ cophore of this peptide as shown in Figure 20A. The lengths of the hydrocarbon linkers that tether the phan-nacophore groups to somescaffold are specified in Figure 20A as well as the distances s~ g the points at which these linkers are attached to the scaffold.
Figure 21 illustrates inhibition of ~2GPI by 6501-derived peptides with diluted 6501 serum.
Figure 22 shows the ACA-6701 titration of CB2*-F;
FITCGPCILLARDRCG .
Figure 23 shows the ACA-6501 titration of CB2*-F:
FITCGPCILLARDRCG .
Figure 24 shows complete ACA-6501 titration of CB2*-F:
FITCGPCILLARDRCG .
Figure 25 shows the displacement of CB2*-F from ACA-6701 using 1.04 equivalents of CB2*.
Figure 26 shows cFP titration using CB2* to displace CB2*-F from ACA6701.
Figure 27 shows cFP titration using 3B10 to displace CB2* -F from ACA6701.
Figure 28 shows the dose response of the (LJP685)4/MTU-AHAB-TEG
conjugate for tolerance activity.
Figure 29 shows the dose response of the (LJP685)4/MTU-DABA-TEG
conjugate for tolerance activity.
Figure 30 shows the dose response of tolerance activity of the (LJP685)4/MTI~-DABA-TEG conjugate tested in the in vitro model.
SUBSTI~UrE SHEl ~(lJLE 2S) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 wO 97/46251 PCT/US97/10075 Figure 31 shows the dose response of tolerance activity of the (L~P685)4/MTU-DABA-TEG conjugate tested in the in vitro model.
Figure 32 shows the tolerizing effect of the (LJP685)4/MTU-AHAB-TEG
- conjugate co~ )~;ng various ~rlmini~trative routes and dosage ranges.
s MODES FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION
A. Definitions As used herein the term "aPL antibody" means any antibody which specifically binds ~2-GPI that mediates disease.
As used herein the term "B cell anergy" intends unresponsiveness of those B cells requiring T cell help to produce and secrete antibody and includes, without limitation, clonal deletion of imm~tllre and/or mature B cells and/or the inability of B cells to produce antibody.
"Unresponsiveness" means a therapeutically effective reduction in the humoral response to an immunogen. Qu~lli~lively the reduction (as measured by reduction in antibody production) is at least 50%, preferably at least 75%, and mostpreferably 100%.
"AntibodY" means those antibodies which are T cell dependent.
As used herein the term "immunogen" means an entity that elicits a humoral immune response comprising aPL antibodies. Immunogens have both B cell epitopes and T cell epitopes. aPL immunogens that are involved in aPL
antibody-mediated pathologies may be external (foreign to the individual) immunogens such as drugs, including native biological substances foreign to the individual such as theld~,~ulic proteins, peptides and antibodies, and the like or self-imrnunogens (autoi,l.nlullogens) such as those associated with antibody-mediated hypercoagulability (stroke).
The term "analog" of an immunogen intends a molecule that (a) binds specifically to an antibody to wl-iich the immunogen binds specifically and (b) lacks T cell epitopes. Although the analog will normally be a fragment or SUBSmU~E SHEEr (RULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 W O 97/46251 PCT~US97/10075 derivative of the immunogen and thus be of the sarne chemical class as the immunogen (e.g., the immunogen is a polypeptide and the analog is a polypeptide), chemical similarity is not essential. Accordingly, the analog may be of a different chemical class than the inllmmogen (e.g., the imrnunogen is a carbohydrate and the analog is a polypeptide) as long as it has the functional characteristics (a) and (b) above. The analog may be a peptide, earbohydrate, lipid, lipopolysaccharide, nucleic acid or other biochemical entity. Further, the chemical structure of neither the inununogen nor the analog need be defined for the purposes of this invention.
The terrn "analog" of an immunogen also encomp~ses the terrn "mimotope." The term "mimotope" intends a molecule which co"lpelilively inhibits the antibody from binding the immunogen. Because it specifically binds the antibody, the mimotope is considered to mimic the antigenic detennin~ntc of the immunogen.
As used herein "valency platforrn molecule" means a nonimmnnogenic molecule cont~ining sites which facilitate the at~chment of a discreet number ofanalogs of imrnunogens.
~'Nonimmuno~enic" is used to describe the valency platform molecule and means that the valency platform molecule elicits substantially no imrnune response when it is ~1minictered by itself to an individual.
As used herein "individual" denotes a member of the m~mm~ n species and includes hllm~nc, primates, mice and dornestic ~nimz~lc such as cattle and sheep, sports ~nim~lc such as horses, and pets such as dogs and eats.
As used herein "pharmaeophore" means the three ~1imPncional orientation and chemical plupel Lies of key groups involved in binding of an aPL analog to the antibody target.
B. Identification of aPL Antibody-binding Analo~s aPL antibody-binding analogs may be identified by screening candidate molecules to determine whether or not they (a) bind specifieally to aPL antibodies SUBSllTUrE SHEEr ff~(uLE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 and (b) lack T cell epitopes. Specific binding to aPL antibodies may be determined using conventional immllno~ ys such as the ELISA assays described in the examples below and the presence or absence of T cell epitopes may be determined by conventional T cell activation assays also described in the examples. In this regard, an analo~ which "binds specificàlly" to serum antibodies to the immunogen exhibits a reasonable affinity thereto, e.g, 107M-I.The presence or absence of T cell epitopes may be determined using a tritiated thymidine incorporation assay disclosed in Serial No. 08/118,055. The presence of T cell epitopes can also be determined by measuring secretion of T cell-derived 0 Iymphokines by methods well known in the art. Analogs that fail to induce statistically significant incorporation of thymidine above background are deemedto lack T cell epitopes. It will be appreciated that the ~uantitative amount of thymidine incorporation may vary with the immunogen. Typically a stimulation index below about 2-3~ more usually about 1-2, is indicative of a lack of T cell1 5 epitopes.
C. Pl~p~.llion of Conju,eates The aPL antibody-binding analogs are coupled to a nonimmunogemc valency platfor;n molecule to prepare the conjugates of the invention. Preferredvalency platform molecules are biologically stabilized, i.e., they exhibit an in vivo excretion half-life oRen of hours to days to months to confer therapeutic efficacy, and are preferably composed of a synthetic single chain of defined composition.
They -will normally have a molecular weight in the range of about 200 to about 200,000, usually about 200 to about 20,000. Examples of valency platform -- molecules within the present invention are polymers such as polyethylene glycol (PEG), poly-D-lysine, polyvinyl alcohol and polyvinylpyrrollidone. P~efe.led polymers are based on polyethylene glycols (PEGS) having a molecular weight of about 200 to about 8,000.
Other valency platform molecules suitable for use within the present invention are the chemically-defined, non-polymeric valency platform molecules SUBSmUI E SHEEr ~IJLE 26) ' CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 . 16 disclosed in co-owned, co-pending U.S. patent application Serial No. 08/152,506,filed November 15, 1993, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
Particularly plcr~ d homogeneous chemically-defined valency platform molecules suitable for use within the present invention are derivatized 2,2'-ethylenedioxydiethylarnine (EDDA) and triethylene glycol (TEG).
Additional suitable valency platform molecules include t~ obenzene~ hept~minobetacyclodextrin, tetraaminol)enlaerytbritol~
1,4,8,1 I tetraazacyclotetra(~ec~ne (Cyclam) and 1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane (Cyclen).
Con}ugation of the aPL antibody-binding analog to the valency platform molecule may be effected in any number of ways, typically involving one or more crossliriking agents and functional groups on the analog and valency platform molecule.
Polypeptide analogs will contain amino acid sid;~..ain moieties containing functional groups such as amino, carboxyl, or sulfhydryl groups that will serve as sites for coupling the analog to the carrier. Residues that have such functionalgroups may be added to the analog if the analog does not already contain these groups. Such residues may be incorporated by solid phase synthesis techniques orrecombinant techniques, both of which are well known in the peptide synthesis arts. In the case of carbohydrate or lipid analogs, functional amino and sulfhydryl groups may be incorporated therein by conventional ch~ try. For in~t~nce, primary amino groups may be incorporated by reaction with ethylen~ mine in the presence of sodium cyanoborohydride and sulffiydryls may be introduced by reaction of c~ ehn.~ dihydrochloride followed by reduction with a standard disulfide reducing agent. In a similar fashion, the valency platform molecule may also be derivatized to contain functional groups if it does not already possess applopl;ate functional groups.
Hydrophilic linkers of variable lengths are useful for connecting peptides or other bioactive molecules to valency platform molecules. Suitable linkers include linear oligomers or polymers of ethylene glycol. Such linkers include SUBSTllUrE SI~ llJlE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 linkers with the formula RlS(CH2CH20)n.CH2CH20(CH2)mCO2R2 wherein n = 0-200? m = 1 or 2, Rl = H or a protecting group such as trityl, R2 = H or alkyl oraryl, e.g., 4-nitrophenyl ester. These linkers are useful in connecting a molecule cont~ining a thiol reactive group such as haloaceyl, maleiamide, etc., via a thioether to a second molecule which conlains an amino group via an amide bond.
These linkers are flexible with regard to the order of ~tt~chm~nt i.e., the thioether can be formed first or last.
The conjugates will normally be formulated for ~lmini~tration by injection (e.g., intraperitoneally, intravenously, subcutaneously, intramuscularly, etc.).Accordingly, they will typically combined with pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles such as saline, Ringer's solution, dextrose solution, and the like. Theconjugate will normally constitute about 0.01% to 10% by weight ofthe formulation. The conjugate is ~imini~tered to an individual in a ''therapeutically e~fective amount", i.e., an amount sufficient to produce B cell anergy to the involved irnmunogen and effect prophylaxis, improvement or elimin~tion of the antibody-mediated condition being addressed. The particular dosage regimen, i.e., dose, timing and repetition, will depend on the particular individual and that individual's medical history. Normally, a dose of about 1 ,ug to about 100 mg conjugate/kg body weight, preferably about 100 ~lg to about 10 mg/kg body weight, will be given weekly. Other a,o,ulo~iate dosing schedules would be as frequent as daily or 3 doses per week, or one dose per week, or one dose every two to four weeks, or one dose on a monthly or less frequent schedule depending on the individual or the disease state. Repetitive ~mini~trations, norrnally timed according to B cell turnover rates, may be required to achieve and/or m~int~in astate of humoral anergy. Such re~elili.le ~lmini~trations will typically involvetreatments of about 1 llg to about 10 mg/kg body weight or higher every 3 0 to 60 days, or sooner, if an increase in antibody titer is detected. Alternatively, sllct~ined continuous release formulations of the conjugates may be indicated for some pathologies. Various forrnulations and devices for achieving sustained release are known in the art.
SUBS~lTUlE SHEEr ff~ULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 WO 97/46251 PCT/USg7/10075 Anti-helper T ceil treatments may be ~rlmini~tered together with the conjugates. Such treatments usually employ agents that suppress T cells such as steroids or cyclosporin.
D. Nature of the anti~een for aPL antibodies S Initial studies on aPL antibodies by the inventors coincided with the publication of reports questioning the nature of the antigenic site recognized by these antibodies. Initially these antibodies were thought to recognize the cardiolipin molecule much like those antibodies detected in a VDRL test. As shown in Figure 1, substitution of fish gelatin for adult bovine serum in the anticardiolipin antibody (ACA) solid phase ELISA essentially abolished all ACA
activity of an antibody plep~dlion obtained commercially as an ACA standard.
This finding indicated the ACA antibodies recognized a determin~nt on a serum protein as proposed by McNeil et al., supra and Galli et al., supra, rather thancardiolipin itself This protein was shown by these authors to be ~2-GPI and, thus, the terms "ACA" or '~anti-cardiolipin antibodies" are really misnomers but are still used today to refer to these antibodies.
The majority of autoimmune, IgG aPL antibodies recognize determin~nt.
on the ,B2-GPI molecule. These epitopes may be formed or exposed on ~2-GPI
only upon its binding to cardiolipin (a neo epitope). Alternatively, the epitope on ,B2-GPI may exist in a single copy per ,B2-GPI molecule and may have low affinity for aPL antibodies. Sufficient avidity to m~int~in an antibody-antigen interaction might be reached only with the alignment of two of these sites on adjacent ~2-GPI
molecules by their binding to cardiolipin.
-- Additional insight into the ~2-GPI epitope structure has been gained by nuclear magnetic .~sonallce (NMR) analysis of aPL analogs within the present invention which mimic the native epitope(s) of ~2-GPI. For, example, a comparison of the NMR solution structure of two peptide aPL analogs that are highly crossreactive with aPL antibodies showed that both peptides have turns atapproximately the same positions in the peptide sequence (see Figures 18 and 19).
SUBSlllUrE SHEEr ~LE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 ~
WO 97/462~1 PCT/US97110075 E. ACA ELISA
The necessity of large-scale testing in connection with GPL scoring of clinical samples and chromatographic purifications of research antibodies and ~2-GPI led to the development of an ELISA assay for aPL antibodies with perforrnance in close agreement with a cornmercial kit and similar to the designfound to have the best reproducibility (Reber et al., supra). A modified ACA
ELISA has also been performed wherein ~2-GPI bound directly to certain microplates is used to bind aPL IgG directly in the absence of any cardiolipin first added to the microplate wells. (See, Roubey et al. (1996) Arthritis & ~h~llm~ticm 39:1606-1607; R.A.S. Roubey (1996) Arthritis & Rhenm~ti~m 39:1444 1454 F. Imrnnnoaffinity Purification of aPL Antibodies In order to isolate the aPL antibodies, multilarnellar, cardiolipin-cont~ining dispersions (liposomes; also containing cholesterol and dicetylphosphate) are incubated with aPL plasma (or serum). These liposomes are pelleted from the serum by centrifugation. After washing, the liposome mixture is disrupted by 2% octylglucoside detergent and applied to a protein A-agarose colurrm. Following extensive washings to first remove lipids and then to remove non-IgG components, IgG aPL antibody is eluted from protein A with mild acid, neutralized bufferexchanged, and tested in the ACA ELISA. This procedure yields aPL antibody enriched up to I 0,000-fold that is devoid of any cont~min~ting ~2-GPI as shown by western blotting with rabbit IgG anti-human ~2-GPI antisera. An additional affinitypurification step is performed by chromatography of the affinity-purified antibody on solid phase ~2-GPI. This second affinity-purification step is ~co,l~l~.ended as a result of the new awareness rega~ dhlg the greater clinical relevance of aPL antibodies that directly bind to ~2-GPI. It also serves to further ensure a final p,e~dlion devoid of cont~min~nt~, in particular ,B2-GPI.
SUBSllTUlE SffEEr ~RULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 G. Construction of Filamentous Pha~e Random Peptide Libraries Eleven different FTJSE 5 filamentous phage random peptide libraries on the p-III protein (five copies of p-III with peptide per phage) are constructed.These libraries provide a vast array of shapes and structures for the discovery of mimetic epitopes. Four libraries, .~esign~te.l "x" libraries, have peptide inserts that are 8, 10, 12, and 15 residues in length, respectively, and are flanked by proline residues on both the amino and carboxyl ends. The purpose of these proline residues is to disrupt any contribution to secondary structure that might arise from the native P-III protein and to project the insert into the solvent. The "y' " libraries contain eysteine-bounded inserts that are 6, 7, 8, 9, 1 1, and 13 amino acids long. The "y" library is the same as the "y"' library except that itlacks the 6 and 8 arnino acid inserts. These peptide inserts for both "y" and "y"' libraries are flanked by cysteine residues at both the amino and carboxyl ends to form cyclic, more rigid structures. Proline residues are incorporated outside these cysteine residues-for reasons similar to those for the "x" libraries above. The " x", "y"', and "y" libraries are located five residues from the amino terrninllc of the native p-III protein. The "z" library consists of random eight amino acid inserts located at the amino terrninus of the p-III protein and do not contain any fl~nking proline or cysteine residues. A cornbination of the "x," "y"' and "z" libraries represents eleven different libraries each with approximately one hundred million different peptide inserts.
These libraries are constructed by incorporation of random oligonucleotide sequences of the length app,opl;ate to give the desired length insert into the p-III
gene of fUSE 5 using standard molecular biology techniques. Following restriction endonuclease digestion of the fUSE 5 DNA, an excess of kin~ecl oligonucleotides provided as gapped duplexes is added and ligated. The DNA is then electroporated into E. coli and inserts are selected by culturing in tetracycline-cont~ining media. The phage from this culture (which contain the peptide insert) are isolated from the supernatant~ washed and resuspended in SUBSmUrE SHEEr ~IULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 buffer. Typically libraries are shown to have 7X108 independent clones at 8X10l2transducing units per mL.
~. Pha~e-screenin~ Methodology The essence of screening phage display peptide libraries lies in the ability to collapse billions of potential candidate phage to a relative few with 0l1tct~n-1ing l,lo~e.lies. The original screening protocols reco.. ~n-led by Scott, J.K. and G.P. Smith, (1990) Science 249:315-324 are significantly modified to facilitate the selection of the best epitopes for various aPL antibodies. These procedures are designed to apply greater stringency of selection as the screen progressed until a point is reached where a useful number of clones representing the best sequencescan be thoroughly investig~te~l With some antibodies, the library does not appear to have sequences which bind very tightly and if a method with a high degree of stringency is applied to the screen, no clones survive that are specific. On theother hand, the library frequently yields many clones that represent good analogs of the antigen and it is necessary to employ a method with a high degree of stringency to identify the best epitopes. For that reason, assays were developedwith varying degrees of stringency in order to identify the best epitopes from an epitope library screen. The assays are listed here in order of increasing stringency: BiopAnning < MicropAnning < Phage-Capture ELISA < Phage ELISA
= Colony Blot = Peptide ELISA.
(i) Biopanning "Biopa ~ g" describes the technique wherein affinity-purified aPL
antibody and phage bearing random peptide inserts are allowed to mix, following which antibody-specific recovery c~ ,s the bound phage. The phage confer tetracycline re~i~t~nce to E. coli that are prop~gAted in a tetracycline-cont~ining medium and then isolated. Multiple rounds of biopA~ g enrich the number of immunospecific phage in a sample. Phage are always recovered at the end of three to five rounds of selection but may represent only sequences that are SUBSlllUl E SHEEr ffUllE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 nonspecifically bound at low affinities for the selecting antibodies. A method for further evaluating these phage (miclop~ ing) is required.
(ii) Mi-,~ op~ ~lling An estim~tion of the relative strength of binding of the phage to the aPL
antibody can be determined by "microl)An~ -g " Miclopal~l~,ng is carried out following three or more rounds of bio,oalllling and uses the same antibody as employed in the bio~ g method. The method consists of dilution of the phage from the !ast round of bi(,p~ g and analyzing fifty or more of these clones by miclol,a~ g. Miclop~l~"ing is accomplished by growing each clone to a similar density and then incubating dilute phage at an optimal single concentration in microtitration wells previously coated with a constant amount of antibody. The optimal single concentration of phage is that cor.centration most likely to reveal the widest range of miclop~ g scores (from 0 to 4+) and~ thus, permit the greatest discrimination among the clones being tested. Il lS based on the 'mi~,lvpdl)llmg behavior of six randomly selected clones where the score is determined at each of several concentrations of phage obtained by serial dilution.
Following the incubation with antibody, the unbound phage are washed away and the amount of bound phage is used as an indication of the affinity of the phage insert for the antibody. The amount of bound phage is determined by elution withmild acid followed by neutralization and infection of E. coli. The nurnber of infected ~. coli are then quantitated by plating the microorg~ni~m~ on agar plates cont~ining tetracycline and then dete~ inillg colony densities achieved by each clone.
(iii) Phage-Capture ELISA
The phage-capture ELISA test was developed to provide an intermediate level assay to bridge the gap between the relatively low stringency of the micl~ ing assay and the high stringency of the phage- or peptide-ELISA
assays. Preliminary studies show that some antibody plepaldlions give too many positive clones by micropanning but none by phage-ELISA or peptide-ELISA.
SUBSmUrE SHEEr ff'~
.
CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 wo 97/46251 PCT/US97/10075 The limitation of the phage-ELlSA described below is that only five copies of p-III are located on each phage and even with a large nurnber of phage coated on a well, few copies of the insert are represented and detection requires that the antibody have a very high affinity for the insert. With the phage-capture ELISA,the signal is amplified many times which facilitates the detection of lower affinity, stable interactions between the antibody and the insert.
The phage-capture ELISA consists of the following steps. Microtitration wells are coated with aPL antibody and phage clones are added as in the mi~;lop~ ing assay. Unbound phage are washed away and the amount of bound phage is quantitated using an enzyme-conjugated goat antiserum which binds the major coat protein of the phage. Phage screened using phage-capture ELISA react with many aPL antibodies and provide a strong signal in subsequent ELISA
assays. This intermediate level of sensitivity allows for greater efficiency in the peptide synthesis effort since few microp~nning-positive phage are phage-captureELISA positive. As a result, peptides synthesized from positive phage-capture ELISA phage are generally immunoreactive.
(iv) Phage-FLISA
This method of selecting phage requires very tight binding of the insert to the screening antibody. Phage are directly coated onto wells of a microtitrationplate and incubated with the screening antibody. Following washes to remove unbound antibody, an anti-human IgG ~ lin~o phosph~t~ce conjugate is added to bind any aPL antibodies bound to the phage. APL antibodies are then detected by adding a calorimetric substrate to the well which will react with alkaline phosphatase according to methods well known in the art.
(v) Colony Blot This assay allows large-scale colony scleening of ~. coli infected by biopanned phage. This procedure is an alternative to phage-ELISA for identifyingimmunoreactive clones and exhibits a comparable level of sensitivity without requiring culturing of individual phage clones prior to testing. In this assay, E.
StlBSTllUI E SHEEr ~UlE 26) CA 022~6449 l998-ll-23 W 0 97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 coli infected with phage from a round of biop~nning are spread on a large diameter nitrocellulose (NC) membrane and cultured overnight on the surface of an agar plate cont~ining tetracycline (Barbas et al. (1991) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
USA 88:7978-7982). Each colony results from infection by phage cont~ining identical sequences. Several replicate transfer blots on NC are made using this NC "master" and are allowed to grow on the surface of an agar plate. Following the chemical and enzymatic disruption of phage-infected colonies on the blots, the phage may be probed by the techniques commonly used in Western blotting, i.e., staining or iitm-iunobtotting. Blots that have been blocked may be insub~t~d with the screening aPL antibody. Following washes to remove unbound antibody, an anti-human IgG horseradish peroxidase conjugate is added to bind to any aPL-antibody that is bound to phage. The addition of a calorimetric substrate allowsone to localize the discrete colonies in the master plate which replese immunospecific phage that may be cloned for further study.
(vi) Peptide-ELISA
Following DNA sequencing to determine the peptide insert sequences of the best-reacting phage in the assays described above, the corresponding peptides are made using standard Fmoc peptide chemistry as is well known in the art. For the peptide-ELlSA assay, the peptides can be made, for exarnple, as branched tetravalent molecules, i. e., each molecule has four copies of the insert. Such a molecule can coat the well of a microlill~tion plate and still have epitopes exposed to the solution to allow binding by an antibody. The tetravalent peptides are synthPsi7Pd by incorporating Iysines as branch points at the first two couplingsanalogous to the methods used for Multiple Antigenic Peptides (MAPS) (Posnett et al. (1988) J. Biol. C~em. 263:1719-1725). A spacer con~i~ting of glycine-serine-glycine-serine is added on each arm after the Iysines and then the insert, including the framework amino acids found in the phage, proline-glycine at the carboxyl ten-ninus and alanine-glycineproline at the amino terminus. All amino acids in this synthesis are added one at a time using standard Fmoc methods.
SUBSrllUlE SHEEl p'~lJLE 26) , . . .
- CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 W O97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 These peptides are then assayed by ELISA which is carried out by coating the peptides on miclo~ dLion wells and then assaying their reactivity with aPL
antibody in a standard ELISA format. In practice, the peptides usually bind verystrongly to the original screening antibody and show some cross-reactivity with other aPL antibodies. Controls of non-aPL antibodies are included to elimin~te nonspecific binding peptides.
(vii) Competitive Binding Peptide-ELlSA
Once ELISA-positive peptides are identified, it is necessary to quantitate their relative binding affinity to the aPL antibodies and to deterrnine whether or not two peptides bind the same population of antibodies in a given patient serumvia a peptide-competition ELISA assay. In this assay, various monomeric peptides compete with tetravalent peptides coated on a microtitration plate well.
To perform the assay, the peptides to be evaluated are synthesized as monomers, i.e., without the Iysine branches employed in the synthesis of the tetravalent peptides, using standard Fmoc chemistry. The monomeric peptides are then purified and dissolved at known concentrations. Wells of a miclotilldlion plate are coated with a tetravalent peptide known to bind to the aPL antibody. Serial dilutions of the monomeric peptides are incubated with a constant dilution of the aPL antibody. The dilution of the aPL antibody was previously determined by titering the antibody against the tetravalent peptide and selecting a dilution on the downslope of the titration curve. After inrllb~tin~ the antibody and monomeric peptides for one hour, the antibody/peptide solutions are added to the miclolilldlion wells and a standard calorimetric ELISA is performed. The concentration of each monomeric peptide that decreases binding of the aPL
antibody with the tetravalent peptide is dçtçrrninPrl by plotting the calorimetric readings obtained for each well. The 50% inhibition point is used as the measureof the relative strength of binding for the monomeric peptides.
A variation of this assay uses micloLil-dlion plates coated with human -glycoprotein I/cardiolipin (~2.GPI/CL) instead of tetravalent peptide and tests SUBSmUrE SHEEI a'~ULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 the ability of monomeric peptides to block the binding of aPL antibody to the epitope(s) on ~2 GPI/CL. In this assay, IgG-depleted hurnan serum at an optimized concentration is used as a source of ~2 GPI. The monomeric peptides atseveral concentrations are incubatecl with an optimized concentration of aPL
antibody in a manner analogous to the assay which employs tetravalent peptide asa plate substrate. Following the incubation of aPL/peptide in (~2 GPI/CL) plates, antibody binding and the peptide concentration required for 50% inhibition is deterrnined at half-maxim-al absorbance as in the tetravalent assay.
An additional variation of this assay tests the ability of monomeric peptides to block the binding of aPL antibody to ,~2 GPI coated directly on the wells of Nunc Maxisorp microtitration plates. In this variation, the use of cardiolipin is omitted and instead of fish gelatin, the reagent diluent and blocker used is nonfat milk/Tween.
(viii) Fluorescence Polarization Peptide Binding Assay This assay detects direct binding of the peptide to aPL antibody. Since aPL antibodies bind to ,B2 GPI (the antigen~, the ELISA competitive inhibition assay can show inhibition due to binding to ,B2-GPI as well inhibition due to binding of the peptide to the aPL antibody. Because binding to antibodies is required in order for the peptide to function as a Toleragen, it is essenti~l toestablish that a peptide can directly bind to an aPL antibody. This assay is used to deterrnine the dissociation con~t~nt~ for peptides that bind to two aPL antibodies, ACA-6501 and ACA-6701. While the ELISA assay is useful for high throughput s~ g because it requires less antibody than the Fluor~sct~n~e Polarization assay, however, ELISA-positive peptides should be fflfther evaluated by the Fluorescence Polarization assay to deterrnine whether they are capable of directly binding with aPL antibody.
SUBSrlTUrE SHEEr ~IJLE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 -(ix) Evaluation of amino acid contributions to-binding by substitution and deletion synthesis The desired epitope for tolerance induction should have as strong an interaction with as many of the aPL antibodies as possible but not contain any s ~Innecess~ry residues. In order to .~.duce the minimllm constitution of an epitope, analogs of each peptide are made (i) that lack given residues, for example, the framework residues at the carboxyl and/or amino terrnini are deleted, or (ii) inwhich amino acid substitutions have been made which differ from sequences found in the epitope library screen. These amino acid substitutions may be either natural, e.g., isoleucine for ieucine, or unnatural, e.g., alpha methyl proline for proline. The effect of these deletions and/or substitutions are then measured via peptide-competition ELISA.
(x) Grouping of aPL Sera Specificities by Mutagenesis of the 5th domain Of ~2 GPI
For a Tolerogen to be generally effective, it must bind a major portion of the aPL antibodies in the majority of patients. It is important to deterrnine ifseveral antibodies from different patients bind identical residues within the eighty-four amino acid 5th domain of ~2-GPI which has been suggested by others to contain the target epitope. If several antibodies bind identical residues, a single '0 mimotope derived from the structural data of the peptides can be constructed which will react with all the antibodies. On the other hand, if the antibodies bind to different residues, a unique tolerogen would be required for each antibody.
Site-directed mutagenesis was performed to identify if key residues involved in aPL antibody binding reside in the 5th domain of ,B2-GPI. The resl.lting mutant ~2-GPIs were assayed for reactivity with several aPL antibodies. The results were inconclusive. A fusion protein comprising the 5th domain Of ~2 GPI and glutathionine S transferase (GST) was obtained from A. Steink~c~erer and expressed in E coli (Steink~serer et al. (1992) FEBS Lett. 313:193-197). This fusion protein was sllcces~fully substituted for native ~2 GPI in the ACA ELISA.Amino acid substitutions are engineered using standard sitedirected mutagenesis.
SUBSlllUrE SHEEI ffUJlE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 W O 97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 . 28 I. Isolation of SYnthetic aPL Epitopes Antibody ACA-6501, from a patient with a GPL score of 151 (high titer) and a historyof recurrent stroke, fetal loss, lupus and three aortic valve replacements was immunoaffinity purified on dardiolipin liposomes. The antibody was used in four separate phage library screens, using the xy, the xyz,the xy'z, and a special pro/cysbounded 7-mer library where, based on the previous screens, Arg was fixed at the seventh position. As shown in Table 1, 36 sequences were obtained in phage that micropalmed (out of 140 tested). These appear quite homologous and the conserved DR residues at positions 6 and 7 are l O notably striking. The consensus sequence is CLLLAPDRC. Despite this homology, only seven phage (see Table 2) were positive after phage-ELISA
calorimetric testing. Screening the xy'z phage with affinity purified ACA-6626 (from a patient with a high, but lower than ACA-6501, titer) yielded five uniquesequences that were phage-ELISA tested. None were coi~)r positive but two were positive when the ELISA immunoconjugate was developed with a chemiluminescent substrate. The sequence motif associated with ACA-6626 appears related but is different from that seen with ACA-6501 (see Table 3). Both antibodies preferred the cys-bounded (probably cyclized and constrained) epitopes over the open pro-bounded sequences.
SUBSTlIUTE SHEEr ff~ULE 26) - PCr/US97/10075 TABLE I
ACA-6501 Pha~e Library Sequences Clone Sequence Clone Sequence xy Library 2101 CNILV~LDRC
xyz Library 3E4 ' CLFVALDRC SBI CWFRSQSSC
3E7 CILLAHDRC 3El ICSPILRGNC
xy'z Library 2FlO CNILVLDRC 2D3 CPLHTHHTC
Custom (X)6R Library Gll CTILTPDRC IA4 CNLLALDRC
2H2 CTILTLDRC lC3 CLLLAIDRC
2HIO CTLLTPDRC ~ IDIOCTIITQDRC
SUBSmU~E SHEEr ff~ULE 26) CA 02256449 l998-ll-23 W O 97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 ACA-6501 Phage Library Sequences Clone Sequence CloneSequence 2Hl CLILTPDRC IA9 CSSKSYWRC
xy'z Libraly, Colony Blot Screening Assay SUBSmUlE SHEEr (~UlE 26) .
W O 97/46251 PCTrUS97/1007 ACA-6501 Colorimetric ELISA-positive Phage Clone Sequence Clone Sequence 3BlO CLLLAPDRC* 3E7 CILLAHDRC
* Corresponds to consensus or average sequence ACA-6626 xy'z Phage Library Sequences Clone Sequence Clone Sequence ACA-6644 is another high-titered aPL antibody that was used to screen thepooled P-IlI phage libraries according to mPthorl~ described herein. The following sequences were discovered:
ACA-6644/CBe GILLNEFA
ACA-6644/CBd GILTIDNL
ACA-66644/CBf GILALDYV
SUBSnTUTE SHEEr ~n~ 26) CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 WO 97/46251 PCTAU~97/10075 These sequences all were derived from the component "z" epitope library that lacks phage framework residues at the N-terrninus. When synthesized as peptides the sequences were im.munoreactive with several ACA sera including ACA-6644 and ACA-6501. Analysis revealed unsuspected homologies with the S sequences previously obtained with ACA-6501 as illustrated in Table 4.
ACA-6644/CBdGILTIDNL
ACA-6644/CBf GILALDW
ACA-6501/2FIOCNILVLD~C
ACA-6644/CBcGILLNEFA
ACA-6501/lDIOCTIITODRC
The convergent sequence homology from two very ~ imil~r source libraries screened by these two aPL antibodies suggests that the sequences may mimic a major, perhaps imrnunodominant, region in the native target antigen.
Screening of the P-III libraries with ACA-6701 yielded two unique sequences with a high degree of internal homology but unlike others previously obtained with other aPL antibody. The sequences are as shown:
ACA-6701/3BI L SD P G yv R NIF H
As resin-bound peptides, the sequences were strongly immunoreactive with the parent serum (ACA-670 1) but were minim~lly cross-reactive with other aPL antibodies.
Continued screening of random pIlI phage libraries with affinity purified ACA antibody resulted in the discovery of a peptide that displayed significant crossreactivity with all nine affinity purified ACA antibodies against which it was initially tested. The perfonnance of this peptide as we}l as four others is shown in SUBSlllUI E SHEEr fflULE 26) Table 5. Peptide sequences for all five peptides inunediately follow the table. All were tested using the competitive binding peptide ACA ELISA using CL/~2 GPI
plates as described herein.
SUBSmUrE SHEET ffWlE 26) W O97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 Percent Inhibition of Af~ACA bY Peptide Monomers Peptide 6626 6638 6641 6644 6701 7004 7005 6903 6501 Ave.
I m ~mL
6501/3BIO 76 87 52 55 5] 87 47 69 60 I m ~mL
I m ~mL
1 m ~mL
6644/CBf 37 60 28 18 22 54 57 43 37 200~mL
Peptide Sequence ACA-6641/3G3: - AGP CLGVLGKLC PG
ACA-6501/3BIO: AGP CLLLAPDRC PG
ACA-6626/4C7: AGPDNIADPRC PG
ACA-6701/3BI: AGP LSDPGYVRNIFH PG
ACA-6644/CBf: GILALDYV GG
-SUBSrllUlE SHEEr ff~UlE 26) - CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 WO97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 Subsequent testing deterrnined that this peptide, ACA-6641/3G3 having the sequence AGP-CLGVLGKLC-PG (LJP 688) was cross-reactive with a number of ACA antisera. Chemical optimization of this peptide was pursued by truncation, systematic amino acid substitution, and non-di~ulfide cyclization studies.
The motifs of several peptides selected from the random phage library screening is set forth below.
ACA Antibody Phage Insert Sequence 6501 C L L L A P D R C (3BIO) 6641 C L G V L G K L C (3G3) J. Immunoreactiviiv of aPL-related Peptides with Affiniiy Purified IgG aPL Antibody Phage sequences obtained with affinity-purified ACA-6501 and found to be phage-ELlSA-posit ive were synth~i7~d on a solid support recently developed for combinatorial synthetic peptide libraries. This support, a Rapp resin, has ahigh peptide density and uses a hydrophilic polyethylene glycol spacer before the first amino acid is coupled. The synthesis resulted in resin-bound peptide that was ideally suited for antibody binding studies. As shown in Figure 2, peptide 5AI2 (sequence CLILAPDRC) dramatically outperformed an unrelated control peptide while not significantly binding normal IgG. Similar results were obtained with the other phageELlSA-positive peptides tested. In the experiment shown, resin sussrrru E ~Er ~U~ 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 peptide-bound affinity-purified ACA-6501 aPL antibody was detected by an irnmunoconjugate color reaction.
K. aPL Serum Antibody ReactivitY with Synthetic Peptides The discovery that resin-bound peptides could bind aPL
immunospecifically using serum significantly ~nh~nred the ability to test aPL
antibodies. As shown in Figure 3, the-peptide derived from screening with ACA-6626 bound aPL antiserum but did not demonstrate significant binding of normal serum. Figure 3 also illustrates the immunospecific-binding behavior of ACA-6501 -5A12 peptide towards aPL serum. Binding of norrnal serum to peptide 5A12was nil in data not shown.
L. CrossreactivitY of Synthetic Peptides Towards aPL Antiserum That Was Not the Source of the Library Screenin~ Antibody Two peptides were selected for aPL sera testing, one (5A12) Icplesellting the ACA-6501 screen and another one (4D3) representing the ACA-6626 screen.
As shown in Figures 4 and 5, each of the peptides reacted preferentially with the parent serum of the screening antibody. However, a significant degree of crossreactivity was detectable especially between ACA-6501 and ACA-6626. A
survey of 19 patient sera with low or no GPL score and of 13 patho!ogic sera with moderate to high GPL carried out with the 5A12 resin-bound peptide showed 8 of the 13 pathologic samples with detectable peptide binding while only 2 out of 19control sa~nples showed low peptide binding. These results evidence that synthetic peptides are useful for diagnostic or prognostic assays in stroke patient care.
As noted in Section I above, one synthetic peptide, 6641/3G3 was tested against several high titer ACA antisera. This peptide appeared to be crossreactive with the vast majority of ACA antisera tested as illustrated in Figure 14.
66~1/3G3 demonstrated dose-dependent cross-reactivity with 10 of 10 ACA
antibodies with complete inhibition (>80%) at 1.8 mg/mL and appeared to be specific for ACA antibodies as demonstrated in Table 7 below.
SUBSmUrE SHEEr ff~ULE 26) -. .
- CA 02256449 1998-ll-23 W O 97/462~1 PCTAUS97/10075 CROSSREACTIVITY DATA FOR
AGP-CLGVLGKLC-PG (LJP 688) ACA SERA WITH CARDIOLlPfN/~2.GPI-COATED PLATES
ACA SERUM Nr. ICso~ mg/mL, for peptide LJP
[1~ 6501 RS, RFI, 0.8991.1 [2] 6626 RS 1.09 [3] 6635 RS
[4] 6638 RS 0.81 [5] 6641 RS 0.89, 0.51 [6] 664 RS 0.76 [7] 6701 RS 1.07 [8] 6903 RS 0.8 [9] 7004 RFL 0.67 [10] 7005 RFL 0.75 mean i sd 0.86 +0.16 RS = recurrent stroke RFL = recurrent fetal loss M. New SYnthetic Peptide Methodolo,eies The identification of new candidate sequences by aPL library screening required testing of the new ~ylllll~lic peptides for antibody binding. With Rappresin of known peptide substitution, it is possible to carry out qu~llilali~re binding studies such as saturation binding analysis and e4uilibrium measurements using radiolabeled aPL IgG.
Peptide synthesis allows the molecular dissection of the mimotope by selective synthesis. This includes the modification of each arnino acid along the SUBSTllUlE SHEr ff~ULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 chain with the goal of enhancing antibody binding. Se}ective synthesis reveals the relative importance of each arnino acid in the sequence. If necessary, selectivesubstitution at particular residue locations can be designed to m~int~in B cell reactivity while abolishing any T cell proliferative reactivity discovered during S T cell assays.
Peptide 6641/3G3 (LJP 688) was subjected to a number of analyses. The analyses included truncation at both the N-terrninus and the C-terrninllc, disulfide substitution, substitution of alanine and glycine for arnino acids in positions 2 through 8, substitution of branched aliphatic arnino acids in positions 2, 4, 5 and 8, substitution of amino acids affecting conformation of the peptide, including substitution of a-methyl arnino acids, substitution of basic arnino acids in position 7, substitution of D-amino acids in positions 2 through 9, and the substitution of N-a-methyl arnino acids in positions 1 through 9. The results are shown below inTable 9. The structure/activity relationship of these substitutions and truncations is shown in Table 8.
SUBSTITUlE SHEEr ffUllE 26) Optimization Of Peptide 3G3 Total Peplides 144 ¦
3n8t96 , with ACA 6501 Position Numbtr ¦ -2 - I O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B ¦ I S0 ~I~JmL std TruDcntion ~n~lysis A G P C L G V L G }; L C P G 850 2 G P C L G V L G }; L C P G 180 3 P C L G V L G ~; L C P G 420 4 C L G V L G ~ L C P G 460 S A G P C L G ~ L G li L C G 450 6 C L G V L G ~; L C 10 #906 (LJP 690) Disuladt surrogst~s C L G V L G li L C 110 #952=100 2 Hc L G V L G ~; L C _ 46 3 C L G V L G ~; L tL~ 9~
4 H~ L G V L G ~ L Hc 80 Al~ c~n C A G V L G ~ L C 200 #952 - 80 2 C L A V L G ~; L C 120 3 C L G A L G ~; L C 260 4 C L G V A G l; L C inf C L G V L A l; L C 40 6 C L G V L G A L C inf 7 C L G V L G ~; A C 360 Gly cnn C G G V L G ~; L C 310 #952 = 120 2 C L G G L G }; L C inf 3 C L G V G G }; L C inf 4 C L G V L G G L C inf C L G V L G 1: G C SoO
SUBS~llUlE SHEET ffWlE 26) ' CA 02256449 1998-11-23 . 40 Sequence optim. Branched ~liph-tic Nmino ~cids I CIGVLG~LC 60 ~910=40 2 CVGVLG~ L C 130 3 CMGVLG~LC
4 CCyGV L G~ L C
S C tL G V LG}; L C
6 C mL G V LG~LC
7 ClvGVLG~LC
8 CLGL L G~ L C
g C L Gl L G~LC
CLGM L G~ L C
Il C L GC~LG~LC
12 CLG tL L G ~ L C
13 C L GmL L G 1~ L C
14 C L G IY L Gl~ L C
C L GVI G }~ L C
16 C L GVVG~ L C
17 C L GV M G ~ L ~.
18 CLGVC~ G ~ L C
19 C L GV tL G~LC
CLGV mL G~ L C
21 CLGVlvG~ L C
22 C L GVLG~IC
23 CLGVLG~VC
24 C L GVL G }; M C
2S C L GV L G~C~C
26 C L GV L G ~ tL C
27 CL G V LG~ mL C
28 CLGVLG~lvC
SUBS'rlTUlE SHEEr (~ULE 26) W O 97/46251 PCT~US97/10075 C~ scanaminoNcids C L P V L G ~; L C
2 C LmP V L G ~ L C
- 3 C LmA V L G l;LC
4 C LcG V L G }~ L C
S C L G V L P }~ L C
6 C L G V L mP }~LC
7 CL G V L mA ~; L C
8 CLGV L cG li L C
g CL dA V L G 1: L C
C L GVL dA ~ L C
I I C P G V L G l;LC 160 #952 = 100 12 C L P V L G l;LC 340 (Pro Scan) 13 C L G P L G ~; L C 180 14 C L G V PG};LC inf CLGVLP~LC 350 17 C L G V L G }; P C 550 18 C pG GV L GTi L C 130 #910=40 19 C L pGV L G~; L C 70 C LG pG L G~; L C 70 21 C L G V pG G l; L C 35 22 C L G V L pG ~; L C 30 #910 = 5 23 C L G V L G pG L C 230 24 C L G V LGI; pG C 80 slpha Mc AA 2~ C aiB G V L G l; L C 370 #910 = 40 26 C L aiB V L G l; L C 80 27 C LG aiB L G}; L C 110 28 C L G V aiB G~; L C inf 29 C L GV L aiB }~LC 110 C L G V L G aiB L C 460 31 C L G V L G }~aiB C >470 Basic amino ~cid C L GV L GR L C 160 #952= 120 C L GVL G OrLC 40 910 = 60 3 C LGV L Gm~;LC
SUBSmUlE SHEEl ~WIE 26) . . .
WO 97/46251 PCT/US9711007~i D ~Imino ~cids (lowrr crsr d) dPC L G V L G K L C 120 #952 = 100 2 C dL G V L G K L C 180 #952 = 30 3 C L G dV L G ~; L C 260 #952 = 30 4 C L G V dL G }~ L C 230 #952 = 30 C L G V L G dK L C 170 #9S2 = 50 6 C L G V L G ~; dL C 140 #952 = 30 7 C dL G dV L G J; L C
8 C dV G dV L G l; L C
9 C dL G dL L G li L C
C L G dV dL G K L C 50 #952 = 30 Il C L G dL dV G K L C
Peptide synthesis allows the molecular dissection of the mimotope by selective synthesis. This includes the modification of each arnino acid along the SUBSTllUlE SHEr ff~ULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 chain with the goal of enhancing antibody binding. Se}ective synthesis reveals the relative importance of each arnino acid in the sequence. If necessary, selectivesubstitution at particular residue locations can be designed to m~int~in B cell reactivity while abolishing any T cell proliferative reactivity discovered during S T cell assays.
Peptide 6641/3G3 (LJP 688) was subjected to a number of analyses. The analyses included truncation at both the N-terrninus and the C-terrninllc, disulfide substitution, substitution of alanine and glycine for arnino acids in positions 2 through 8, substitution of branched aliphatic arnino acids in positions 2, 4, 5 and 8, substitution of amino acids affecting conformation of the peptide, including substitution of a-methyl arnino acids, substitution of basic arnino acids in position 7, substitution of D-amino acids in positions 2 through 9, and the substitution of N-a-methyl arnino acids in positions 1 through 9. The results are shown below inTable 9. The structure/activity relationship of these substitutions and truncations is shown in Table 8.
SUBSTITUlE SHEEr ffUllE 26) Optimization Of Peptide 3G3 Total Peplides 144 ¦
3n8t96 , with ACA 6501 Position Numbtr ¦ -2 - I O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B ¦ I S0 ~I~JmL std TruDcntion ~n~lysis A G P C L G V L G }; L C P G 850 2 G P C L G V L G }; L C P G 180 3 P C L G V L G ~; L C P G 420 4 C L G V L G ~ L C P G 460 S A G P C L G ~ L G li L C G 450 6 C L G V L G ~; L C 10 #906 (LJP 690) Disuladt surrogst~s C L G V L G li L C 110 #952=100 2 Hc L G V L G ~; L C _ 46 3 C L G V L G ~; L tL~ 9~
4 H~ L G V L G ~ L Hc 80 Al~ c~n C A G V L G ~ L C 200 #952 - 80 2 C L A V L G ~; L C 120 3 C L G A L G ~; L C 260 4 C L G V A G l; L C inf C L G V L A l; L C 40 6 C L G V L G A L C inf 7 C L G V L G ~; A C 360 Gly cnn C G G V L G ~; L C 310 #952 = 120 2 C L G G L G }; L C inf 3 C L G V G G }; L C inf 4 C L G V L G G L C inf C L G V L G 1: G C SoO
SUBS~llUlE SHEET ffWlE 26) ' CA 02256449 1998-11-23 . 40 Sequence optim. Branched ~liph-tic Nmino ~cids I CIGVLG~LC 60 ~910=40 2 CVGVLG~ L C 130 3 CMGVLG~LC
4 CCyGV L G~ L C
S C tL G V LG}; L C
6 C mL G V LG~LC
7 ClvGVLG~LC
8 CLGL L G~ L C
g C L Gl L G~LC
CLGM L G~ L C
Il C L GC~LG~LC
12 CLG tL L G ~ L C
13 C L GmL L G 1~ L C
14 C L G IY L Gl~ L C
C L GVI G }~ L C
16 C L GVVG~ L C
17 C L GV M G ~ L ~.
18 CLGVC~ G ~ L C
19 C L GV tL G~LC
CLGV mL G~ L C
21 CLGVlvG~ L C
22 C L GVLG~IC
23 CLGVLG~VC
24 C L GVL G }; M C
2S C L GV L G~C~C
26 C L GV L G ~ tL C
27 CL G V LG~ mL C
28 CLGVLG~lvC
SUBS'rlTUlE SHEEr (~ULE 26) W O 97/46251 PCT~US97/10075 C~ scanaminoNcids C L P V L G ~; L C
2 C LmP V L G ~ L C
- 3 C LmA V L G l;LC
4 C LcG V L G }~ L C
S C L G V L P }~ L C
6 C L G V L mP }~LC
7 CL G V L mA ~; L C
8 CLGV L cG li L C
g CL dA V L G 1: L C
C L GVL dA ~ L C
I I C P G V L G l;LC 160 #952 = 100 12 C L P V L G l;LC 340 (Pro Scan) 13 C L G P L G ~; L C 180 14 C L G V PG};LC inf CLGVLP~LC 350 17 C L G V L G }; P C 550 18 C pG GV L GTi L C 130 #910=40 19 C L pGV L G~; L C 70 C LG pG L G~; L C 70 21 C L G V pG G l; L C 35 22 C L G V L pG ~; L C 30 #910 = 5 23 C L G V L G pG L C 230 24 C L G V LGI; pG C 80 slpha Mc AA 2~ C aiB G V L G l; L C 370 #910 = 40 26 C L aiB V L G l; L C 80 27 C LG aiB L G}; L C 110 28 C L G V aiB G~; L C inf 29 C L GV L aiB }~LC 110 C L G V L G aiB L C 460 31 C L G V L G }~aiB C >470 Basic amino ~cid C L GV L GR L C 160 #952= 120 C L GVL G OrLC 40 910 = 60 3 C LGV L Gm~;LC
SUBSmUlE SHEEl ~WIE 26) . . .
WO 97/46251 PCT/US9711007~i D ~Imino ~cids (lowrr crsr d) dPC L G V L G K L C 120 #952 = 100 2 C dL G V L G K L C 180 #952 = 30 3 C L G dV L G ~; L C 260 #952 = 30 4 C L G V dL G }~ L C 230 #952 = 30 C L G V L G dK L C 170 #9S2 = 50 6 C L G V L G ~; dL C 140 #952 = 30 7 C dL G dV L G J; L C
8 C dV G dV L G l; L C
9 C dL G dL L G li L C
C L G dV dL G K L C 50 #952 = 30 Il C L G dL dV G K L C
11 C L G dV dV G l; L C
13 C L G dL dL G K L C
14 C L G V dL G dl; L C
C L G V dK G dL L C
16 C L G V cL G dL L C
17 C L G V dK G dK L C
18 C L G V L G dl; dL C 150 #952=S0 19 C L G V L G dL dK C
C L G V L G dK d~; C
21 C L G V L G dL dL C 140 #952=30 2' C L G V L dA }~ L C 140 #952 = S0 C L G V L G li L dC
I~'-,~lc smino ~cids ~nAA) nC L G V L G l; L C
2 ~' C L ~G ~ ':V .L ~ -~ G ~ .~; .i C
. ~ . , .. ... ,~ , ..... ...
3 C L nG V L G }~ L C 70 #952= S0 4 C L G nV L G K L C 220 C L G V nL G ~; L C 180 6 C L G V L nG ~ L C 550 7 C L G V L G nK L C
8 C L G V L G K nL C 240 #952 = S0 9 C L G V L G ~ L nC
SU~STllUrE SHEEr ~WLE 26) Others C L G V L G 1;. L C ATU Y 300 ~952 z 50 2 Y ATU C L G V L G ~; L C 170 3 C L G V L G l; L C TGR resin 500 4 C L G V L G l; L C dC TGRresin 620 dC L G V L G 1~ L C C
6 cC L G V L G ~ L C dC TGR resin Thioelhtrs: sin~le delection Hc L G V L A }~ L C
2 Hc G V L A li L C
3 Hc L V L A li L C
4 Hc L G L A ~ L C
Hc L G V A 1~ L C
6 Hc L G V L ~; L C
7 Hc L G V L A L C
8 Hc L G V L A l; C
shrink I
Hc V L A }; L C
2 Hc L A l; L C
3 Hc L A li C
br~lnch~d Hc L G V L G l; L Pe 2 Hc L G V L G li L dPe 3 Pe L G V L G ~; L Hc 4 dPe L G V L G }~ L Hc dPe L G V L G l; L dPe D ~mino ~cids dHc L G V L G ~; L C
2 dHc L G V L G }; L dC
3 Hc L G V L G l; L dC
SUBSrllUrE SHEEr ~IE 26) Des ~mino H~ L G V L G }; L Hc desamino 2 B~ L G V L G l; L C desamino HCTE
3 Pp L G V L G }~ L ~Ic desamino CHTE
4 Pp L G V L G ~; L C des~mino CHTE
SUBSmUrE SHEEr (RlJLE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 wo 97/46251 PCT/US97/10075 Abbreviations Hc......... homocysteine Cy ........ cyclohexyl alanine tL ........ tertiary leucine ML ........ alpha methyl leucine IV......... alpha methyl, alpha amino butyric acid -MP ........ alpha methyl proline mA......... alpha methyl alanine aiB ....... aminoisobutryic acid pG......... phenylglycine cG ........ cyclopropyl glycine dA ........ D alanine dP......... D proline dL ........ D leucine dV ........ D valine dK ........ D lysine nC ........ N alpha-methyl cysteine nL ........ N alpha-methyl leucine nG......... N methyl glycine nV......... N alpha-methyl valine nK ........ N alpha-methyl Iysine mK......... N epsilon-methyl lys ine Pe......... penicillamine SUBSlllUrE SHEEl' ffWI~ 26) CA 022~6449 lsss-ll-23 Abbreviations By......... butyroyl Pp......... proprionyl Or......... omithine Structure Activily Relationship of the Crossreactive ACA Epitope Relative Structure Activity AGPCLGVLGKLCPG (3G3) (LJP 688) 100 CLGVLGKLC (LJP 690) 3.5 CLGVLAKLC 1.8 C~GVLpGKLC 1.4 CLGdVdLGKLC 5.9 HCLGVLGKLC (thioether) 1.6 N. Use of a-methvl Amino Acids Substitutions and Unnatural Amino Acids to Enhance Peptide ImmunoreactivitY and Confer Resistance to Protease Attack Proline residues have a special significance due to their influence on the chain conformation of polypeptides. They often occur in reverse turns on the surface of globular proteins. In the phage epitope libraries of the present invention, all random peptide inserts are flanked by boundary prolines. In addition, most of the mimotopes discovered with ACA-6501 have a third proline which, based on computer-based predictions, likely exists as part of a ,B-turn.
~-turn mimetics can be used to enhance the stability of reverse tD confon-SUBSmUI E SHEEr fflULE 26) - CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 W O 97/46251 PCT~US97/1007 47 nations in small peptides. Such a mimetic is (S~ methyl proline (a-MePro), a proline analog that, in addition to stabilizing turn confo~nations, confers resi~t~nce to protease degradation. Protease resi~t~nre is a desirable prop~lly for a potential dlug designed to act in the plasma. Peptide ACA-6501/3B10 S AGPCLLLAPDRCPG (insert highlighted) is a consensus peptide. It has a sequence featuring the most prevalent residue at each position based on a con~ u;son with 35 other homologous sequences. Due to its representative --character, the sequence was subjected to a number of systematic modifications and deletions and its activity subsequently evaluated by aPL antibody binding.
Among the most hlll~ol ~ fintlin~ was the discovery that the prolines at the 3 and 9 positions are important for activity. Proline-3 is derived from the phage framework and is not part of the random insert. The most dramatic effect was obtained by the substitution of a-MePro for proline at the 9-position. This substitution led to a six-fold enhancement in immunoreactivity.
The results of a-methyl and a-methyl amino acid substitution studies carried out on peptide 6641/3G3 are shown above in Table 8.
In addition to the twenty naturally-occurring amino acids and their homoanalogs and noranalogs, several other classes of alpha amino acids can be employed in the present invention. Examples of these other classes include d-amino acids, N"-alkyl amino acids, alpha-alkyl amino acids, cyclic amino acids, chirrieric amino acids, and miscellaneous amino acids. These non-natural amino acids have been widely used to modify bioactive polypeptides to enhance resistance to proteolytic degradation and/or to impart conformational consllai to improve biological activity (Hruby et al. (1990) Biochem. J268:249-262;
Hruby and Bonner (1995) Me~hods in Molecular Biology 35:201-240).
The most common Na~alkyl amino acids are the NB-methyl amino acids, such as Na-methyl cysteine (nC), Na~methyl glycine (nG), Na methyl leucine (nL),N~~methyl Iysine (nK), and Na methyl valine (nV). Examples of alpha-alkyl amino acids include alpha-methyl alanine (niA), alpha-aminoisobutyric acid (aiB), alpha-methyl proline (mP), alpha-methyl leucine (mL), alpha-methyl valine (mV), SUBSmU~E SHEEr (RULE 28) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 WO 97/462~1 PCT/US97110075 alpha-methylalpha-aminobutyric acid (tv), diethylglycine (deG), diphenylglycine (dpG), and dicyclohexyl glycine (dcG) (Balararn (1992) Pure & Appl. Chem.
64:1061-1066; Toniolo et al. (1993) Biopolymers 33:1061-1072; Hinds et al.
(1991) Med Chem. 34: 1777-1789).
Exarnples of cyclic amino acids include 1-annino-1-cycloplopane carboxylic acid (cG), I-amino-1-cyclopentane carboxylic acid (Ac5 c), I-arnino-l-cyclohexane carboxylic acid (Ac6c), arninoin.dane carboxylic acid (ind), tetrahydroisoquinoline carboxylic acid (Tic), and pipecolinic acid (Pip) (C.
Toniolo (1990) Int'l. ~. Peptide Protein Res. 35:287-300; Burgess et al. (1995) J. Am. Chem. Soc. 117:3808-3819). Exarnples of chimeric arnino acids include penicillamine (Pe), combinations of cysteine with valine, 4R- and 4S-mercaptoprolines (Mpt), combinations of homocysteine and proline and 4R- and 4S-hydroxyprolines (hyP) and a combination of homoserine and proline.
Exarnples of miscellaneous alpha arnino acids include basic amino acid analogs such as omithine (Or), N~-methyl Iysine (mK), 4-pyridyl ~l~nine(pyA), 4 piperidino alanine (piA), and 4-aminophenylalanine; acidic amino acid analogs such as citrulline (Cit), and 3-hydroxyvaline; aromatic arnino acid analogs such as I-naphthy~ nine (l-Nal), 2-naphthyl~ nine (2-Nal), phenylglycine (pG), 3,3-diphenyl~l~nine (dpA), 3-(2-thienyl)alanine (TE). and halophenylalanines (e.g., 2-fluorophenyl~l~nine and 4-chlorophenylalanine); hydrophobic arnino acid analogs such as t-butylglycine (i.e., tertiary leucine (tL)), 2-arninobutyric acid (Abu), cyclohexyl~l~nine (Cy), 4-tetrahydropyranyl alanine (tpA), 3,3-dicyclohexyl alanine (dcA), and 3,4-dehydroproline.
In addition tg alpha-arnino acids, others such as beta amino acids can also be used in the present invention. Exarnples of these other amino acids include 2-arninobenzoic acid (Abz), ~-aminoplopalloic acid (~-Apr),7~-aminobutyric acid (~-Abu), and 6-arninohexanoic acid (~-Ahx). Carboxylic acids such as 4-chlorobutyric acid (By) and 3-chloro,t,ro~ionic acid (Pp) have also been used asthe first residue on the N-terîninal in the synthesis of cyclic thioether peptides.
SUBSlTrU~E SHEEI ffWLE 26) , CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 O. Preparation of CYclic Thioether Analogs T'he mimetic peptides identified by the methods of the instant invention can be further modified to contain thioether substitutions. Modification of cyclic disulfide analogs to cyclic thioether analogs will extend the plasma half-life of the analog conjugates and, therefore, require a lower dosage. Cyclic thioether analogs also elimin~te the problem of disulfide bond exchange which often occurs with cyclic disulfide polypeptides. In addition, the cyclic thioether analogs may also interfere with MHC Class I ~ presentation to T cells and, thus, facilitate induction of anergy. Finally, the cyclic thioether analogs are useful in the thiol-dependent conjugation reactions used in the production of valency platforTn molecule conjugates.
Four cyclic thioether analogs were ~re~ed according to the methodology described in co-owned, co-pending patent application, attorney docket number 252312006600, which is incorporated herein in its entirety. Using either a RilllCTM
arnide 4-methyl benzhydrylarnino resin or MBHA resin, fall length peptide analogs of 6641/3G3 were prepared, converted into chloro-peptides, cleaved from a solid support and then cyclized. See Thioether Reaction Scheme below.
Suitable cyclic thioether analogs include the analogs shown below.
CCTE HCTE
S I . ~ S~
AFLGVLG'KLAF-NH2 AFLGVLGKLAF-NH2 CHTE HHTE
~S ~ ~S ~
Af LGVLGKLAF-NH2 AFLGVLGKLAF-NH2 AF =--HN CO--SUBSTrlUlE SHEEl- ff~lJLE 26) CYCLIC THIOETHER REACTION SCHEME I
JBDMSO fBIlSS
(BOC)AFLGVLG(BOCJKLA
Ph3PCI2 Cl tBuSS
(BocJAFLGvLG(Boc)KLA
HFJDMSIEDT
(64%) ~.
C/~ HS~
AFLGVLGKl AF-NH2 Na2CO3 in H~O/ACN (1:1) (49%) CCTE
S
AFLGVLGKl AF-NH2 H
AF = H N C O
SUBSmU~E SHEET ~lUlE ~6) CA 02256449 l998-ll-23 Alternatively, thioether analogs are prepared according to the reaction scheme below.
t) isobutylchloro~orrnate N-m~ ",o pholin~ Hf CO2~1 2) N-hydr~xy-2-m~rc~p~opyndine BOCHN~ .3N E30CllN~f C~2 ~r Co2c~cH3)3 co2c~CH3)3 ~nitrophenol ~
80C~ly-pr~C02H ~BOC~ly-pr~COz~NO2 DCC,THF
(ctt~)3SS ~CO2H ~ (H~OCC (CH3)~SS~CONH2 NHFMOC 2) I~ HCO3 NHFMOC
~MO~t~utylthio~r~t ~e 1) PBu3t~aHCO3 dio~ne/l 120 2) compolJnd 1 KzCO~ ~
2~
BOCNH-Gly Pro-COHNrC~S~CONH~ BOCHNrCH~S ~CONH2 CO2H NHFMOC ~ Co2c(cHl~3 NHFMOC
l) TFA/H20/HOCH2CH2SH
2) cDmpound ~
- NaHCO~ o~ eJH20 BOCN~ P CONH~CH2--S ~CONH2 NH-I-L-CO2H NHCO-R(Prnc)-C~(Ot~3u) P~b-A-L~NHFMOC
1) OBU/CH3CN H2N~-P-CO~N --CH~S /CONH2 2) C)PPAlCH3Chl/pyrldin~ l l 3) TFA/H20/lllioanisole/EDT/phenol CO NH
HN-I-B-L-A-P~-D-R- CO
SUBSmUrE SHEEI fftllLE 28) CA 02256449 1998-ll-23 W O 97/462~1 PC~AUS97/10075 The following analogs are representative as analogs made according to cyclic thioether reaction scheme 2.
112N~;p CONIlrCH~S~
~tl2-GP-CONlt~ 5~2 C~LIlAPDR-NH
CTE c O
CO-lLlJ~bOR-NH
cl~ A ~2~GP~ONH
c~LLw HzN GP~ONH C~ a:lNH2 CTE D
r ~ Ad~-P CoNl l~c~ r CON~2 C~LLtAPDR~ : ; l I
CTE B CTE E CO~llAPDR~NH
E~emplary cyclic thioether analogs were tested for activity against ACA
antibodies ACA-6501 and ACA-6701. The results are shown in Table 10 below.
IC50 Values (llg/0.1 mL) - Thioether ACA-6501 ACA-6701 CCTE, LJP 698 11.0 5.0 HCTE, LJP 699 4.6 3.0 CHTE, LJP 702 9.2 3.2 HHTE, LJP 703 8.0 3.6 LJP 690 10.0 4 0 CTE A 0.08 CTE B 0.5 CTE C 0.9 CTE D 3.2 CTE E 6.3 The HCTE analog, LJP 699, outperforrned the reference peptide, LJP 690, which is the truncated version, CLGVLGECLC, of LJP 688, AGPCLGVLGKLCPG.
SUBSrllUl~E SHEEr (RUlE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 wo 97/46251 PCTIUS97/10075 All articles, documents, patents and patent applications cited herein are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. The following examples are intended to further illustrate the invention and its uniqueness. These examples are not intended to limit the scope of the invention in any manner.
EX~ PT F~
Example 1: Measurement of Anticardiolipin Antibodies (~CA) in serum 6501 Even numbered wells of an Inunulon I microtitration plate (Dynatech Laboratories, Inc., Chantilly~ VA) were coated with 50 ,ug cardiolipin (Sigma Chemical, St. Louis, MO) in 30 ~L ethanol per well. The plate was dried overnight at 4~C and blocked with 200 ~lL of 10% adult bovine senun (ABS) (Irvine Scientific Co., Santa Ana, CA) in phosphate-buffered saline (ABS/PBS) for 2 hours at room t~ll,pe~ re (RT). The plates were washed S times with Tris-buffered saline (TBS) prior to the addition of 10 ~lLof aPL standards and the test serum, ACA-6501. The aPL standards (APL Diagnostics, Inc., Louisville, KY) were reconstituted according to the manufacturer's instructions and diluted I :50 with 10% ABS-PBS. The test serum. ACA-6501 ~ diluted 1 :50 to 1 :2,000 in serialdilutions with 10% ABS-PBS, was added to selected duplicate wells and incubated for 2 hours at RT. The plate was washed five times with TBS and 100 ~L of 1: 1,000 goat-anti-human-lgG/alkaline phosphatase conjugate (Zymed, South San Francisco, CA, Cat No. 62,8422), in 10% ABS-PBS was added and incubated for I hour at RT. Again, the plate was washed five times with TBS and the assay was developed by adding 100 ~lL phenolphthalein monophosphate (PPNM) substrate solution (Sigma, Cat. No. P-5758), ~ ,d from a stock solution of 0.13 M PPMP and 7.8 M2-amino-2-methyl- 1 -propanol, adjusted to - pH 10.15 with HCI, after a dilution of 1 :26 with deionized water. After approximately 30 minutes, the reaction was stopped with 50 ~lL of 0.2 M dibasic sodium phosphate (Mallinckrodt, Analytical Reagent) added per well. The optical density was read at 550 nm in a microplate autoreader (Bio-Tek Instruments, SUBSTIIUIE SHEEr (FWLE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 Winooski, VT, Model EL3 1 1). The optical density of the odd-numbered control wells (blank, without cardiolipin (CL)) was subtracted from the optical density of the evennl-mhered wells. The absorbance readings of the aPL standards were plotted using Graph Pad Prizm (Graph Pad Software, Inc., San Diego, CA) to generate the GPL (IgG phospholipid) standard cunre. The diluted 6501 test serum absorbance readings were used to calculate GPL scores based on the GPL
standard curve.
In the modified ACA ELISA, Nunc Maxisorp microtitration plates were coated with 100 ~L /mL ~2-GPI made up in PBS following incubation at I hour at room temperature. Following this step, microplates were blocked with PBS
cont~3ining 2% nonfat milk and 0.4% (w/v) Tween 80 for 2 hours at room temperature. Except for the use of nonfat milk/Tween as reagent diluent and blocking agent, the Nunc microplates coated with ~2-GPI directly were used for ACA IgG binding studies as previous described for the Dynatech microplates coated first with cardiolipin before the ,B2-GPI was added.
Example 2: Anticardiolipin Antibod~ (ACA) Purification from Serum 650l In a 25 mL round-bottom flask (Kontes Scientific Co.~ Vinelands N.J.) a mixture of 1.2 mL cardiolipin (Sigma Chemical, St. Louis, MO, #C- l 649), 0.464 mL cholesterol (Sigma Diag., St. Louis, MO., #965-25), 0.088 mL of 5 mg dicetylphosphate (Sigma Chemical, St. Louis, MO, D-263 1 ) per mL chloroform was dried for approximately S minutes in a Rotavap (Buchi, Switzerland).
Following the removal of solvent, 2 mL of0.96% (wt./vol.) NaCl (J.T. Baker, Inc., Phillipsburg, NJ) Baker analyzed reagent) was added and mixed in a Vortex Genie Mixer (Scientific Industries, lnc., Bohemia, NY) for 1 minute. The liposome suspension was incubated for 1 hour at 37~C. Meanwhile, serum 6501 was spun at 600 X g in a Sorvall RT 6000 centrifuge (Dupont Co. Wilmington, DE) for 10 minutes at 8~C. Four mL of the supernatant was placed in a 25 mL
round-bottom flask with I mL of the prepared liposome suspension and the SUBS~ E SHEEr ~lULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 W O 97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 mixture was incubated with agitation at medium speed in an orbital shaker, Tektator V (Scientific Products, ~IcGraw Park, IL) for 48 hours at 4~C, and an additional 2 hours at 37~C. Twenty mL of cold TBS was added and the mixture was transferred into a 50 mL polyc~rbonate centrifuge tube (Nalge Co., Rochester, NY) and centrifuged at 27,000 X g for 15 minutes at 4~C. in an RC3 centrifuge ina SS-34 rotor (Sorvall-Dupont Washington, DE). The precipitate was washed 3 times with 25 mL of cold 0.96% NaCl using the RC3 centrifuge. The pellet was dissolved in l mL of 2% (wt/vol) solution of n-octyl-p-D-glucopyranoside (Calbiochem, La Jolla, CA) in TBS and applied to a 0.6 mL protein A/cross-linked agarose (Repligen Corporation, Cambridge, MA) column which had been pre-washed with 15 times bed volume of I M acetic acid and equilibrated with 15 times bed volumes of TBS. The antibody-protein A/agarose column was washed with 40 times bed volume of 2% octylglucopyranoside to remove lipids, followed by extensive washings with TBS until the o tical density of the eluate at 280 nmapproached the baseline. The bound antibody was eluted with I M acetic acid.
One mL fractions were collected7 neutralized immediately with 0.34 mL 3 M Tris (Bio-Rad. electrophoresis grade reagent) per fraction and lcept in an ice bath. The optical density of each fraction was deterrnined at 280 mn in a spectrophotometer (Hewlett-Packard~ 8452A Diode Array Spectrophotometer, Palo Alto, CA).
Fractions cont~inin~ antibody were pooled, concentrated and washed 4 times with TB S in Centricon-3 0 concentrators (Amicon Division, W.R. Grace & Co., Beverly, MA) per m~nnf~cturer's protocol. The final yield of purified antibody from 4 mL of serum 6501 was deterrnin~d by reading the optical density at 280 nm of an aliquot from the concentration, where I mg = 1.34 OD280. The average yield obtained was ~50 ,ug antibody from 4 mL of serum 6501. The purified antibody was tested for ACA activity and checked for purity with Laemmli SDS-PAGE. An affinity adsorbent cont~inine ~2-GPI was prepared using CNBr-activated agarose ) Pharmacia, Inc., Piscataway, NJ) or Affi-Gel 10 (BioRad. Richmond. CA) in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions SUBSrl~U~E SHEEr ~RUL~ 26) using purified ,B2-GPI obtained commercially (Perlmrnune, Rockville, MD). To a 1 mL gel column contS~ining the ~2-GPI affinity adsorbent, up to 100 ~g of liposome-purified aPL IgG in 1 mL TBS was added. After 1 hour, the colurnn was extensively washed with buffer to displace co~ nt.~ and any IgG that did not bind ~2-GPI. The ,B2-GPI-binding IgG was displaced with I M HOAc and the fractions neutralized with Tris as described above. Fractions cont~ining IgG were pooled, concentrated and subjected to buffer exchange as previously described.
Example 3: Construction of a p-I~T T ibrary Vector P~ lion fUSE 5 (Scott, J.K. and G. Smith. supra) was used as the vector ~or the construction of p-III libraries, and a variation of the method of Holmes, D.S. and M. Quigley (1981), Anal. Biochem. 144:193) was employed to generate the doublestranded replicative forrn (RF). Briefly, an 800 m' ~ulture of ~. coli K802, harboring fUSE 5, was grown in 2YT medium (Difco Labs, Ann Arbor, NU) con~ining 20 micrograms/mL tetracycline for 18 hours at 37 degrees with vigorous sh~kine. Cells were collected by centrifugation and resuspended in 75 mL STET. STET consists of 8% sucrose in 50 mM Tris/HCI pH 8.0, 50 mM
EDTA and contains 0.5% Triton X-100. Lysozyme~ 10 mg/mL in STET. was added to a final concentration of l mg/mL. After 5 minutes at RT, three equal aliquots were placed in a boiling water bath with occasional .ch~king for 3.5 minutes. The viscous slurry was centrifuged for 30 minutes at 18000 x G and an equal volume of isopropanol was added to the sUpçrn~t~nt. The solution was cooled to -20~C and the nucleic acids were collected by .centrifugation. The RF
was isolated from a CsCI gradient as described by Sarnbrook et al. MOLECULAR
CLON~G:ALABORATORY MANUAL (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, - Cold Spring Harbor, NY, 2d ed., 1989).
SUBSlmrrE SI~EEl (RULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 Wo 97t46251 PCT/U~97/10075 Proration of the random in~rt The DNA for insertion was generated by the "gapped duplex" method described by Cwirla et al. (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87:6378-6382. In this method, an oligonucleotide cont~ining a degenerate region in the middle is surrounded by short constant regions on each end of the oligonucleotide. Two shorter, complementary oligonucleotides are annealed to form a "gapped duplex"
possessing overhangs that are complementary to the sticky ends produced by the restriction endonuclease used to digest the vector. In this case, the longer degenerate oligonucleotide has the sequence:
5' GGGCTGGACCC(NNK)XCCGGGGGCTGCTG 3'where N = A or C or G or T, K = G or T, and x is the number of codons in the random regions. EpiGS2 was designed to base pair to the 5' end of the degenerate oligonucleotide and has the sequence 5' GGGTCCAGCCCCGT 3'. Simi}arly EpiGS3 was designed to anneal to the 3'end of the degenerate oligonucleotide and has the sequence 5'CAGCCCCCGG 3'. When correctly annealed, the three oligonucleotides forrn a "gapped duplex" which, when inserted into fUSE 5 digested with Sfil, restores the reading ftme of P-IIl with the random insert near the 5' end.
Oligonucleotides described above were prepared by excision from polyacrylainide gels. One nanomole of EpiGS2, EpiGS3, and 50 picomoles of the degenerate oligonucleotide were kinased separately in 66 microliter volumes. Thethree oligonucleotides were then pooled, NaCI was added to 50 mM and the mixture was heated to 65~C for 5 minnte~ followed by slow cooling to RT. The annealed oligonucleotides were then cooled on ice and used immediately in the ligation reaction with fUSE 5. The ligation reaction consisted of 10 micrograms of fUSE S DNA digested to completion with Sfil, 30 ~L of the "gapped duplex"
solution and 1000 U of T4 ligase in a total volume of 450 microliters. The ligation was incubated for 18 hours at 16~C. The mixture was then phenol-chloroform extracted, precipitated with ethanol and the precipitate dissolved in20 ~lL of water.
SUBSrlTUrE SHEEr ffWLE 26) -~
58 ~ -Generatin~ and Am~ in~ the T ibrary The ligated DNA was introduced into E. coli by electroporation (Dower et al. (1988) NucleicAcid Res. 16:6127-6145). Frozen electrocompetent MC 1061 cells (0.1 mL) were mixed with 4 ~L of ligated DNA in a cold 2 mm cuvette and subjected to 2.5 kV, 5.2 mS pulse by a BTX eleclro~olalion device (BTX Corp., San Diego, CA). Immediately after the pulse, I mL of SOC, a cell growth medium (see Dower et al., s2~pra) was added. Five separate electroporations werecarried out pooled, and incubated at 37~C for 1 hour. At that time, samples wereremoved and diluted to determine the total number of clones generated. The balance of the mixture was diluted in 1 L of 2YT (1.6% Peptone, 140, 1% Yeast Extract, and 0.5% NaCI? Difco Labs, Ann Arbor, MI) containing 20 micrograms.
per mL of tetracycline and grown for 18 hours at 37~C while shaken at 275 rpm.
Phage were purified by 2 rounds of PEGlNaCI precipitation and resuspension in 1.2 mL TBS cont~ining 0.02% sodium azide. Particle number was estimated by absorbance at 269 mn. The titer of the phage was deter-mined by mixing 10 ~lL ofdilutions of phage with 10 microliters of starved E. coli.
Example 4: Screenin.~ a p-JlT T ibrary with aPL Antibody Affinity-purified, ACA-6501 (affACA-6501, 10 ~lg, 7 ~lL of 1.44 mg/mL
stock solution) was incubated for 2 hours at RT in siliconized 1.4 mL microfuge polypropylene -tubes with pooled phage from the x, y and z libraries (epiXYZ) [11 IlL + 8.5 ~lL + 2 ~LL, respectively; total volume = 21.5 ~lL, ~101~ clones] in a final volume of 100 IlL TBS, pH 7.4, with 0.5% bovine serum albumin (BSA). During 2S this incubation, the final steps in preparing freshly starved E. coli, strain K-91, were carried out. A suspension of E. coli freshly grown in 2YT medium for about 5 hours with 250 rpm ~h~king at 370~C was spun at 1000 x g for 10 minutes at RT
in 50 mL polypropylene tubes. Twenty mL of 80 mM NaCI was added to the packed E. coli pellet and then incubated for 45 minutes at 37~C at 100 rpm.
SUBSrmllE SHEEl ~FWLE 2~i) - CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W 097/46251 PCT~US97/10075 Following centrifugation as above, the starved E. coli pellet was suspended in I mL of 50 mM ammonium phosphate/80 rnm NaCI and used later for phage amplification. Protein G-agarose beads were washed 2x in TBS/BSA and 2 times in TBS/0.5% Tween-20 and stored at 4~C as a 50% suspension in TBS/Tween.
Two hundred gL of the protein G-agarose bead suspension was then added to the ACA-6501/phage mixture and incllh~tion continued for an additional 1 hourat RT. At this point, the mixture was chilled and washed 3 times with cold TBS/Tween and the precipitate was collected in a microfuge in a cold room. The washed beads were transferred to new microfuge tubes prewashed with TBS/E~SA
and TBS/Tween to prevent non-s ecific adherence. After three additional washes with TBS/Tween, the beads with bound ACA-6501-bearing phage were eluted with 300 ,uL 0.2 N HCI/glycine, pH 2.1 by tumbling for 10 minutes at RT.
Following centrifugation at 16,000 X g, the acidic eluate supernatant was collected and an additional 100 !lL of elution solution was added to the bead pellet and the procedure repeated. After 10 minutes, the phage-cont~ining eluates (representing the unamplified first round phage) were pooled (~400 ~L) and placed in a sterile 17xlO0 mm polypropylene cell culture tube to which was added50 !lL 0.5 M NaCI followed by pH neutralization with 2.5 M Tris base (usually ~25-35 ~L). An equal volume of the starved ~. coli suspension was added immediately and then incubated for 10 minutes at 37~C at 100 rpm. The mixture was then transferred to a 250 mL sterile culture flask cont~ining 25 mL 2YT with20 ~g/mL tetracycline (Tet) and incubated overnight at 37~C at 250 rpm.
To isolate amplified phage from overnight cultures, the suspension was centrifuged at 12,000 x g for 10 minutes in polycarbonate tubes and the pellet discarded. After heating the sUp~ t~nt at 70~C for 30 minutes in polypropylene tubes, the material was spun again in polymbonate tubes and the supernatant saved. To the supernatant, 1/4 volume of 20% (w/v) polyethylene glycol, molecular weight 8000 (PEG 8000) was added to precipitate phage. The solution was mixed by inversion 100 times and then incubated at 4~C for 2 hours. After centrifugation at 35,000 x g for 30 minutes at 40~C, the phage-containing pellet SUBSmlJl E SHEEr ffWLE 2B) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 was resuspended in ~0.5 mL of TBS/BSA and transferred to a 1.4 mL microfuge tube. After a 1 minute spin in a microfuge at 16,000 x g, the supematant was transferred to a clean tube and labeled first round amplified phage.
During second, third and fourth rounds of biop~nnin~, 75 ~L of amplified phage from the prece~ine round was incubated with 7 ~LL affACA-6501 in a final volume of 100 ~L. For fifth round phage, affACA-6501 was diluted first at 1:
1000, then treated as described for the other rounds. All subsequent steps were carried out as described for the first round. Phage from five rounds of biop~nning were spottitered on 2YT/Tet plates to detemmine phage concentration. The spot titer of amplified phage requires an initial phage dilution of lx I o6 in TBS/BSA or 2YT media. For each round. 10 ~lL of the dilute phage was incubated with 40 ~lL
of starved E. coli for 10 minutes at 37~C with no ~h~kin~. Following the addition of 9S0 ,uL of 2YT/dilute Tet (0.2 llg/mL), the mixture was incubated for 30-45 minutes at ,37~C with 250 rpm shaking. Ten ~lL aliquots of neat and diluted phage solutions, 1: 10, 1: 100, and 1: 1000, were spotted in 2YT/dilute Tet using agarplates cont~ininE 20 llg/mL Tet.
Micropanning Immulon type 2 plates were coated with protein G. Protein G was prepared at 10 ~g/mL in 0. I M NaHCO3 and 100 ~lL per well was added to the wells of microtitration plates and incubated ovemight at 4~C. After discarding excess protein G solution from plates, each well was blocked with 250-300 ~LL 2YT for Ihour at RT with agitation on an oscillating platfomm. Tris-buffered saline, pH
7.4/0.5% Tween 20 (TBS/Tween), was used with an automatic plate washer to wash the wells 4 times with 200 ~L. One hundred ~L affACA-6501 (or control nomlal IgG), diluted to 2.5 ~lg/mL with 2YT, was added to washed wells. The plate was transferred to a cold room rotator near the end of a 1 hour incubation at RT on a rotating platform.
SUBSllTUTE SHEEr ffWl E 26) ~-CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 - Wo 97/46251 PCT/US97/10075 Phage to be tested by mi~;lopa~ ing were obtained from the agar plates generated by biopa~ lg. Each clone to be tested was transferred using sterile toothpicks to a separate well of a round-bottom 96-well miclotillalion plate (Corning, NY) cont~ining 250 ~L '~,YT/Tet per well and cultured overnight at 37~C. Clone desi~n~tions are based on the screening antibody, the bio~ g round of origin, and the location of the clone in the overnight culture plate, e.g., ACA6501/3B10 refers to the clone isolated by ACA-6501 in the third round located in the well designated B10 on the mi-;lotiLlation plate. Following overnight incubation, phage cultures were centrifuged using a microtitration plate holder at 1300 x g for 10 minutes at RT. Supernatants constituted the source of ' neat" phage.
Initial mi~;l. palming was restricted to six clones which were tested at dilutions expanded by factors from 1: 10 to 1: 1 o6 ~ The results from these pilot clones were used to suggest the ~plol.l.ate single dilution that would yield gradable results for clones in the source plate for each round. Plates representing cultured, randomly chosen clones from the 3rd, 4th, and 5th rounds of bioparmingwere diluted to 1: 100,000 from the "neat'' solution using 2YT in miclo~ ion plates with a final volume per well of 250 ~LL. From the last plate representing the desired dilution, 100 ~LL was added to the plate cont~ining protein G-bound ACA-6501 and norrnal IgG prepared as described above. The incubation of dilute phage with aPL antibody or control IgG was carried out for 2 hours at 4~C on a flat rotator. After 9 washes with TBS/Tween in an automated plate washer, the IgG-bound phage was eluted with 20 ~L of 0.2 N HCIglycine/0.1% BSA, pH 2.2.
The elution incubation continued for 10 minutes at RT, during which time a new Corning microtitration plate was l~le~)ared cont~ining 20 ~lL of freshly starvedE. coli per well and kept chilled. One hundred forty ~lL of 29 mM Tris was addedto the plate cont~ining the phage eluates in order to neutralize the pH, following which 20 ~L of phage suspension was transferred from each well to the corresponding well in the plate cont~inin& starved E. coli. After a 10 minute incubation at 37~C, 200 ~L 2YT/dil Tet was added and incubation carried out an SUBSTlTUrE SHEEr ~WIE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 additional 30 minutes at 37~C. Using multichannel pipettors, 10 ~L from each well was spotted on a large 2YT/Tet agar plate while retaining the original 8x12well pattern and orientation from the last microtitration plate. After allowing the spots to dry for 30 min~ltes, the plate was inr.llbated overnight at 37~C. The following day, eolonies were semi4~ tiL;~ ely seored from 0 to 4+, with 0 symbolizing <10 colonies; +/-, 10-20; 1+, 20-50; 2+, 50-70% confluent; 3+, 70-90% confluent; and 4+ representing >90% confllient colonies. Of the 94 clones that were examined at a dilution of 1:105 [representing 8 I third, 6 fourth, and 7 fifth round clones~. six clones had mic~u~ in~ scores of zero, three seored 1+, 14 scored 2+, 62 scored 3+, and 9 scored 4+. A survey of random clones from the plates representing the second through fifth rounds of biop~nning was earried out by G-track DNA sequencing as described below. The results showed a dramatic drop in sequence diversity by the fourth round of biopanning (see Figure 8), therefore, a seeond plate was micropanned using phage al a dilution of 1:3 X 10 this time including clones from an earlier (second) round. A total of 94 clones were tested, including 29 whieh had scored high at I x l Os dilution ~26 from the 3rd round, I from the 4th found, and 2 from the 5th round] plus 65 clones from the 2nd round that had not been previously tested. Of the 94 elones tested at a dilution of I :3xl 05, 26 scored zero, I I seored +/, 10 seored I +, 13 scored 2+, 34 scored 3+, and zero scored 4+.
G-track DNA Sequencin~
Single-stranded viral DNA was isolated from cultures incubated overnight at 37~C. To prepare cultures, 2YT/Tet, either as 2 mL in tubes or 250 ~IL in mier~ ion plate round-bottom wells, was inoeulated with individual phage from spread plates of previously grown cultures in microtitration plates. The purifieation of phage by 20% PEG/2.5 M NaCI plGcipitalion of eulture supernatants as well as the isolation or release of virion DNA by phenol-chloroform extraction or by alkali denaturation was performed as described in SUBSmUlE SffEEr ff'(ULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 W O 97/46251 PCT~US97/10075 Smith, G.P. and J.K. Scott, "Libraries of peptides and proteins displayed on fil~mentous phage" (1993) Meth. Enzymol. 217:228-257 for cultures in tubes and - as described in Haas, S.J. and G.P. Smith G.P., "Rapid seql~onr,ing of viral DNA
from filamentous phage" (1993) BioTechniques 15:422-431 for phage in microtitration plates. The dideoxy nucleotide chain t~rmin~tion DNA sequencing technique of Sanger et al. (Sanger et al., "DNA sequencing with chain terrnin~ting inhibitors" (1970) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 74:5463-5467) was carried out using acommercial Sequenase kit (U.S. Biochemical/ Amersharn, Arlington Heights, IL) as described by Smith and Scott, supra, for tube culture phage DNA and as in Haas and Smith~ supra, for phage DNA from microtitration plates. By using only the ddCTP termination mixture, G tracking or the sequence pattern suggested by asingle base (G~ was obtained following electrophoresis on 7%
polyacrylamide/urea sequencing gels and exposure by autoradiography. Standard gel electrophoresis and autoradiography procedures were followed (Sarnbrook et al., supJ~a) G-tracking of 76 clones from the mi~;lop~ g plate tested at a phage dilution of l:I X I05 from the ACA-6501 library screen reve~led l I unique sequences, while 64 clones from the second microp~nning plate tested at a pha~e dilution of I :3 X 105 showed 30 unique sequences. Conventional DNA
sequencing using all four dideoxynucleotide triphosphates was applied to the phage clones with the highest miclop~-t-;l-g scores and unique sequences and resulted in the 12 sequences shown in Table I for the xyz library.
Phage-Capture F.T TSA
Clones ACA-663S/3A12, 3B3, 3C8, 3A5, 3C9, and 3B7 were grown as 3 mL cultures. Affinity purified ACA-6635 was diluted to 2.5 ~lg/mL in phosphate-buffered saline, pH 7.2, and 100 ~lL added to Immulon-2 microtitration plate wells. After 2 hours, the plates were washed 3 times with TBS/Tween in an automated plate washer with no ~h~kin~. The plate was then blocked with 150 ~lL
SUBS T U E S~Er ~LE 26) .
CA 022~76449 1998-11-23 - WO 97/46251 PCT~US97/10075 0.1 % BSA (globulin-free) in PBS per well. After 1 hour at 4~C, the plate was washed 3 times as previously described. After centrifuging each phage culture 3 minutes at 17,000 x g, each supçrn~t~nt was diluted 1:10 in 0.1% BSA/PBS and 100 ~lL added to each of the wells coated with affinity purified ACA-6635 and then incubated for 2 hours at 4~C. Plates were then washed with TBS/Tween as before. Horseradish peroxidase-conjugated sheep IgG anti-M13 phage antibody (Pharmacia, Inc., Piscataway, NJ) was diluted 1 :5,000 in 0.1 % BSA/PBS and 100 ~L applied to each well. Following incubation for 1 hour at 4~C, the plate was washed 4 times as before. One hundred ~L of substrate prepared according to the conjugate manufacturer's instructions was added to each well. After 19 minutes~
the absorbance at 405 nrn of each well was read in the automated microplate absorbance reader (Biotek, Winooski, VT). The seven clones tested from the ACA-6635 phage library screen were selected because of their high micropanning scores and negative phage-ELISA scores (see below). As shown in Figure 9, three clones (3A12, 3B3, and 3AS) out ofthe seven tested exhibited a very strong immunospecific signal in the phage-capture ELISA.
Phage-F~ ISA
Three mL cultures were prepared from 35 clones previously isolated with affinity purified ACA-6501 in several phage library screens as well as one fUSE 2 phage clone lacking a peptide insert which was used as a control. After centrifugation for 3 minl-tes at 17,000 X g, 100 ~L from each phage supernatant (adjusted to -2 X 1011 particles/mL, based on absorbance) was added to microtitration plate wells ~Falcon, Becton-Dickinson Labware, Lincoln Park, NY) and allowed to incubate overnight at 40~C. Following four washes with TBS 7.4, the plate was blocked with 125 ~lL of 0.5% BSA/TBS for I hour at RT. After another four TBS washes ~00 ~lL of affACA-6501 previously diluted to 2.5 ,u~/mL in TBS/BSA was added to each well and allowed to incubate 1 hour at 37~C. Following an additional four washes, 100 ~L anti-human IgG diluted SUBSTllUrE SHEEr ~IE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 wo 97/46251 PCT/US97/10075 1:1000 in TBS/0.5% Tween was added to each well. After I hour at RT, enzyme substrate was added and the incubation allowed to proceed for 2 hours. Followingthe addition of 50 ~lL 0.2 M Na2HPO4 to stop the reaction, absorbance was measured at 550mn in the automated plate absorbance reader. As shown in Figure 10, seven of the clones had significant signals inthephage-ELISA with ACA-6501: 5A12, 3B6, 3E7, 3B10 (same sequence as 2D7), 2G11, 2H1, and 2H2. The sequences for these clones are shown in Table 2.
Peptide-ELlSA
In the standard protocol, stock solutions of tetrameric peptide in dimethylformamide were diluted 1000 times to 10 llg/mL in pH 9.5 carbonate buffer. Each microtitration plate well was coated overnight at 40~C with 100 ~lLof dilute peptide followed by blocking with buffered albumin. Peptide-coated microtitration plates were incubated 1-2 hours at room temperature with aPL seraat several dilutions starting at 1:50. Following washes, the presence of peptide-bound human IgG was determined with enzyme-conjugated anti-human lgG
according to standard ELISA procedures.
Competiti~e Bindin~ Peptide-ELISA
(A) Each well of an Imrnulon II plate (Dynatech Laboratories, Inc., Chantilly VA) was coated with 100 ~lL of a solution cont~ining 10 ~lg tetravalent peptide ACA 6501/3B10 in 50 mM sodium carbonate, p3I 9.5, containing 35 mM
sodium bicarbonate (Fisher Scientific, Pittsburgh, PA, reagent grade) for at least I
hour at ~T, except for three wells used as blank controls. The liquid was then removed from the wells and 200 ~lL of 0.5% (wt/vol) BSA (Sigma Chemical, St. Louis, MO, #A7638) in TBS was added per well including the blank wells for blocking and incubated for at least I hour at RT. Four 1.5 mL microfuge tubes were numbered I to 4. The following reagents were mixed in the first microfuge tube (Brinkman Instruments, Westbury, NY): 30 ~L of 5% BSA; 284 ~L TBS; 8 SUBSTllUI E SHEEr ~RlJlE 26) - CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O97/46251 PCT~US9711007 ~LL of a stock solution of approximately 400-500 ~lg/mL of monomeric peptide (ACA-5A12 or -CB2 or -3B l O or scrambled -3B 10 as negative control) in TBS, - and 8.2 ~L of 1:10 diluted serum 6501 in 0.5% BSA-TBS. The following - reagents were mixed in the second microfuge tube: 30 ~lL of 5% BSA; 290 ,uL
TBS; 2 ',IL of a stock solution of approximately 400-500 ~g/mL of monomeric peptide (ACA-5A12 or -CB2 or -3B10 or scrarnbled -3B10 as negative control) in TBS; and 8.2 gL of 1:10 diluted serum 6501 in 0.5% BSA-TBS. The following reagents were mixed in the third microfuge tube: 30 ~,IL of 5% BSA, 287 ~L of a 1:10 dilution of approximately 400-500 ~lg/mL of monomeric peptides (5A12, CB2. 3BlO. or scrambled sequence 3B10 control), and 8.2 ,uL of ACA-6501 serum previously diluted 1:10 in 0.5% BSA-TBS. The following reagents were mixed in the fourth Eppendorfmicrofuge tube: 60 ~L 5% BSA; 584 ~L TBS and 16.5 gL of 1:10 diluted serum 6501 in 0.5% BSA-TBS. The blocked plate was washed 5 times with.TBS. The solution in the first microfuge tube was added to triplicatewells, 100 ~LL per well. Identical amounts of the solutions in the second, third and fourth microfuge tubes were also added to triplicate wells. An aliquot of 100 ,uL
of the solution in the fourth microfuge tube was added to each of the three blocked blanli wells of the microtitration plate. The plate was incubated for I hour at RT
with agitation at 40 rpm in an orbital shaker (American Dade, Miami, FL, RotatorV) and then washed 5 times with TBS. An aliquot of 100 ~L of 1:1000 diluted goat-anti-human-IgG/~lk~line phosphatase conjugate (Zymed, South San Francisco, CA.Cat. no. 62-8422) in 0.5% BSA-TBS was added and incubated for I hour at RT. The plate was then washed 5 times with TBS and the assay was developed by adding 100 ,uL PPMP diluted substrate solution as described in Example 1. After 20 minllte~, the reaction was stopped by adding 50 ~L of 0.2 M
Na2HPO4 (Mallinckrodt, St. Louis, MO., reagent grade) per well. The optical density was read at 550 mn in a microplate reader (Bio-Tek Instrurnents, Winooski, VT, Model EL 311). The optical density at 550 mn versus the amount of the peptide per well was plotted in Graph Pad Prizm (Graph Pad Software, Inc SUBSmU~E SHEEr ~lllLE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 Wo 97/46251 PCT/US97/10075 San Diego, CA). The amount of peptide required for 50~/u inhibition of binding of serum 6501 to tetravalent 3B10 was calculated from the graph.
(B) Immulon I(~) 96-well, flat-bottom, polystyrene microtitration plates (Dynatech Laboratories, Inc., Chantilly, VA) were coated with 30 ~L/well of cardiolipin (CL, 50 gg; Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO) in ethanol. Two control wells received 30 ~lL ethanol only. After overnight evaporation at 4~C, each well was blocked with 200 ~lL of 5% (w/v) fish gelatin in PBS for 2 hours at RT. The CL-coated, blocked plate was washed 5 times with TBS and then to each well was added ~2-GPI as 100 ,uL of 2.3% (v/v in PBS) IgG-depleted human serum (Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO) and incubated 2 hours at RT.
During this incubation, variable amounts of each of six peptides were mixed with 22 ~L ACA-6501 serum diluted with 3% fish gelatin in 1:1 TBS/PBS
(final dilution of 1 :400) in a final volume of 220 ~lL using Eppendorf microcentrifugetubes. Specifically,intube#l weremixed 181.3 ~Lof3%fish gelatin in TBS-PBS, 16.7 ~lL of peptide stock solution plus 22 ~L of ACA-6501 serum diluted 40 times in 3% fish gelatin/TBS-PBS. Stock solutions ranged from 450-800 ~lg/mL for peptides #951 (diserine non-cyclized negative control), #952 (a lot of LJP 69()), and thioethers CCTE-3G3, CHTE-3G3, HCTE-3G3 and HHTE-3G3. To tube #2 the following were added: 148 ~L fish gelatin/TBS-PBS~
50 ~L of peptide stock solution, plus 22 ~L of 40 times diluted ACA6501 serum.
Tube #3 contained 48 ~lL fish gelatin/TBS-PBS, 50 ~lL of peptide stock solution,plus 22 ~L of 40 times diluted ACA-6501 serum. The control tube #4 received 396 IlL fish gelatin/TBS-PBS and 44 IlL of 40 times diluted ACA-6501 serum (no peptide). Each of the tubes incubatçd for approximately 1 hour at RT.
The CL/~2-GPI microtitration plate was washed 5 times with TBS and 100 -- ,uL aliquots in duplicate from Eppendorf tubes # 1, 2, 3, and 4 cont~ining the antibody-peptide (or no peptide mixtures) were added to the wells. A volume of 100 ~L from tube #4 was added to the duplicate control wells containing no cardiolipin. The microtitration plate was incubated for 1 hour at RT with agitation SUBSmUlE SHEEr ~UlE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 at 40 rpm in an orbital shaker (American Scientific, Rotator V), washed 5 times with TBS and then 100 ~LL of 1:1000 goat anti-human IgG :~lk~line phosphatase conjugate (Zymed, Cat No. 62-8422) in 0.5% (wlv) BSA-TBS was added.
Following incubation for I hour at RT, the microtitration plate was again washed5 times with TBS and the calorimetric eszyme detection developed by adding 100 ~L of PMPP solution (7.8 g phenolphthalein monophosphate plus 69.5 g of 2-amino-2-methyl-1-propanol in 100 mL water stock solution diluted 1 :26 with water). After 21 minutes, the reaction was stopped by adding 50 ~L of 0.2 M
Na2HP04 (Mallinckrodt) to each well. Absorbance at 550 mn was read in a microplate reader (13ioTek InstnllnPnt~, Model EL 31 1). Absorbance vs. peptide added was plotted on Graph Pad Prism (Graph Pad Software, Inc.) as shown in Figure 12. The amount of peptide that inhibited ACA-6501 binding by 50%, the IC50, was calculated from the graph at the intersection of l~alf-maximal absorbance with amount of peptide added.
(C) Nunc Maxisorp~) 96-well, flat-bottom microtitration plates were coated with 100 ~IL/well of purified human P2-glycoprotein I (Perlmrnune, Rockville, MD) at 10 ~lg/well in PBS. Two control wells received 100 ~L PBS
onl!~. After two hours incubation at room temperature, the liquid was removed.
Thc coated plate was blocked for 2 hours at room temperature with 200~LL/well of2() PBS cont~ining 2% (w/v) nonfat dry milk (Carnation, Glendale, CA) and 0.4%
(w/v) Tween 80 (Calbiochem, San Diego, CA). The blocking solution was also used as a reagent diluent.
During the second hour of incubation, variable amounts of each of four . _ .
test peptides were mixed with 2211L of ACA-6501 serum diluted with sample 2~ diluent in a fmal volume of 220,uL using Eppendorf microcentrifuge tubes.
Specifically, in tube #I, 188 ~L of sample diluent, 10 ~L of peptide stock solution (2 mg - 4 mg/mL diluent), and 22 ~L of AC-6501 serum diluted 1 :35 in sample diluent were added. To tube #2, 158 ~L sample diluent, 40 ,uL peptide stock solution and 22 ~L of I :35 diluted ACA-6501 serum were added. Tube #3 SUBSllTU~ SHEl' ff~(ULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 contained 38 liL sample dituent, 160 IlL peptide stock solution and 22 ~lL of 1 :35 diluted ACA-6501 sertim. The control tube, tube 94, contained 396 IlL sample diluent and 44 ~lL of 1:35 diluted ACA-6501 serum (no peptide). Each ofthe tubes was incubated for approximately I hours at room temperature S The ~2-GPI microplate was washed S times with TBS and 100 ~lL of themixtures contained in Eppendorf tubes 91, 2, 3 and 4 was added to duplicate wells of the microplate. 100 ~LL of the contents of tube #4 was added to each of the duplicate control wells that were not coated with ,B2-GPI. The plate was incubated for I hour at room temperature, washed 5 times with TBS and 100 ~lL of 1:1000 goat anti-human IgG/A-P conju~ate (Zymed, Cat. No. 62-8422) diluted in sample diluent buffer was added. Following incubation for I hour at room temperature, the plate was again washed 5 times with TBS and the calorimetric enzyme detection developed by adding 100 ',lL PPMP solution (7.8 g phenolphthalein monophosphate and 69.5 g 2-amino-2-methyl-1-propanol in 100 mL water stock solution diluted I :26 with water). After 22 minutes, the reaction was stopped with 50 IlL of 0.2 M Na2HPO4 (Mallinckrodt) added per well. A55Onm was read in a microplate reader (Bio-Tek Instruments, Model EL 311). Absorbance vs. peptide added was plotted on Graph Pad Prism (Graph Pad Software, Inc.) às shown in Figurc 21. The amount of peptide that inhibited ACA-6501 binding by 50~/0, the IC-50~ was calculated from the graph at the intersection of half-maximal absorbance with the amount of peptide added.
Example 5: Truncation F~periments of Peptide 3B 10 and the Resultin~ Peptide Coml-etition F.T lSA Results Microtitration plates (96-well, flat bottom polystyrene, Irnmulon-2, Dynatech Laboratories~ Inc., Chantilly, VA) were coated with 100 ~L/well for I
hour at RT with tetrameric ACA-6501/3B10 peptide at 10 ~g/mL in carbonate buffer, pH 9.6 (15 mM Na2CO3/35 mM NaHCO3). After the liquid from the wells was removed. each well was blocked for I hour at RT with 200 ,uL 0.5% (wt/vol) SUBSrllUrE SHEEr (I'~UlE 26) --CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 BSA (globulin-free, cat. no. A7638, Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO) in TBS.
Three wells on the plate were left uncoated by tetravalent peptide to serve as blank control wells.
During the blocking step, each soluble, monomer peptide to be tested was set up in three test tubes (Eppendorf micro test tubes, Brinkm~nn Instruments, Westbury, NY) each cont~inin~; 30 ~lL 5% BSA/TBS, 8.2 ~IL ACA-6501 serum (at 1: 10 dilution with 0.5% BSA/TBS), plus a variable volume of the peptide/-FBS
stock and the necessary volume of TBS buffer to yield a final volume of 330 ~L.
The 330 ~L volume was sufficient to generate triplicate 100 ',lL sarnples for each peptide concentration that was tested for its ability to block ACA-6501 bindin~ to the tetravalent peptide-coated plate. For peptide 139, which was truncated at the amino terminus and lacks the framework ala-gly contribution normally tested. theconcentration of the stock solution was approximately 340-400 ~g/mL TBS and aliquots of 19 !lL, 75 ~L. and 292 ~L were removed to prepare the three peptide concentration tubes. For peptide 142 (lacking only the N-terminal ala) and peptide ] 4~ (not truncated). stock solution concentrations were 400-500 ~g/mL in TBS. Aliquots from each stock solution of 1 ~,lL, 4 IlL, and 16 ~lL were removedto set up the three concentration tubes for each peptide. For the peptide monomer control tube (lacking peptide), a tube with a final volume of 660 ~lL was prepared cont~inin, 60 IlL 5% BSA, I 6.5 ~L of a I: 10 dilution of ACA-6501 and 583.5 IlLTBS, i.e., the same final concentrations (0.5% BSA and ACA-6501 serum at 1 :400) as the 330 ilL tubes but with twice the volume and without peptide.
Following the blocking incubation, the plate coated with tetravalent peptide was washed S times with TBS. From each 330 IlL tube cont~inin~
peptides 139, 142 and 143 at different concentrations, 100 IlL was added to coated triplicate wells. Three 100 IlL aliquots from the 660 ~L control tube without peptide were each added to coated wells and three additional I 00 ~lL ali~uots were each added to uncoated blank wells. The plate was incubated at 40 rev/min on a rotar~ orbital shaker (Rotator V, American Dade. Miami, FL) for I hour at RT andthen washed 5 times with TBS. One hundred ~L/well of goat antihuman SUBS~lllUI~ SffEEr ~(ULE 26) - CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 971462~1 PCTAUS97/10075 IgG/alkaline phosphatase conjugate (Cat. no. 62-8422, Zymed, South San Francisco, CA) diluted l :1000 in BSA/TBS was added to the microplate. After incubation for I hour at RT, the plate again was washed S times with TBS. Color development followed the addition of 100 ~lL/well of freshly prepared dilute PPMP substrate solution. A dilute solution of PPMP (phenolphthalein monophosphate, cat. no. P-5758, Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO) was prepared by making a 1:26 dilution with water of the PPMP stock solution (0. 13 M PPMP, 7.8 M amino-2-methyl-1-propanol adjusted to pH l O.15 with HCI).
After 30 minutes, the reaction was stopped by adding 50 ~lL/well of 0.2M
l 0 Na2HPO3 (reagent grade, Mallinckrodt, St. Louis, MO). Absorbance measurements at 550 nrn were carried out on a microplate reader (Bio-Tek Instruments, Winooski, VT) and the As50nm vs. peptide added per well results plotted using Graph Pad Prizrn (Graph Pad Software, Inc., San Diego, CA). As shown on Figure l l, a horizontal line has been drawn corresponding to half-maximal the binding reaction obtained in the absence of monomer peptide competitive inhibition. The amount of peptide necessary for 50% inhibition can be read at the intersection of this line with the plot for each peptide tested. The 50% inhibition values are shown on Figure 12. The results indicate that while the loss of the N-terminal Ala had no negative conse~uences, the additional loss of Gly increased by about 8-fold the concentration necessary to achieve 50%
inhibition.
F.Y~rle 6: Substitution of ~l~ha n ethyl proline into 3B l O ~nd the resultin~
~.r,lSAs Testing of peptides ACA-6501/3BlO and analogs in which prolines at the 3 and 9 position were replaced by a-Me-Pro was carried out using the methodology described in Exarnple 5. Peptides 3B10, 726 (aMe-Pro substituted at the 3 position), 727 (aMe-Pro substituted at the 9 position), and 72B (aMe-Pro substituted at both the 3 and 9 positions) were tested as soluble monomer peptides SUBSTllU~E SHEET ~UlE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 W O 97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 in a competitive- binding ELISA using tetramer peptide 3B 10-coated microtitration plates and ACA-6501 serum.
Microtitration plates were coated with tetramer 3B10 peptide as described for Example 5. For each of the four peptides tested, three peptide concentrations were prepared in tubes. As in Example 5, these twelve tubes had final concentrations of 0.5% BSA/TBS and ACA-6501 serum at a final dilution of 1 :400 in a final volume of 330 ~L. All peptide stock solutions were at 400-500 ~g/mL TBS. To tubes cont~inin~ 30 ~lL of 5% BSA/TBS and 8.2 ~L of ACA-6501 serum (diluted 1:10 with 0.5% BSA/TBS), aliquots of I ~lL, 4 ~L, or 16 ~lL of each of the four peptide stock solutions were added in addition to an applu~liate volume of TBS to achieve a final volume of 330 ~lL. A control tube with no competitor peptide present was prepared with a final volume of 660 ~lL as described in Example 5.
Following the blocking incubation of the tetravalent peptide-coated plate, three 100 ,~LL aliquots from each of the peptide concentration tubes for each of the four peptides as well as the control tube cont~ining no peptide and blank controls were tested as described in Example 5. The microtitration plate ELISA proceduresas well as the data handling were perfonned as described in Example 5. As shown in Figure 13, peptide 727, where a-Me-Pro was substituted at the 9 position, wassignificantly more active than unmodified peptide 3B10 or the analog with ~oth prolines changed (peptide728). Peptide726, which was substituted at position 3, lost activity as a result of the substitution.
Example 7: Abbréviated Description of Screen with 6626 Antibody and the Corresponding Sequences Affinity purified ACA-6626 (AffACA-6626) was isolated by affinity purification from 8 mL of ACA-6626 plasma as previously described. AffACA-6626 (10 ,ug) was incubated with the epitope xy'z phage library consisting of a pool of all p-III component libraries in a final volume of l O0 ~lL as previously SUBSIl~ SHE~ ~ULE 26) --CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 W 0 97/46251 PCT~US97/10075 described for ACA-6501 biop~nning. Following three rounds of biop~nning, randomly selected phage from the second and third rounds were tested by micropanning. Only a few clones were weakly immunopositive at a 1: 1000 dilution. An additional 4th round of biop:~nning was carried out. Miclop~
of 94 fourth round clones revealed 43 irnmunopositives, some at phage dilutions as high as 1: 100,000. G-Tracking DNA sequencing of the 43 immunopositive clones carried out as previously described for ACA-6501 revealed 5 unique sequences. After conventional four base DNA sequencing, the translated amino acid sequences of Table 3 were obtained.
Example 8: Identification of Sequences Specific for the ACA from Patient The epiX~ Z phage display library was screened using methods similar to those in Example 4 with ACA affinity purified antibody from patient number 6644. A colony blot assay as described previously was employed as the final identification step prior to peptide synthesis. Approximately 150 colonies were plated on the original nitrocellulose membrane and assayed. Antibody from patient 6644 was used at a concentration of 1 ~lg/mL. Of the 150 colonies platedon the nitrocellular membrane and assayed, only 4 were strongly positive and 2 weakly positive in this screen. Sequencing of the inserts of the six positive phage selected by this screen revealed that the inserts were all derived from the 8-mer library with a free amino-terminus (epiZ):
Gly-Ile-Leu-Ala-Leu-Asp-Tyr-Val-Gly-Gly (3 inserts) Gly-Ile Leu-Thr-Ile-Asp-Asn-Leu-Gly-Gly (1 insert) Gly-Ile-Leu-Leu-Asn-Glu-Phe-Ala-Gly-Gly (2 inserts) SUBSlllUrE SHEEl ff'(VLE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 Example 9: Sllmm~y of Ph~e T ibrary Screen with ACA-6641.
AffACA-6641 was isolated from 4 mL of plasma taken from patient number 6641. AffACA-6641 (10 llg) was incubate~ with the pooled p-III phage libraries in a final volume of 100,uL as described previously. Following four rounds of biop~nning, 45 clones from the 3rd and 4th rounds were tested by microp~nning Of the 45, 23 scored negative. The 3rd round phage yielded two clones that scored 4+, two that scored 3+ and two that scored 2+. From the 4th round, one clone scored 4+, one scored 3+ and three scored 2+. G-tracking DNA
sequencing revealed six unique sequences. Only one, clone 3G3, was strongly positive in the phage-capture ELISA. Four base DNA sequencing gave the following translated peptide sequence: _ CLGVLGKLC.
~xample 10: Peptide conjugation to non-~mmunogenic. multivalent carriers Several tetravalent platforms for the development of B cell tolerogens have been developed as described in co-owned and co-pending U.S. Patent Applications, Serial Nos., 08/118, 055, filed September 8, 1993, 08/152,506, filed November 15, 1993, and U.S. Patents Nos. 5,268,454, 5,276,013 and 5.162,515 which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. ~andidate peptidesselected by aPL antibody screens of epitope libraries are conjugated and tested for modifications of immunochemical behavior such as antibody binding.
Non-inununogenic multivalent platforms with amine groups are synthesized as shown in the following scheme.
SUBSTllUrE SHEr ~WlE 26) , .
Amine on Platfolm - Carbox~rl on Pe~tide C8atN(C~2) sCONH ~ r NHCC)(C~2)6NHCaZ
o~o~lL~N
C8Z11N(Clt~sCONH~ 12 ~ NffOO(C~2)sNHC8 PdlC
c~clohexane/EtOH
~2N(C~23scoNH~ ~ ~ NHCO(CH~)sNH~
N--II~o~,O~ o~N
H2N(C~sCONH~ 2 2-~oo(c~6NH2 PNH~(P = I IF ~3b;10 p~otec~n~ ~a~
f3 ~~ amlno t~rmi~s and sldo ~;) OMF
PHN p~OHN(~)sCO~ ~ N~tCO(C~)6NI IOO~HP
N~l ~ o ~ o,lL N
5 PHN-p~de~OHN(C~OONH ~ ~ NHCO~CH~NHCC~pep~NHP
H,2N ~COHN((~)6CO~I~~HCC)~ sNHCO~de Nt~2 ~ o ~2N1~XK~IOOHN(C~ C3~ NHC~
Compo--nd 2: ~ solution of 8.0 g (5 .7 mmol) of 1 in 50 mL of absoiute EtOH and 35 mL of cyclohexene was placed under nitrogen, and 500 mg of 10% Pd on carbon was added. The mixture was refluxed with stirring for two hours. When cool, the mixture was filtered through Celite and concentrated to give 5.0 g of 2 as an oil. IH NMR (50/50 CDCI3/CD30D) d 1.21 (m, 8H), 1.49 (m, 8H), 1.62 (m, 8H), 2.19 (t, J - 7.4 Hz, 8H), 2.67 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 8H), 3.36 (bd s, 16H), 3.67 (s, 4H), 3.71 (m, 4H), 4.21 (m, 4H).
Protected pepti~ with free ~rboxyl (PH~-peptide-CO2~
A peptide is synth~si7~1 with standard solid phase methods using FMOC
ch-?mi~try on a Wang (p-alkoxybenzyl) resin, using trifluoroacetic acid (TFA) stable pr~ lillg groups (benzyl ester or cyclohexyl ester on carboxyl groups and SUBSlTrl~ SHEr ~E 26) W O 97/46251 PCT~US97/1007 carbobenzyloxy (CBZ) OR amino groups). Amino acid residues are added sequentially to the amino terminus. The peptide is removed from the resin with TFA to provide a peptide with one free carboxyl group at the carboxy terminus and all the other carboxyls and amines blocked. The protected peptide is purified by reverse phase HPLC.
Peptide - Platform Conju~ate, 4 The protected peptide (0.3 mmol) is dissolved in 1 mL of dimethylformamide (DM'F), and to the solution is added 0.3 mmol of diisopropylcarbodiimide and 0.3 mmol of l-hydroxybenzotriazole hydrate (HOBT). The solution is added to a solution of 0.025 mmol tetraamino platforrn, 2 in 1 mL of DMF. W'hen complete, the DMF is removed under vacuum to yield a crude fully protected conjugate 3. The conjugate, 3, is treated with hydrofluoric acid (HF) in the presence of anisole for 1 hour at 0~ to give conjugate 4.
Purification is accomplished by plcl~a dlive reverse phase HPLC.
The following scheme shows the ~tt~ ment of an amino group of a peptide to a carboxy group on a platform.
- Carboxyl on Platform - Amine on L i~and ~2N(cH2)6coNH~ ~ NHCO(CH~sNH2 ) 1~ ~ o ~ N
H2N(CH2)sCONH ,, NHCO(CH2)tN~2 2 succmlc anhydride H(~2CCH2~H2COHN(C~sCONH ~ NHco~cl~sNHcocl~t2co2 N~l~ ~ O ~
H~2coHNta~scoNHJ 5 OCC~NHS (--NHCO(CH2)sNHCO~CO~
H2N-p~ptide CONH2 (~de cnains ~otedea~wi h HF
1 , labUe protectirlg ~roupS) pep NHOCa~2GH2COHN(C~sCONH~ r t~cO~C~2)d~CON
N~~ ~o~o~lLN
p3~NHOCCH2a~zCOHN(C~2)sCONH ~ ,r f~ 2 --NHOO(C~sNHCOa kC112CONH~
pep = protect~3d pepti~e ' wNHocc~l2(~2coHN(c~coNH~ ~ NHCO(C~ sNHOI~2C~Hpe N~l' a~ ~0--1~ N
pcpNHOC~l COllN(C~ 1 2 --N~O~
SU~mU~E SHEEr ~ULE 2S) . .
CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 Compound 5 - Platform with Four Carboxylic Acid Groups Succinic anhydride ( 1.0 g, 10 mmol) is added to a solution of 861 mg (1.0 mmol) of 2 and 252 mg (3.0 mrnol) of NaHCO3 in 20 mL of 1/1 dioxane/H2O, and the mixture is stirred for 16 hours at RT. The mixture is acidified with lN HCI and concentrated. The concentrate is purified by silica gel chromatography to provide 5.
Protected peptide with free ~mine (H2N-peptide-CONH2~
A peptide is synthesized with standard solid phase methods on an amide resin~ which resulted in a carboxy termin~l arnide after cleavage frQm the resin, using TFA stable protecting groups (benzyl ester or cyclohexyl ester on carboxylgroups and CBZ on amino groups). Amino acid residues are added sequentially to the amino terminus using standard FMOC chemistry. The peptide is removed from the resin with trifluoroacetic acid to provide a protected peptide with a free amine linker. The protected peptide is purified by reverse phase HPLC.
Peptide -Platforrn ConJI~ate. 7 A solution of 0.05 mmol of protected peptide with free amine, (H2N-peptide-CONH2), 0.1 mmol of diisopropylethyl amine,-and 0.01 mmol of 5 in 1 mL of DMF is prepared. BOP reagent (benzotriazol- 1 -yloxy-tris(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate) (0.1 mmol) is added, and the mixture is stirred until the reaction is complete as evidenced by analyticalHPLC. The peptide protecting groups are removed by tre~tment with HF in the presence of anisole at 0~ to give conjugate with protecting groups removed, 1 Compound 1 is purified by plel)alalive reverse phase HPLC.
The following scheme shows how to attach a sulfhydryl lir~er to the amino terminus of a peptide and, in turn, attach the peptide/linker to a tetrabromoacetylated platform to give compound 13.
SUBSIllUrE SHEEr ~(IJLE 26) ' CA 02256449 1998-11-23 . 78 Haloacetyl on Platforrn and Sulfhydryl on Peptide tri~ohor~ylmethanol H2S0~
HS(CH2)2C02H ~rS(CH2)2CO2H
E~OAc 2 R f~rut~op~7en~
DCC
1) H~N-p~p ~ r C~2CH2 - . N~
Jiu~
HS(CH2)2CONH~ r-S(CH2)2C0~ No2 1 1 2~ tr~luoro2c~ic ocid ~Y
B-C~12COHN(C~)s;CONH~ ~ NHco(cH2)sNH
N~l~c~ O~t~N
BrC1 12COHN(Cf.~2)sCONH 1~ t'll lCC~(Cf~2)sNHCOC~2f3<
F~NHCo(ct 12)2SCH2COHN(CI~2)sCONH~ ~ N~CC(Cl~12)si~1COC~2S(C~2)2 N~~
pel~NHCO(aO25C~12COHN(a~s~NHJ 13 2 (~ N~co~ 2)sNHcocH2s(c~)2 Con~3ound 9 Concentrated sulfuric acid ( 100 ~L) was added to a 60~C solution of 4.48 g (17.2 mmol) oftriphenyl methanol and 1.62 g (15.3 mmol, 1.3 mL) of 3-mercaptopropionic acid in 35 mL of EtOAc. The mixture was stirred at 60~C
for 10 minutes, allowed to cool to room temperature (RT), and placed on ice for I hour. The resulting white solid was collected by filtration to give 4.52 g (75%) of 9.
Compolmd 10 Dicyclohexyl carbodiimide (DCC) (2.41 g, 1 1.7 mmol) was added to a 0~C solution of 2.72 g (7.8 mmol) of 2 and 1.08 g (7.8 mmol) of p-nitrophenol in41 mL of CH2C I2 The mixture was stirred for 16 hours allowing it to come to RT. The mixture was filtered to remove N,N-dicyclohexylurea (DCU), and the SUBSmUrE SHEEr ffUllE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 W O 97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 filtrate was concentrated. The residue was cryst~lli7~d from hexane/CH2CI2 to give 3.17 g (86%) of 10 as pale yellow crystals.
Con~ound 11 - cyclic thioether peptide with rner~topropionyl linker S attached A solution of a cyclic thioether peptide (an analogue of a disulfide cyclized peptide in which one sulfur was replaced with a CH2) and sodium bicarbonate in water and dioxane was treated with p-nitrophenyl ester 10. If the peptide contains Iysine, it must be al.proJ~I;ately blocked. The resulting modified peptide was treated with trifluoroacetic acid to provide thiol linker modified peptide 1 1 Compound 13 - coniu~ate of cyclic thioether peptide ~nd bromoacetylated platform To a He sparged solution of 0.10 mmol of thiol modified peptide 1 1 in 100 mM sodiurn borate pH 9, was added 0.025 of bromoacetylated platform L2 as a 40 mg/mL solution in 9/1 MeOH/H2O). The solution was allowed to stir under N2 atmosphere until conjugation was complete as evidenced by ~IPLC. The conjugate was purified by reverse phase HPLC.
SUBSllIU~ SHEEI ~IULE 26) wO 97/46251 PCT/uSs7/l00 Example 12: Synthesis of LJP 685 1) is~butyldllotofotms~e N-., . ~,ll .~1, . IVI pl " ~e, 'THf C02~1 2) N-hydroxy-2-mcr~plopyridin~3 BOCHN~-- Et~N BOCHN~/ CH2-Br Co2c~cH~)3 co2C(CH?)3 4 <litlvl.llcn~,t f=\
80C-~ly-pro-CO2H DCC, THf80C~ly-pto-CO~c>--NO2 ~CH~)3SS--~CO2H ~) NHS/DCC(CH3),SS~cONl 12 NHFMOC 2) ~IH~HCO~ NHF~10C
N-~MOC-t~utyl~hiocysteine 1) P8u~ aHCO3 d:o~n~ l2~
2) ~)~npound 1 K~'COI ~
" x~2O
gocNH-Gly~ro-coH~clt~s~coNH2BOCHNrCH7 S~CONH2 18 C02H NHFMOC ~ 1 7 CO2C(CH3)3 NI~FMOC
~) rFA~H20tHOCH2CH2SH
~) compound 15 solid phase NaHCO~dio~ne~H2O
peptide synthesis E3ocNH~-p-coNH~,rcH2--S CONH2 l l 20 ~H-I-L~02H NHCO-R(Pn~c)-D(Ot~u)-P~-A-L-NI IFMOC
1) OBU/CH3CN H2N~-P-COHN~, CH~S ~CONH2 2) C~PPAlCH3Crllpyridine l l 3) TFA/H2Orll, -i5 le~~DTlpheno/ CO NH
(90%) ~ HN-I~-~-A-P~'-D-R-CO
21 (LJP 6~5) y-bromo-N-BOC-a-~minobutryic acid t-butyl ester. compolmtl 14: A solution of 4.û3 g (13.3 mmol) of N-BOC-glutamic acid-a-t-butyl ester and 1.61 mL (1.48 g, 14.6 mmol) of N-methylmorpholine in 40 mL of dry THF under N2 atmosphere was cooled to 15~. Isobutylchloroformate (1.73 mL, 1.82 g, 13.3 mmol) was added to the mixture dropwise. The mixture was stirred for 10 minllte~ and a solution of 2.03 g (16.û mmol) of N-hydroxy-2-mercaptopyridine in 8 mL of THF
was added followed by 2.23 mL (1.62 g, 16.0 mmol) of Et3N. The mixture was covered with foil to keep out light and allowed to stir at room temperature for SUBSrllllFE SHEEr ~UIE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 I hour. The mixture was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated on the rotaryevaporator taking care to minimi7~ exposure to light. The concentrate was dissolved in 20 mL of BrCC 13 and the solution was cooled to -70~C. The solid was placed under vacuum, then purged with N2, allowed to come to room S temperature, placed in a 20~ water bath, and ilTadiated from above at close range with a 500 W s.ml~mp for 5 minlltes The mixture was concentrated on the rotary evaporator and purified by silica gel chromatography (40 mm X 150 mm, toluene was used as eluent until UV active material finished eluting, 2% EtOAc/toluene (500 mL), 5% EtOAc/toluene (500 mL). Impure fractions were repurified. Pure l 0 fractions by TLC (Rf 0.23, 5% EtOAc/toluene) were combined and concentrated to give 3.23 g (72%) of compound 14 as a waxy solid.
N-P~OC-Elycylproline-4-nitrophenyl ester. con~ound 15: A solution of 3.0 g (11.6 mmol) of N-BOC-glycylproline and 1.93 g (13.9 mmol) of 4-nitrophenol in 82 mL of dry THF was cooled to 0~C and 3.34 g (16.2 mmol) of DCC was added.
The mixture was stilTed at 0~C for 1 hour, the ice bath was removed, and the mixture was stirred for 16 hours at room temperature. HOAC (579 ~lL) was added to the mixture and it was allowed to stir for 30 minutes. The mixture was kept in the freezer for 30 minutes and filtered under vacuum. The filtrate was concentrated and purified by silica gel chromatography (18 X 150 mm bed, 2.5%
EtOAc/97.5% CH2C 12/l %HOAc). Traces of acetic acid were removed by concentrating from dioxane several times on the rotary evaporator. The concentrate was lrilu-dl~d with 3/l hexane Et2O and the reslllting white solid was collected by filtration to give 4.1 g (90%) of compound 15 as a white solid; TLCRf 0.09, 40/60/l EtOAc/hexanelHOAc; lH NMR(CDC13) o 1.09-2.55 (m, 4H), 1.48 (s, 9H), 3.47-3.77 (m, 2H), 4.05 (m, 2H), 4.74 ~m, lH), 5.45 (bd s, lH), 7.35 (d, 2H), 8.30 (d, 2H).
N-FMOC-S-t-butylthiocysteine~mide. com~ound 16 A solution of 5.0 g (11.6 mmol) of FMOC-S-t-butylthiocysteine and 1.33 g (11.6 mmol) of N-SUBSlllUlE SHEEr ~UIlE 2B) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 wO 97/46251 PCTtUSg7/10075 hydroxysuccinimide in 115 mL of THF was cooled to 0~C. To the solution was added 3.58 g (17.37 rnmol) of DCC. The mixture was stirred at 0~C for I hour and 42.9 mL of a solution of 1.6 g of (NH4)HCO3 in 50 mL of water was added.
The mixture was stirred for 4.5 hours, allowing the ice bath to gradually warm to room temperature and concentrated on a rotary evaporator to remove THF and give an aqueous phase with white solid. The mixture was stirred with 200 mL of CH2C 12 until most of the solid dissolved, then was shaken with 100 mL of IN
HCI solution. The CH2C 12 layer was washed with 100 mL of saturated NaHCO3 solution~ dried (Na2SO4), and filtered. The filtrate was brought to a boil on a hot plate and crystallized from 300 mL of CH2CI2/hexane to give 4.36 g (87%) of compound 16 as a white solid: mp 127~-129~C; TLC Rf 0.29, 95/5/1 CH2CI./CH3CN/MeOH, IH NMR (CDC13) ~ 1.36 (s, 9H), 3.06-3.24 (m, 2H), 4.25 (t, lH)~ 4.55 (m. 3H). 5.56 (bd s, lH), 5.70 (bd s, lH), 6.23 (bd s, lH); 13c NMR (CD,CI3) 29.8, 41.9, 47.1, 48.5, 54.2, 67.2, 120.0, 125.0, 127.1, 127.8, 141.3, 143.6, 156.1, 172.2. Analysis, Calculated: C, 61.4%; H, 6.1%; N, 6.5%.
~ound: C, 61.5%; H, 6.0%; N, 6.5%.
Compound 17: Water (16.9 mL) was added to 2.91 g (6.75 mmol) of compound 16 in 33.8 mL of dioxane and the solution was sparged with nitrogen for 5-10 minutes. The mixture was kept under a nitrogen atmosphere and I .13 g (13.5 rnrnol) of NaHCO3 was added followed by 1.77 mL (1.44 g, 7.09 mmol) of PBu3. The mixture was stirred at room te~ Idlure for 1 hour and partitioned between 1 X 100 mL of IN HCI and 2 X 100 mL of CH2C 12. The CH2C 12 layers were combined and concentrated and the resulting white solid was partlally dissolved in 33.8 mL of dioxane. Water (9 mL) was added and the mixture was - purged with nitrogen for 5-10 minutes. The mixture was kept under nitrogen atmosphere and 2.17 g (16.9 mmol) of K2CO3 was added followed by 2.63 g (8.1 mmol) of compound 14. The mixture was stirred for 16 hours and partitioned between 1 X 100 mL of lN HCI and 2 X 100 mL of 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2. The CH2Cl2 layers were combined, dried with NaSO4, filtered and concentrated to a SUBSmUrE SHEEr ~lULE 28) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 Wo 97/46251 PCT/us97lloo7s semisolid residue. Purification by silica gel chromatography (1/3 CH3CN/CH2Cl2) gave 3.2 g (80%) of compound 17 as a white solid; TLC Rf 0.27, 1/3 CH3CN/CH2Cl2. Further purification of an analytical sample was done by recryst~lli7ing from hexane/EtOr',c; mp 104-106.5~C; IH NMR (CDCI3) o 1.47 (s, 9H), 1.49 (s, 9H), 1.96 (m, lH), 2.11 (m, lH), 2.69 (m, 2H), 2.88 (m, lH), 3.03 (m, lH), 4.29 (t, lH), 4.36 (m, 2H), 4.S0 (m, 2H), 5.21 (m, lH), 5.49 (m, lH), 5.81 (m, lH), 6.54 (m, lH), 7.34 (t, 2H), 7.42 (t, 2H), 7.61 (d, 2H), 7.80 (d, 2H); 13C-NMR (MeOH) ~ 26.1, 26.7, 28.2, 28.7, 34.8, 54.8, 55.7, 68.1, 80.5, 82.7, 120.9, 126.3, 128.2, 128.8, 142.6, 145.2, 160.0, 162.7, 173.4, 175.8. Analysis, Calculated for C3~H4~N307S: C, 62.08; H, 6.89; N, 7.01. Found: C, 62.23; H, 7.12; N, 7.39.
Compound 18: A solution of 20/1/1 TFA/H2O/mercaptoethanol (23.2 mL) was added to 1.27 g (2.11 mmol) of compound 17. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour and concentrated to a volume of about 3 mL. 50 mL of ether was added to precipitate the product. The resulting solid was washed with two more portions of ether and dried under vacuum to give 812 mg of solid. The solid was suspended in 10.6 mL of dioxane and 10.6 mL of H2O. NaHCO3 (355 mg, 4.22 mmol) was added to the mixture followed by a solution of 1.33 g (3.38 mmol)ofcompound 15in 10.5mLofdioxane. Themixturewasallowedtostirat room temperature for 20 hours and partitioned between 100 mL of lN HCI and 3 X 100 mL of CH2Cl2. The combined CH2Cl2 layers were dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated. Purification by silica gel chromatography (35 X
150 mrn; step gradient, 5195/1 MeOH/CH2CL2/HOAc (1 L) to 10/95/1). Pure fractions were concentrated and the residue was triturated with ether to give 881 mg (60%) of compound 1~ TLC Rf 0.59, 10/90/1 MeOH/CH2Cl2/HOAc; mp 116-117.5~C; IH NMR (CDC13) o 1.41 (s, 9H), 2.00 (m, 2H), 2.18 (m. 2H), 2.56 (m, lH), 2.69 (m, lH), 2.85 (m, 2H), 3.49 (m, 2H), 3.62 (m, 2H), 3.85 (m, 2H), 4.08 (m, lH), 4.12 (m, lH), 4.22 (t, lH), 4.38 (m, lH), 4.49 (m, 2H), 4.61 (m, 2H), 7.78 (d, bd s, lH), 6.12 (bd s, lH), 6.43 (bd s, lH3, 7.35 (d, 2H), 7.40 (d, SUBSTllUrE SHEEr ff'(ULE 26) 2H), 7.61 (d, 2H), 7.78 (d, 2h); 13C NMR (CDCL3) o 25.3, 27.8, 28.6, 29.4, 32.6,35.1, 44.1, 46.9, 47.3, 52.2, 53.9, 61.2, 67.8, 80.8, 120.8, 125.7~ 128.2, 129.0, 142.0, 144.5, 157.6, 157.8, 170.6, 181.2, 182.9, 183.1. Analytical, Calculated for C34H43NsO9S: C, 58.52; H, 6.21; N, 10.03. Found: C, 58.38, H, 6.17; N, 10.20.
S F f FmocHN ~~ ~ F
CH3 ~ F F
c~O Fmoc~N ~ N~
H HBr N~Ht~O~ CO2H
HOBtll~MF (66%) 10a-rnethyl proline 19 N-FMOC-L-Alanyl-L-2-metllylprolin~? co~o--n~ 19: A solution of 2-methylproline (Seebach et al. (1983) JAm. Chem. Soc. 105:5390-5398) (1.00 g5 4.76 mmol), 4.00 g (47.6 mmol) of NaHCO3, and 31 mg (0.23 mmol) of HOBT in 6.9 mL of DMF was cooled to 0~C and 3.18 g (6.66 mmol) of N-FMOC-L-alanine was added. The ~ ~ction was stirred for 1 hour at 0~C, then at room temperature for 18 hours. The mixture was partitioned between 50 mL of EtOAc and 3 X
50 mL of lN HCI. The EtOAc layer was dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated. Purification by silica gel chromatography (step gradient 45/55/1 EtOAc/Hexane/HOAc to 47/53/1 EtOAc/Hexane/HOAc to 50/50/1 EtOAc/Hexane/HOAc) gave 1.72 g (86%) of compound 19 as a white solid. The product was concentrated several times from dioxane to remove traces of acetic acid: mp 59-60~C; IH NMR (CDC13) ~ 1.39(d, 3H), 1.93 (m, 2H), 2.06 (m, 2H), 3.78 (m, 2H), 4.22 (m, lH), 4.40 (d, 2H), 4.56 (m, lH), 5.09 (t, lH)5 5.69 (d, lH), 7.32 (t, 2H), 7.42 (t, 2H), 7.62 (d, 2H), 7.78 (d, 2H); 13C NMR (CDCl3) ~ 17.8, 21.8, 23.8, 37.9, 47.1, 48.5, 65.9, 67.0, 120.0, 125.1, 127. 1, 127.7, 141.3, 144.1, 155.6, 172.9, 175.1.
N-FMOC-L-T eucinyl-HMPF~-~RHA resin: A solution of N-FMOC-L-leucine in 22.5 mL of CH2C12 and a few drops of DMF was prepared and cooled to 0~C. To SUBS~lIUlE SHEEI ffWLE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 Wo 97/46251 PCT/US97/10075 the solution was added 1.71 ml (1.38 g, 10.9 mmol) of diisopropylcarbodiimide (DIC) and the mixture was stirred for 20 minutes at 0~C. The mixture was concentrated to an oil; meanwhile, enough DMF approximately 3 mL) was added to 2.5 g (0.87 mmol/g, 2.18 mmol) HMPB-MBHA resin (Nova Biochem) to swell the resin. The concentrated oil was dissolved in a minim~l amount of DMF
(approximately 1 mL) and added to the swelled resin followed by a solution of 266 mg (2.18 mmol) of DMAP dissolved in approximately 1 mL of DMF. The mixture was gently rocked for 1 hour and washed (2 X DMF, 2 X MeOH, 2 X
DMF, 2 X MeOH). The resin was dried under vacuum to give 2.77 g (85%) and the substitution was determined by the Geisen test to be 0.540 mmol/g.
N-FMOC-linear peptide with t-butyl ester on aspartic acid ;~n~l Pmc ~roup on ar~inine and with thioether in~ert~ compound~Q: This peptide was prepared by standard FMOC synthesis on N-FMOC-L-leucinyl-HMPb-MBRA resin. Three equivalents of amino acid HOBT and (DIC) were used for each coupling step with the exception of the coupling step of compound 18. Two equivalents of compound 18 were used with three equivalents of HOBT and diisopropy}carbodiimide. Each step was monitored by using 10 ~L of bromophenol blue indicator. Completeness of the reaction was also assessed with a ninhydrin test (beads turn blue for incomplete reaction with 1 mg is heated at1 00~C for 2 minutes with one drop of pyridine and one drop of 5% ninhydrin in EtOH and one drop of 80% phenolin EtOH). Thus, 1.13 mg (0.613 mmol) of resin was used to prepare the peptide. After the final coupling step, cleava~e from the resin was accomplished by treatment with 15 mL of a solution of 1%
trifluoroacetic acid in CH2C12 for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes, the solution was filtered under pressure into 30 mL of 10% pyridine in MeOH. This was repeated ten times and the filtrates which contained peptide as evidenced by HPLC (C18, ~radient, 60/40/0.1 CH3CH/H20/TFA to 90/10/0.1 CH3CN/H201TFA, 210 mn, 1 mL/min, 4.6 mm X 250 mm column) were combined and concentrated. The SUBSrllUTE SHEEr (I'~ULE 26) - CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 97/46251 PCT~US97tlOO75 concentrate was dissolved in 40 mL of 10% HOAc solution and purified by HPLC
to give 0.528 g (49%) of peptide ~.
Conversion of peptide 20 to cyclic peptide 21 (removal of FMOC ~roup cyclization and removal of protecti~ grou~s: A solution (5 mL) of 99 ~lL of DBU in 10 mL of CH3CN was added to 96 mg (0.052 mmol) of peptide ~Q. The solution was stirred for I hour and concentrated to a residue. The residue was triturated with 2 X 10 mL of Et2O to give a white solid. The solid was dissolvedin 100 mL of CH3CN and 312 IlL (0-312 mmol) of 0. I M solution of diphenylphosphorylazide (DPPA) in CH3CN. The mixture was stirred for 20 hours and concentrated on a rotary evaporator. The residue was triturated with 2 X 50 ml of Et20 and the white opaque residue was treated with 5 mL of 9213I213 TFA/anisole/EDT/Me~S for I hour. The product was precipitated by adding the mixture to 40 mL of Et2O in a 50 mL polypropylene centrifuge tube.
The precipitate was cooled to 0~C and centrifuged for S minutes at 2000 rpm. Thesupernatant was decanted and the pellet was washed with Et2O and recentrifuged.
The pellet was dried and dissolved in 4 mL of 50/50 CH3CN/H2O. The mixture was diluted with 36 mL of H2O/0.1 % TFA, filtered and purified by HPLC (1 " C 18column, gradient, 10/90/0/l CH3CN/H20/TFA to 35/65/0.1 CH3CN/H20/TFA.
230 nm). The pure fractions, as evidenced by HPLC, were Iyophilized to give 52 mg (90%) of compound 21.
S~BSmUrE SffEEr ~nE 26) CA 02256449 l998-ll-23 W O 97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 . 87 Example 13: Synthesis of conju~ates of LJP 685 H2N~-P-COHN ~ CH~S ~ CONH2 CO NH
I~N-l-L-L-A-p~ D-R-co 21 (LJP 6~5) O
Hs~)~HN~-p-coHN~--CH~S CONH2 ~ ~) TrscH2cH2co2pNp --1~ EtJNlDMF 2~TFA~cH2c~ aphen 2 2 CO'NH 2)TFA/CH2CI21thiophenol H~-L-L-A-p~-D-R- CO
HS O O O ~
HN-~P-COHNf CH2-S ~CONH2 HN-I-L~-P~b~R-co O H
t\o O t'l H ~S~ff2CH2CONH-peptide \ 2 ~ N~~~N~S CH2CH2CON~peptid~ -O H
2 5 ~ p~ptid~ = a JP 6~5~
O O 11 N HH N~\o NH~epcde 2 \ N~f~~'' ~S O O~O NH-peptide O H \~
26 pepLide = (I JP 6a5) SUBS~llUlE SHEr ~ULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 WO 97/46251 PCT~US97110075 LJP 685, also referred to as compound 21, was treated with the PNP ester of 3-tritylmercaptopropionic acid and the resulting product was detritylated to give compound ~, the peptide with the free thiol linker. Reaction of an excess of compound ~ with valency platform molecule 12 produced tetravalent conjugate ~. Treatment of compound 21 with the longer linker, compound 33 (see reaction scheme below), followed by detritylation, gave compound ~. Compound 24 reacted with valency platform molecule 12 to give the tetraconjugate 2~. Both conjugation reactions appeared very clean by HPLC.
Attachment of MTU linker to LJP 685. synthesis of compound 24: To 15 mg.(0.013 mmol) of compound 21 was added 160 IlL of a solution of 29.5 mg of compound 23 and 17.5 ~L of diisopropylethylamine in 0.5 mI, of DMF. The mixture was stirred for 2 hours and precipitated from Et2O. The precipitate was dried and dissolved in 650 ~L of a solution of 1/1/0.056/0.040 TFA/CH2CI2/thiophenol/Me2S and the solution was allowed to stand for I hour.
Precipitation from Et20 gave crude compound ~L which was purified by HPLC
(Cl8,15-45% CH3CN/H2O, 0.1% TFA). Fractions Cont~ining pure product were Iyophilized to give 8.6 mg of compound 24 as a white solid.
LJP 685-MTU-AHAB-TEG~ compound 26: To a solution of 8.6 mg (6.3 X 10 6 mol) of compound 24 in 630 ~L of He sparged pH 8.5 200 mM borate buffer was 40 ~lL of a 40 mg/mL solution of compound 12 in 9/1 MeOH/H20. The mixture was stirred for 24 hours and I mL of 10% HOAc/H2O solution was added. The mixture was purified ~y HPLC (C~8, gradient 25-55% CH3CN/H20, 0.1% TFA) to give 8.3 mg of compound 26 (LJP 685-MTU-AHAB-TEG).
Example 14: Development of extended SH linkers The thiobenzoate ester, compound 28, was prepared from compound 27.
Compound 28 was converted to compound ~ in portions. The thiobenzoate was SUBSTllUrE SHEET ~WLE 26) .
. . .
removed by ethanolysis and the resulting thiol was tritylated. The ethyl ester was then hydrolyzed to give compound 29. The nitrophenyl phosphate (PNP) ester, - compound 30, was ~ p~d from compound 29. Aminotrioxoudecanoicacid ethylester, compound 3 1, was ~Ic~ud~ed by treatment of compound ~ Z with sodium azide and reduction to the amine. Amine 3-1 was acylated with cornpound 3-0 to prbvide compound 32. Hydrolysis of compound 32 was achieved by tre~tmPnt with sodium hydroxide to give a free carboxylic acid. The intermediate carboxylic acid was con-l~Pn~e~l with p-nitrophenol to give para-nitrophenyl (PNP) ester, compound 33. Linker 33 was attached to the peptide and the trityl group removed to give compound 34, which was used to produce an MTU-ATU-AHAB-TEG conjugate.
a o o o-cf1,ca ~ D9U ~8 O O O-CH2CO2R
27 2~ 1) N-OEUEtOH
2t ~
~ , 3)~4ROt~, TrS O O O-CH~CO2PNP ~ ./~
TrS O O O--a~2Co~H
1) N,N~Mfl~2~~
a o o o-~2co2E~ 2) Il~ C ~ C/ 0 3-a~ ,B
~0 , r ~4 TrS o O o HN O O O-c1~2co2E
I) N~OH 2 EIOH
__ ~ ; 2) f . ~L ~
TrS O O O ~ O O O-CH2CO2PNP
H~ O O O ~N O O o-CH2CONH-G-P.COHN --CH2-5 ~CONH2 tl~l~-~-/~-D-R CO
SUBST TU~E SHEEr ~n~ 26) CA 02256449 199~ -11- 23 rCT/11S97/tO075 WO g7146251 Example 15: Synthesi~ of a (I lp68s~4/~Tu-ATl~-AHAB-TEG CoF~ t~
co~ollnd 35 Tetravalent conjugate 3~ was prepared as shown below. The peptide with - ~ linkers attached, compound 34 was dissolved in ~e sparged, p~ 8.~, 200 ni~ borate buffer To the mixture was added 0.3 mo~ e~uivalents of platform compound 1-2.
~he mixture was stirred for I hour and the product was purified by HPLC.
~~~o~~or~4~N~~ ~ o~C~2C~NIt G P --r CONff2 HN-l~-L A-P~e-D R CO
34 ~ 12 R~S O O O ~l~l O O O-CH2CONH-G P COHN--~-- 2 S~CQN~) 3 5 ffN-t~ L~ P~e~l}R~o Fc = O , ~N~J
H O
Example 16: Synthesi~ of a (l~lP685~lll)ARA-PEG conju~ate compollnd 36 Treatment of IA-DABA-PEG with compound ~ in ~.5 borate buffer gave conjugate 36 O
t~S 24 t\of\oio~N--N~ ~ Pep=WP685 IA-D~BA-P~G HN~I O
~0 0~~--~ Pe,c ~\~ --N~
HN~S o~0 0--SUBS~T~ SHEr ~E26) . , . , . _ .. .. . .
CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 wo 97/46251 PCT/US97/10075 91 '' Example 17: T cell assay for activation Tritiated thymidine uptal~e by peptide-stimulated T cells was monitored in 96well round bottom plates. A single-cell suspension of draining Iymph node cells (mice) or isolated peripheral blood Iymphocytes (human), 5 x 105 were mixed with between I and 30 jig of peptide in a final volume of 150 ,uL per welland incubated for 5 days at 37~C in 5% C02. At that point, I micro curie of labeled thymidine was added and incubated for an additional 15-24 hours. The harvested cells were collected on filters and counted by liquid scintillation spectrometry.
Example 18: In vitro induction of tolerance Eight groups~ each cont~ining five C57Bl/6 mice, were primed with 10 ~lg/mouse of a conjugate of LJP685-KLH on alum plus B. pertussis vaccine as an adjuvant. After three weeks~ spleen were harvested and single cells suspensions were prepared, washed three times with balanced salt solution and resuspended in complete RPMI-1640 medium at a concentration equivalent to one spleen/1.5 mL of medium. The cell suspension was divided into aliquots of 2.5 mL /petri dish and incubated for 2 hours at 37~C with (LJP685)4-DABA-PEG, compound 36, and (LJP685)4-TEG~ compound 35, in concentrations of 100 ~M, 20 !lM and 4 IlM. One group of cells was incubated without toleragen and acted as the positive control. The cells were then washed with large volumes of balanced salt solution and resuspended in 2.5 mL of b~l~nced salt solution. The cells were then injected into 650R irradiated syngeneic recipient mice in such amanner that all of the cells from a given treatment group were divided evenly into five recipients. All of the recipient mice, including the positive controls, were then given a booster imrnunization of 10 ~lg of LJP 685-KLH in saline, intraperitoneally. Seven days after the booster immunization, the mice were bledand their sera tested for the presence of anti-LJP 685 antibody. Treatment with either conjugate produced a significant, dose-dependent reduction of anti-LJP 685 SUBSll~ SffEEr (P(llL~ 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 antibodies as shown in Figures 16 and 17, which is measured by Antigen Binding Capacity (ABC) as described in Iverson, G.M., "Assay for in vivo adoptive imrnune responses," in HANDBOOK OF EXPERIMENTAL IMMUNOLOGY, Volume 2, Cellular Immunology ~Weir, D.M., ed., Blackwell Scientific S Publications, Palo Alto, CA, 1986).
Example 19: NMR solution structure ~n~lysis of the SA12. CB2 ~nll 3G3 peptides Two peptides isolated from pliage library screens using the methodology 0 described in the examples above were subjected to NMR analysis. The original peptide has a proline in the second to last position. however, this amino acid was removed since two dimensional (2D) double quantum filtered correlated spectroscopy (DQF-COSY) NMR data suggested the presence of two different structures from the Ci5' and trans isomers at this position. Removal of the proline gave peptides with KD'S in the 50-100 nM range for binding to ACA antibodies, and the expected number of peaks in the fingerprint region of the DQF-COSY
spectrum. The resulting cyclic peptides are SA12 (GPCLILAPDRCG) AND CB2 (GPCILLARDRCG). The major difference between the peptides was the substitution of arginine for proline at position 8 which resulted in much less 2() dispersion in the ID IH NMR spectnun of CB2 which was consistent with SA12 being a more rigid peptide. The arginine substitution also produces a 0.55 kcal/mol stabilization of the ionized aspartyl carboxy group as reflected in pKa values. A structural analysis was carried out on the more ordered SA12 peptide. Although deuterium exchange and tempelaLure coefficient data show no evidence of hydrogen bonding, the Nuclear Overhauser Effect (NOE), Rotating Overhauser Effect (ROE) and coupling data are consistent with one structure.
Distance geometry calculations yielded a family of 50 structures. The 15 best had a mean root mean square deviation (RMSD) for all atoms of 2.1 + 0.2 angstroms.
We determined that the peptide has an oval shape with turns at opposite ends of the molecule, at the disulfide and at Proline 8 which is cis. There is also a kink in SUBSTI~Ul E SHEEr (RlllE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 -wO 97/46251 PCT/US97/10075 93 ~ -the backbone LIL region. Finally, the carboxy terminal glycine is very mobile asit is the only residue with a positive intraresidue NOE. This represents the first structural infon-nation determined about a peptide that mimics the ACA epitope on ,B2-GPI.
NMR data coupled with distance geometry calculations were used to determine the three dimensional structure of peptide 925 (CLGVLAKLC), a truncated version of peptide 3 G3 (AGP CLGVLGKLCPG) with alanine substituted for glycine in position 6 of the 925 peptide. The structure of peptide 925 was detenriined in water at pH 3.8 and at 25~C. An ensemble of nine l 0 structures were calculated all of which were consistent with the NMR data. The RMSD for all non-hydrogen atoms was 2.45 + 0.36 angstroms when each structure was compared to the centroid. Figure 18 displays the structure closest to the centrold of the ensemble and, therefore, is a reasonable representation of the shape of the peptide 925 molecule. Figure 19 compares the structure of peptide 925 (labeled at the bottom of the figure as 3G3) with the structure of peptide 5Al2.
Both peptides have turns at approximately the same positions in the peptide sequence.
The pharmaeophore of the peptides has been tentatively identified as a small hydrophobic group and a positively charged group. The gem-dimethyl and amino groups of peptide 925 are tentatively identified as the pharmaeophore of this peptide as shown in Figure 20. The hydrocarbon linkers that tether the pharmacophore groups to some scaffold have the lengths specified in Figure 20 and the points at which these linkers are attached to the scaffold are separated by the distance specified. Finally, the dihedral angle defining the relative orientation of the two linkers was determined to be 22~.
SUBSlTlUlE SffEEr ~lJLE 26) , ..
W O 97/46251PCT~US97/10075 .
Example 20: Synthesis of TFG carbamate linker Cl~/~o~O~O~
fBuSH, DBU
~ (99% ) t~US~o~~~ OH
CICOO ~NO2, Pyr.
O
BuS O ~~ o~o~NO2 2-[2-(2-tert-Butylthioethoxj~)ethoxy]ethanol. com~ound 38: To a mixture of 2-[2-(2-chloroethoxy)ethoxy]ethanol (11.0 g, 65.24 mmol) and tert-butylthiol (7.35 mL, 65.23 mrnol) cooled in an ice bath was slowly added 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.40]undec-7-ene ~DBU, 9.75 mL, 65.23 mmol). The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room termperature and stirred overnight. This mixture was then diluted with ethyl acetate and filtered. The crude product in the - filtrate was purified on a filter colurnn eluted with ethyl acetate to give yellowish oil (14.4 g, 64.6 mmol, 99%): lH NMR (300 Mhz, CDCI3): d 3.73 (br s, 2H), 3.69-3.60 (m, 8H, 2.75 (t, J= 7.4, 2H), 2.62 (br s, lH), 1.32 (s, 9H); 13C NMR
(75 Mhz, CDC13): d 72.47, 71.08, 70.33, 70.27, 61.71, 42.09, 30.95, 27.87; MS
(ESI): m/e (M+l) Calcd. for CloH23O3S: 223, obsd.: 223.
SVBSllTUrE SHEEr ~WE 26) , CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 wo 97/46251 PCT/US97/10075 2-~2-(2-tert-Butylthioethoxy)ethoxy]ethyl p-nitrophenyl carbonate, compound 39:
To a solution of compound 38 (2.0 g, 8.98 mmol) and p-nitrophenol chloroforrnate (1.81 g, 8.98 mmol) in 5 mL of dry THF cooled in an ice bath was slowly added dry pyridine (0.73 mL, 8.98 mmol) in 1 mL of dry THF. White S precipitate came out imrnediately. After stirred at room temperature for 15 min, the reaction mixture was diluted with 10 mL of ether and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated and used directly in the peptide synthesis without further purlficatlon.
Example 21: Synthesis of the Tetravalent Platform IA/DAB~/ATEG. 46.
Bis-N-(t-butoxycarbonyl)-diaminoben70ic acid. corr~ound 40: A solution of 7.18 g (32.9 mmol of di-t-butyldicarbonate in 5.5 mL of MeOH was slowly added to a solution of 2.5 g (16.4 mmol) of 3,5-diaminobenzoic acid :~nd 2.76 g (32.9 mmol)of NaHCO3 in 44.5 mL of H20 and 22.5 mL of MeOH, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 24 h. The mixture was cooled to 0~, and 6.53 g of citric acid was added, and the mixture was extracted with EtOAc. The combined EtOAc layers were dried (MgS04), filtered, and concentrated. The residue was dissolved in 40 mL of Et,O and the solution was filtered through Celite. The Et20 layer was extracted with two 40 mL portions of HCl. The Et20 layer was dried (MgSO4), filtered, and concentrated to give 3.81 g (66%) of 40 as a foamy pink solid.
N-hydroxysuccinimidyl ester of co~r~ound 40. comround 41:
Dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (3.34 g, 16.2 mmol) was added to a solution of 3.8 g (10. 8 mmol) of compound 40 and 1.24 g (10.8 mrnol) of N-hydroxysuccinimide in 55 mL of EtOAc which had been cooled to 0~, and the resulting mixture was stirred for 18 h allowing to come to room t~ p~ldL~re. To the mixture was added 0.55 mL of acetic acid. The mixture was stirred for 30 min and placed in the freezer for 2 h. The mixture was filtered to remove solids, and the filtrate was SUBSllTUlE SHEr ff~ E 26) ~-CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 concentrated to give 5.80 g of pink foamy solid. Purification by silica gel chromatography (60/40/1 hexane/EtOAc/HOAc) gave 4.30 g (89%) of compound 41 as a slightly pink solid.
Mono-N-(t-butoxycarbonyl)-ethylene~liAmine. compound 42: A solution of 1.5 g (25.0 mmol) of ethylene~ mine in 15 mL of CH2CI2 was cooled to 0~, and a solution of 1.82 g (8.33 mmol) of di-t-butyldicarbonate was added slowly to the mixture. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 h and filtered, and the filtrate was concentrated. Purification by silica gel chromatography (90/10/1 CH2CI2/MeOH/HOAc) gave 0.98 g (67%) of compound 42 as an oil.
Bis- N-(t-butoxycarbonvl)-~mino-TFG. compound 43: To a solution of 750 mg (4.25 mmol) compound 42 and 345 uL (337 mg, 4.25 mmol) of pyridine in 6 mL
of CH2CI was added 445 uL (559 mg, 2.02 mmol) of triethyleneglycol bis-chloroforrnate. The mixture was stirred for 3.5 h, and the mixture was partitioned between 35 mL of CH2CI2 and 35 mL of I N HCI. The CH2CI2 layer was washed with H2O? dried (Na,SO4), filtered and concentrated to give I .14 g of crude compound 43 which was used directly in the next step.
Diamino-TEG bis-tr;fluoroacetate salt~ compound 44: 300 mg (0.57 mmol) of compound 43 was dissolved in 3.5 g of CH2Cl2, and 3.5 mL of trifluoroacetic acidwas added. The mixture was stirred for 3 h at room temperature, and the solutionwas concentrated to give 398 mg of crude compound 44 which was used directly in the next step.
Compound 45: A solution of 567 mg of compound 41 in 6 mL of dioxane was added to a solution of 398 mg of crude, compound 44 (est. 316 mg, 0.57 mmol) and 193 mg (2.30 mmol) of NaHCO3. The mixture was stirred for 3 h and acidified with I N HCI and partitioned between 20 mL of I N HCI and 30 mL of EtOAc. The combined EtOAc layers are washed with sat NAHCO3 solution, SUBSllIUI E SHEEr ffWlE 26) - CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 97/462~1 PCT~US97/10075 dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated to give 490 mg (86%) of crude compound 45 as a white foamy solid. Purification by silica gel chromatography (EtOAc) gave 276 mg (48%) of compound ~ as a white foamy solid.
IA/DABAIATFG. Con~l?o~lnd 46: A solution of 100 mg (0.1 mmol) of compound 45 was prepared, and I mL of trifluoroacetic acid was added, and the mixture wasstirred for I h at room temperature. The mixture was concentrated under vacuum.
The residue was triturated with Et2O and dried under vacuum to give a white crystalline solid. The solid was dissolved in I mL of DMF, 104 uL (77 mg, 0.6 mmol) of diisopropylethylamine was added, the mixture was cooled to 0~, and 212 mg (0.6 mmol) of iodoacetic anhydride was added. The ice bath was removed, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h. The mixture .
was cooled to 0~, acidified with I N H2SO4, and partitioned between 10 mL of I N H2SO4 and 6 X 20 mL portions of 8/2 CH2CI2/MeOH. The combined organic layers were dried (MgS04), filtered, and concentrated to give 330 mg of orange oil. Purification by pl~.ai~tive HPLC (25 cm X 22.4 mm C~g, gradient: 30%B to 40%B 0-40 min, A = H2O/0. 1% TFA, B = CH3CN/0. 1% TFA, 12 mL/min) gave I g mg of compound 46 as a white solid.
SUBSmUrE SHEEr ~UlE 2B) NH2 (BOC)20 NHBOC NHS NHBOC O
40 ~ 41 O O
3,5-diaminobenzoic acid NH2~ NH2 (BOC)20 NH2~ --NHBOC
ethylenediamineCH2CI2 42 ¦ triethyleneglycol bis-chloroformate ~ pyridine/CH2CI2 NH o ~ i 2 CH2CI2 BOCNH N ~ r~
Compound 2 NaHC03 dioxane/H20 1)TFA
B OC N H ~ N ~ N ~ o~L2 I C H2 CO H N ~[~ ~ N ' ' ~ ~1L2 2) iodoacelic-NHBOC -- anhydride ICH2COHN 46 (IA/DABA/ATEG) DIPE~DMF
Example 22: Synthesi~ ofthe Tetravalent Platfonn BA/PABA/DTITFG. 51.
N-(t-butoxycarbonyl)PARA~ compound 47: A solution was prepared of 3.0 g(21.9 mmol) of p-aminobenzoic acid in 60 mL of H2O. Na2CO3 (2.16 g, 25.7 SUBSrllUrE SHET (RUlE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 97/46251 PCT~US97/10075 mmol) was added slowly followed by 30 mL of MeOH. When all solids were dissolved. a solution of 4.77 g (21.9 mmol) of di-t-butyldicarbonate in 10 mL ofMeOH was added and the mixture was stirred at room telllpeld~ure for 18 h. To the mixture was added 4.92 g (25.6 mmol) of citric acid and the resulting cloudyS mixture was partitioned between 200 mL of H2O and 200 mL of EtOAc. The EtOAc layer was washed successively with 200 mL of 0.1 N HCI and 200 mL of H20, dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated to yield 3.0 g (58%) of compound47 as a white solid.
N-(t-butoxycarbonyl)P~BA N-hydroxysuccinimidyl ester~ compound 48: DCC
(2.61 g, 12.6 mrnol) was added to a 0~ solution of 2.0 g (8.43 mmol) of compound47 and 0.97 g (8.43 mrnol) of N-hydroxysuccinimide in 5(~ mL of EtOAc. The ice bath was removed, the mixture was stirred, for 16 h at room temperature, and 0.5 mL of acetic acid was added. The mixture was stirred for an additional 30 l S min, placed in the freezer for l .S h, filtered, and concentrated to give 3.75 g of crude 48. Purification by silica gel chromatography (50/50 hexane/EtOAc) gave 2.53 g (90%) of compound 48 as a white solid.
Compound 49: A solution of 3.00 g (8.97 mmol) of compound 48 in 50 mL Of CH2CI2 was added dropwise over 30 min to a solution of 485 uL (4.49 mmol) of diethylenetriamine in 30 uL of CH2CI2 which had been cooled in an ice bath. The mixture was stirred at 5-7~ for 30 min then at-room temperature for 16 h. The milky mixture was placed in a separatory funnel with 200 mL of H20, the pH of the H2O layer was adjusted to 10 with 3 M NaOH solution, and the mixture was extracted with 200 mL of 4/1 CH3Cl/MeOH. The organic phase was dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated to give 0.971 g (40%) of compound 49 which was pure enough to be used in the following step. The aqueous layer was extracted with six 100 mL portions of 4/1 CH3CI/MeOH. The organic layers were combined, dried (Na,SO4), and concentrated to give another 1.08 g (44%) of compound 49 which required further purification. Further purification can be SUBSrllUrE SHEEr ff'~ULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 W O 97/46251 PCT~US97/10075 accomplished by silica gel chromatography (gradient~ 80/20 to 70/30 CH3CI/MeOH).
Compollnd 50: A solution of 135 uL (0.66 mmol) of triethyleneglycol bis-chloroformate in 0.3 mL of THF was added to a 0~ solution of 855 mg ~1.58 mmol) of compound 49 and 275 uL (1. mmol) of diisopropylethylamine in 13 mL
of THF. The cloudy mixture cleared when the ice bath was removed. An additional 70 uL of dilsopropyethylamine was added to m~int~in a basic pH. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for a total of 3 h and partitioned between 25 mL of H2O and 25 mL of EtOAc. The aqueous layer was extracted with a second 25 mL portion of EtOAc, and the combined EtOAc layers were dried (Na2CO3), filtered, and concentrated to give 0.986 g of crude 50. Purification by silica gel chromatography (80/4/16 CH3CI/dioxane/isopropanol) gave 516 mg (61%) of compound 50 as a white solid.
P,e~a.d~ion of BA/PABA/DT/TEG. compound 51: Compound 50 (487 mg, 8.79 mmol) was dissolved in 9 mL of CH2Cl2 and 5 mL of trifluoroacetic acid.
The mixture was stirred for 1.5 h and concentrated. The residue was triturated with 7 mL of Et2O, and dissolved in 5 mL of MeOH and 1 mL of 48% HBr solution. The mixture was concentrated and placed under vacuum until a dry.
The resulting HBr salt was dissolved in 10 mL of H2O, and 191 mg (2.27 mmol) of NaHCO3 was added. A solution of 591 mg (2.27 mmol) of bromoacetic anhydride in 10 mL dioxane was added to the mixture. An additional 2 mL of dioxane was used to rinse. More NaHCO3 was added as needed to m~int~in a basic pH. The mixture was stirred for 2 h at room temperature, and acidifiéd with I N H2SO4. The mixture was extracted with 3 X 25 mL of ~tOAc. The combined EtOAc layers were dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated to give 773 mg of an oil. Purification was accomplished by silica gel chromatography (gradient~
90/10 to 85/15 CH3CI/MeOH) to give 401 mg (77%) of 51 as a white solid.
SUBSTlTUlE SHEEI- ~WI~ 26) W O 97/46251 PCT~US97/10075 (BOC)20 O MeOH/H2o ~ 0 H2N ~ OH Na2CO3 BOCH N ~~' OH
4-aminobenzoic acid 47 NHS
DCC
EtOAc /=\ 11 diethylenetriamine BOCHN~ ~ ~ CH2C12 0 ~_ H N - H ~ BOCHN~O-N~
BOCHN~ N J
triethyleneglycol bis-chloroformate ~ Et3N/THF
BOCHN~ N ~10 1) TFAJCH2CI2 BrCH2COHN~ H ~\ ~ '~
H ~7/2 H NuO o7'2 BOCHN~, H J BrCH2COHN~ N J
0 50 2) bromoacetic anhydride ~
NaHCO3 51 (BAIPABA/DT/TEG) dloxane/H2~
Example 23: Synthesis of the Tetravalent Platform BMP/TEG. 55.
Dimethyl-5-bydroxyisophth~l~t~. compound 52: A solution of 2.00 g (11 mmol) of 5-hydroxylsophthatic acid and 0.5 mL of con HCI in 30 mL of MeOH was refluxed for 5 h. The mixture was concentrated and the resulting residue was disso~ved in 100 mL of EtOAc. The EtOAc solution was washed successivel~
with two 50 mL portions of 5% NaHCO3 solution two 50 mL portions of sat NaCI
solution, dried (Na2CO3), filtered, and concentrated to give 2.09 g (90%) of 52 as a white crystalline solid.
Compound 53: Triethyleneglycol ditosylate 546 mg (1.19 mmol) was added to a suspension of 500 mg (2.38 mmol) of compound 52 and 395 mg (2.86 mmol) of K2CO3 in 11 mL of CH3CN and the mixture was refluxed under N2 for 16 h. The mixture was concentrated, alld the residue was dissolved in 25 mL of CHCI3 and washed with 25 mL of H2O and 25 mL of sat NaCI solution. The CHCl3 layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated. Purification by silica gel chromatography (gradient, 50/50 hexane/EtOAc to 100% EtOAc) gave 93 mg (41 %) of compound 53.
SUBSlllUrE SHEE~ ff'lUlE 26) - CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 Compound 54: A suspension of 93 mg (0.18 mmol) of compound 53 in 4 mL of THF was stirred under a N2 atmosphere while 1.82 mL(1.82 mmol) of a I M
solution of LiBHEt3 was added to the mixture dropwise. A clear solution was obtained which was stirred for 18 I~, ~t which time 10% solution of HOAc in water was added until the pH was acidic. The mixture was concentrated under vacuum and the residue was dissolved in 10 mL of water. The mixture was extracted witl 3 X 10 mL portions of EtOAc, and the combined EtOAc layers were dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated. Purification was accomplished by silica gelchromatography (gradient, 90/10 to 85/15 CH3CI/MeOH) to give 20 mg (27%) of 54 as a white solid.
Cornpound 55: To a suspension of 20 mg (0.048 mmol) of 54 in 5 mL of Et,O
and I mL of THF is added 9.6 uL (0.1 mmol) of PBr3. The mixture is stirred for 3 h and partitioned between and EtOAc. The EtOAc layer is dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated, and the residue is purified by silica gel chromatograph~
(CH3CI/MeOH) to pro~ide compound 55.
HO2C HCOH MeO2C
~ OH > ~OH
HO2C MeO2C 52 5-hydroxyisophthalic acid K2Co3/CH3CN
r\~
TosO O/ 2 HO~_ LiBHFt3 M c~ 53 PBr TH~/Et20 Br~
~O/ \Or/2 Br 55. fBMP/TEG) SUBSllTUl E SHEEr (P((ILE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 97/46251 PCT~US97110075 Example 24: Synthesis of the Telravalent Platfo~n BA/P17/~DA/TF.G. 60.
Compound 56 To a solution of 1.02 g (4.37 mmol) of N-(t-butoxycarbonyl)-iminodiacetic acid (compound 5 in U.S. 5,552,391, Chemically-Defined Non-Polymeric Valency Platform Molecu!es and Conjugates Thereof) and 1.01 g (8.75 mmol) of N-hydroxysuccinimide in 50 mL of dry THF. cooled to 0~, was added 2.26 g (10.94 mmol) of dicyclohexylcarbodiimide. The mixture was stirred for 16 h allowing to slowly warrn to room temperature, and a solution of 2.22 g ( 10.1 mmol) of mono-CBZ-piperazine in 25 mL of THF was added to the mixture followed by 1.22 mL (887 mg, 8.75 rnmol) of Et3N. The mixture was stirred for 7 h at room temperature, filtered. The filtrate was concentrated and the residuewas dissolved in 125 mL of EtOAc and shaken with 2 X 125 mL portions of I N
HCI, 125 mL of sat NaHCO3 solution, dried (MgSO4 filtered, and concentrated to give 2.39 g of a sticky solid. Purification by silica gel chromatography (95/J
CH2CI~/MeOH) gave 1.85 g (66%) of 56.
Compound 57: To a solution of 1.74 g (2.74 mmol) of compound 56 in 10 mL of CH2CI2 was added 10 mL of trifluoroacetic acid, and the mixture was stirred for 3 h at room te,llpe,~ re. mixture was concentrated, and the residue was dissolved in 5 mL of CH2CI2. The mixture cooled to 0~ and 100 mL of sat NaHCO3 was added. The mixture was then extracted with four 100 mL portions of CH2CI2.
The CH2CI2 layers were combined, dried (MgS04), filtered, and concentrated to give 1.46 g (99%~ of 57 as a sticky hygroscopic solid which was used directly the next step.
- Con~ound 58: To a solution of 0.7 g (1.3 mmol) of compound 57 and 226 uL
( 168 mg~ 1.30 mmol) of diisopropylethylamine at 0~ was added a solution of 127 SUBSmUlE SHEEr ffWl E 2S) CA 022~6449 l998-ll-23 uL of triethyleneglycol biscmoroforinate in 4 mL of CH2CI2, and the ~ e was stirred for 3 h at room temperature. mixture was partitioned between 80 mL of CH2CI2 and 80 mL of I N HCI. The ~ 2 ~ layer was washed with two 80 mL
portions of water, dried (MgSO4), filtered, and concentrated to give 736 mg (93%) of compound 58 as a crystalline solid.
Compound 60: Compound 58 (61 mg, 0.48 mmol) was dissolved in 3 mL of 30%
HBr/HOAc and the resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for I h at which time 5 mL of Et2O added. The mixture was placed in the freezer for 1 h and centrifuged. The resulting pellet was washed with Et2O and dried to give thetetralaydrobromide salt 59 which was dissolved in 1 mL of H2O. To the mixture is added 49 mg (0.58 mmol) of NaHCO3 and 3 mL of dioxane. More NaHCO3 is added, if needed, to make the mixture basic. The mixture - i cooled to 0~, and 748 mg (2.89 mmol) of bromoacetic anhydride is added. The mixture is stirred for 2 h and partitioned between 20 mL of I N H2SO4 and 20 mL of 80/20 CH2CI2/MeOH. The organic layer is dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated to give crude 60 which is purified by silica gel chromatography (CH2CI2/MeOH) to ,~ive 60.
SUBSllTUrE SHEEr (RUI~ 26) CA 02256449 1998-ll-23 NCBZ N-BOC iminodiacetir~acid A ~
HN THF CBZN N~
mono-CBZ-piperazine ~ A NBOC
CBZN N~
\_/ 0 56 TFAICH2Cl2 ~rielhyleneglycol bis-o chloroformate/DlPEA O
CBZN N~ CH2CI2 CBZN N
I O l--r/
/_\ N ~ ~/ 2 ~ / \ îNH
CBZNJN~ CBZN N~
HBr acetic acid bromoacetic anhydride NaHC03 ~_~ o dloxane/H20 A ~
~/ ~N ~ Ol~Or/ 2 ~J ~ 0 1~ r/' HBr.HN N~ BrCH2CON N~
~ 59 60 (sAlplzllDAlTEG) Example 25: Synthesis of the Tetravalent Platform tetrakis-BATPI7/PMA. 63.
Compound 61: To a 0~ solution of 640 mg (2.52 mmol) of pyromellitic acid and 1.16 g (10.1 mmol) of N-hydroxysuccinimide in 50 mL of THF was added 2.6 g (12.6 mmol) of dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, and the mixture was allowed to come to room telllp~,dl-lre while stirring for 16 h. A solution of 2.5 g (11.3 mmol) of mono-CBZ-piperazine in 25 mL of THF was added to the mixture followed by 1 .4 mL (1.02 g, 10.1 mmol) of Et3N. The mixture-was filtered, and the filtrate was concentrated. The residue was partitioned between 100 mL of EtOAc and 2 X 100 mL of 1 N HCI, and the EtOAc layer was washed with 100 mL of sat NaHCO3, 100 mL of H2O, 100 mL of sat NaHCO3, dried (MgSO4;, filtered, and - 25 concentrated. Purification was accomplished by silica gel chromatography (97.5/2.5 CH2C1~/MeOH) to give 1.78 g (66%) of 63 as a white crystalline solid.
SUBSmUI E SHEr ~RUlE 26) W O 97/46251 PCT~US97110075 Compound 63: Compound 6 l is converted to compound 63 in essentially the same manner as described for the conversion of 58 to 60 in Example 23.
Purification is accomplished using silica gel chromatography.
HO2C,~ 02H DCC CBZHN N~N NCBZ
1 ,2,4,5-benzenetetracarboxylic acid 6 (pyrometlitic acid) HBr/HOAc bromoacetic anhydride HBr.HN N~ ~N N11.HBr NaHC03/diOxanelH2o A ~
HBr.HN N~N NH.HBr BrCH2CON N~N NCOCH2Br 62 BrCH2CON N N NCOCH2Br 63 (tetrakis-BA/PlZ/PMA) ~O
Example 26: Synthesis of the Tetravalent Platform 3A/PIZ/II)A/E~B/TEG 68.
Compound 64: Triethyleneglycol ditosylate (1.0 g, 2.18 mmol) was added to a solution o 725 mg (4.36 mmol) of ethyl 4-hydroxybenzoate and 723 mg (5.23 mmol) of K2CO3, and the mixture was refluxed for 16 h. The mixture was concentrated, and the residue was partitioned between 20 mL of water and 3 X
20 mL of Et2O. The combined organic layers were washed with 2 X 40 of sat NaHCO3 solution, 40 inL of sat NaCI solution. The aqueous layers were washed with Et2O, and the combined Et2O layers were dried (MgSO4), filtered, and concentrated. Purification by silica gel chromatography (70/30 hexanes/EtOAc) have 902 mg (93%) of 64 as a crystalline solid.
SUBSllTUlE SHEET ~UI,E 26) Compound 65: Compound 64 is dissolved in acetone cont~inine 2.2 equivalents of LiOH and mixture is stirred for 3 h (until complete as evidenced by TLC). Themixture is acidified with acetic acid and concentrated, and the residue is purified by silica gel chromatography to give 65.
Compound 66: Compound Ç~ is prepared similarly to the method of preparing compound 56 in example 23. Compound 65 is used instead of N-BOC-iminodiacetic acid? and compound 57 is used instead of mono-CBZ-piperazine.
Purification is accomplished using silica gel chromatography Compound 68: Compound 66 is converted to compound 68 in essentially the same marmer as described for the conversion of 58 to 60 in Example 23.
Purification is accomplished usin~ silica gel chromatography.
Ho2c acetone MeO2C
~_ A r/ ~ ~~ ~ ~/2 HO2C 69 MeO2C 53 NHS
DCC
THF
HN NCBZ
CBZN N ~ ~ HBr/HOAc HBr.HN N ~=~
~ <~0 2 ~ ~ ~~ ~ 2 CBZN N ~; 7Q HBr.HN N ~
bromoacetic anhydride ~" NaHCO3/dioxane/H20 ~ o BrCH2CON N ~=N A r/
~ ~o o/2 72 (BA/PIZIHIP/TE(~) BrCH2CON N~
SUBSllTUrE SHER ffWI~ 28) ---, CA 02256449 1998-ll-23 W O97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 Example 27: Synthesis of the Tetravalent Platfonn BA/PT7./HIP/TFG. 72.
Compound 69: Compound 53 is hydrolyzed with LiOH in essentially the same manner as described for the hydrolysis of 64 in example 25 with the exception that 4.4 equivalents of LiOH is used.
Comr~o~nd 70: The tetra-acid, compound 69, is converted to compound 70 in - essenti~lly the same manner as described for the conversion of pyromellitic acid to 61 in example 24 with the exception that 69 is used instead of pyromellitic acid.
Compound 72: Compound 70 is converted to compound 72 in essentially the same manner described for the conversion of 58 to 60 in Example 23. Purificationis accomplished using silica gel chromatography.
t~ r/
TosO O/2 ~ ~/.
EtO2C ~ OH ~ ESO2C ~ o O~/2 ethyi4-hydroxybenzoate 64 A ~acetone C BZN N
CBZN N~CBZN N~
N~O O/2 ~ O HOzC~O (~
CBZN N ~ DCC
\~ 11 66 NHS 65 o -- THF
HBr acetic aci;l bromoacetic anhydride NaHCO3 ~_~ O dioxanetH20 ~ ~
HBr.HN N 1l . Bt-CH2CON N~
\~ ~ O r=~ r~ r/ ~ \J I O ~ r~ r/
N~O O/2 ~_~ N~o O/2 HBr.HN N~ BrCH2CON N~
0 6, 6~3 (BtVPlZ/lDA/HBtTEG) SUB~ SHEEr ~RlJlE 26) .
WO 97/46251 PCT~US97tlO075 Example 28: Sy~thesis of Coruu~t~s of Haloacetylated Tetravalent Con~ounds Synthesis of (~ rP685)1/MTU/A/DABA/AT~G corU-~eAt~
compound 73:
A solution was prepared of 21 mg ( 15.5 umol) of compound 24 in Helium S sparged pH 8.5 200 mM borate buffer To the solution was added a second solution consisting of 3.25 mg'(2.6 urnol) of IA/DABA/ATEG, compound 46, dissolved in 396 uL of MeOH. A precipitate fo~ned, and I mL of MeOH was added to dissolve all the solids. The mixture was stirred for 18 h at room temperature, and 6 mL of 9/1 H2O/HOAc was added. The mixture was diluted ] 0 with 50 ML of H2O/CH3CN and loaded onto an HPLC p~ e~aldlive column.
Purification was accomplished by p.~ d~ive HPLC (25 cm X 22.4 mm C~8.
gradient: 35%B to 45%B 0-40 min, A = H2O/0. 1% TFA, B = CH3CN/0. 1% TFA, 12 mL/min) to provide 10.8 mg (67%) of compound 73 as a solid after Iyophilization.
Pep~O~O~O~SH Pep = LJP 685 ICH2COHN~ ~NILO ~~2 ~r ICH2COHN 46 (IA/DABA/ATEG) P ~~ ~ ~ ~S ~~~
HN~ ~N 'l HN
~0~~ O~S~
73 (LJI'68~)4/MTU/A/DA8A/ATEG
Syntllesis of (T TP685)~/MTU cor~lu~tP~ co~oIm~lc 74, 75. 76. 77. and 78:
These conjugates are prepared from platform compounds 51, 60, 63, 68~ and 72, respectively~ by the same reaction conditions as described above for the synthesis of conjugate 73 by substituting the ay~u-oyl;ate platform compound for platform compound 46. Pep can be LJP685 or other relevant peptide.
SU~SmUrE SHEEr ~RULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 97/46251 PCTrUS97/1007S
~0 ~0 o~ S ~l~ a~ H--l O ~
P ~O O~O 5~ ~H N"O ~/2 ~~--o~S~t~,N/--\N~
Jl~, o ~ O s ~ N
O O
~ ~ o ~ S J~ NN 4~ N N ~ S O ~ O ~O ~-P~P~ --o~~ S~N N~NN~1~5~o 0~ ~~Pep ~~~ ~O~ ~ N ~
~ ~1 or~r/
N ~ O 0/ ?
c~~~ 0~~ - s~NN~
~O~O o~S~,,U~ /~~ O
Pop~ --o~O S~N\ N
Example 29: Synthesis of Con~in~t~s Tetravalent Platforrn 55~ Co~ ~te Con~ol-nd 79. a TP685)JMP/TEG:
A solution is prepared of four equivalents of compound 2~L and five equivalents of Cs2C3 in DMF. One equivalent of BMP/TEG, platform compound 55, is added to the mixture is then stirred for I h. The mixture is diluted with80/20/10 H20/CH3CN/HOAc and loaded onto a plep~d~ e HPLC column.
Purification is accomplished by plc~a~live HPLC (C~x. A = H20/0.1% TFA. B =
25 CH3CN/0.1% TFA) to give compound 79 after Iyophilization. Pep can be LJP685 or other relevant peptide.
SUBS~TUlE SHEEl ~ULE 26) -'-Pep~O~O~ O~sH Pep = LJP 685 o 24 Br cs2co3 ~\ / \ ,7l DMF _~~ ~/ 2 Br - 55 (BMP/~EG) PepJ~~ 'O~ 0 ~~/ '~7L2 Pep~f~O~\/O~ - O~/S
o 79 ((LJP685)4/MTlJ/MP/TEG) l~xample 30: Synthesis of Cor~u~ates Tetravalent Platforn- tetrakis-BMB~
Conjug~t~ Compound B0, (L~P685)~/MTU/tetrakis-MR:
A solution is ~le~a~ed of four equivalents of compound 24 and five equivalents of Cs2C3 in DMF. One equivalent of tetrakis-bromomethylbenzene is added to the mixture which is then stirred for 1 h. The mixture is diluted with 80/20/10 H2O/CH3CN/HOAc and loaded onto a p,e~ dli~e HPLC column.
Purification is accomplished by pIepdldlive HPLC (Cl8 A = H2O/0.1% TFA, B =
CH3CN/0.1% TFA) to give compound 80 after Iyophilization. Pep can be LJP685 or other relevant peptide.
SUBSrlTU~ SHEEr (~ULE 26) Pep ~O ~~~O~ SH Pep = LJP 685 Br ~=~Br Br ~Br tetrakis-BMB
5~s~ ~o~ ~Pep --' o ~ O ~~ ~'~ ~T' Pep ~ 80 ((LJP685)4/MTU/MB) ~
Example 30: ~luorescence po~ri7~tion Peptide Bin~lin.~ Assa~s Synthesis of FITC-GPCILLARnRCG (CR2*) A solution of the cyclic disulfide peptide GPCILLARDRCG (20.0 m~.
14.4 !lmol) and fluorescein isothiocyanate (FITC) (5.6 mg. 14.4 ~umol) in 20 mL
of ACNlwater (1:1), co~ 20 mg sodium carbonate (Na2CO3, pH ~ 10.5), was stirred at room telll?~ u~ e. The reaction was monitored by analytical HPLC.After consuming the fluolescent labeling reagent, the crude material was purified on a ~l~;par~live HPLC eluted at 10 mL/min with a linear gradient from 30 to 55%B over 40 minutes where A was 0.1% (vlv) TFA in H2O and B was 0.085% (vlv) TFA in CAN. The FITC peptide was obtained as a bri~ht yellow powder after lyophi~i7~tion (3.7 mg, 15% yield): MS (ESI): rnle (M+l) Calcd. for C73H,02N,902oS3: 1661, obsd.: 1661.
SUBSmUlE St~EEr ~WLE 26 . .
CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 . 113 Direct Binclir~ Fluorescence Polarization Rintli~ A~y (dbFP) The methodology is described in PanVera Application Guide (1994), PanVera Corporation. Briefly, a trace amount of fluorescein isothiocyanate (FITC) labeled peptide (CB2*-F) is titrated with antibody (ACA 6501 or 6701) and the polarization for the sample is plotted versus the antibody concentration.
Polarization was measured with the PanVera Beacon instrument. Data were fitted to Equation 1.
Equation I KD/ R + 1 0 where Y is the Y-axis value (milli-polarization units, mP), R is the total concentration of antibody receptor, PL is the polarization for free F}TC-labeledpeptide (F), and PH is the polarization for F complexed with R (FR). KD is the dissociation constant (reciprocal binding constant) for F from the FR complex.
l S For these equations to be valid, it must be true that F <~ R. This titration is shown in Figures 22 and 23 for CB2*-F binding to ACA-6701 and ACA-6501 antibodies. respectively. A complete titration was not obtained with ACA-6501 asshown in Figure 23, but a previous titration is shown in Figure 24 gave a KD of 241 nM. By adding CB2* (GPCILLARDRCG) in slight excess over antibody 6701, to displace CB2*-F from 6701 (see Figure 25), a dissociation rate constantof Kofl~ = 0.0184 sec~', which corresponds to t~2 = 38 seconds, was determined for CB2*-F. Given the KD of 256 nM, this corresponds to an association rate constantof Kon = 3.6 X 104 M-l sec~l (after correcting for antibody bivalency). Thus, CB2*-F binding to ACA-6701 is limited only by diffusion ofthese two molecules together.
SUBSITnUTE SHEEr ffUULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 - WO 97/46251 PCT/USg7/10075 Competitive Fluorescence Pol~ri7~tion A~ y (cFP) The above described dbFP assay provides binding constants for FITC-labeled peptides and requires on the order of 0.5 mg of purified antibody. The cFP assay provides binding constants for peptides that lack the FITC group and it consumes less antibody, on the order of 10 llg. The cFP assay is modified from that reported in PanVera Applications Guide (1994) PanVera Corporation such that it consumes 50-fold less antibody. Briefly, antibody (ACA 6701) is mixed with trace FITC labeled peptide (CB2*-F) and enough time is allowed for equilibrium to be reached. This was I hour for ACA 6701 and CB2*-F.
Increasing concentrations ofthe unlabeled peptide being tested (CB2* or 3B10) are then added to the tube. After each addition, sufficient time, approximately 15 minutes, is allowed for equilibrium to be reached and the mP value was read.
Although it is necessary to choose concentrations of 6701 (~) and CB2*-F (F) such that F << R, the concentration of R need only be high enough such that the measured polarization (PH) is significantly higher than PL (see Figure 22). This A
(mP) value should be 20 or more mP units to insure reliable results.
Equation 2 ~(mP) = Pl~ - Pl As unlabeled (no FITC) peptide (I) is added to inhibit F from binding to R, Y
decreases from its maximum value of PH to a plateau of PL which should agree with that in Equation 1. These titrations are shown in Figures 26 and 27 for displacement of CB2*-F from ACA-6701 by CB2* and 3B10, respectively. The equation describing this titration was derived and is:
Equation 3 y = PH +PL * (I / Kl ' ) I/KI'+l.O
SUBSTllUrE SHEEr ~UILE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 97/46251 PCT~US97/1007 where PLjS the same as in Equation 1, I is the concentration of unlabeled peptide competitor, and K~' is the apparent dissociation constant for that peptide. Values for these parameters were obtained by fitting cFP titration data to the above equation.
S The true dissociation constant for I is obtained from Equation 4.
Equation 4 Kl= Kl'/~1.0 + RUKD) where R and Kl, are defined as in Equation 1. The R/KD ratio is obtained from the values Of PH' (from Equation 3) and PH and PL (from Equation I ) and using Equation 5. .
Equation S RJKD =(PH _PL)I(PH_PH ) In general, Equation 5 can be used to determine aPL antibody concentrations oncethe titration defined by Equation I is performed as a ''standard curve." Thus, in addition to providing a means for detçnnining Kl, this method provides a means of standardizing all aPL antibody stock solution concentrations and of analyzingtheir binding activity/stability over time using only 5-10 ~g of antibody per cFP
assay.
SUBSTrrUlE SHEEl- ~llllE 26) - CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O97/46251 PCT~US97/10075 DISSOCIATION CONSTANTS DFTERMRNED BY dbFP AND cFP
Peptide Antibody Sequence KDa or K
CB2*-F 6501FITC-GPCILLARDRCG 482 nMa CB2*-F 6701FITC-GPCILLARDRCG 512 nMa CB2* 6701 GPCILLARDRCG 35 nM
3B10 6701 AGPCLLLAPDRCPG 313 nM
a The KD values have been multiplied by 2 to correct for KD values determined from Equation I that do not factor in the bivalency of the antibody.
The results demonstrate that CB2*-F cross reacts with two very different aPL
antibodies, ACA-6501 and ACA-6701, binding to both with equal high affinity.
Removal of the FITC group improved binding of CB2* to ACA-6701 by 14-fold.
Binding of a related peptide, 3B 10, was 9-fold less than binding of CB2* to ACA-6701. While this result may be due to additional framework residues on 3B10, it may also be due to the substitution of a proline for arginine at position 8 in CB2*.
Previous NMR structure studies of SA12, a peptide similar to 3B 10, showed that this proline that is in a turn position gives the structure rigidity. CB2 is a much more flexible peptide and it has an arginine in this position. A more flexible peptide like CB2 may be more cross-reactive because it may more readily adjust its shape to fit a given antibody binding site. The implications of drug rigidification on binding affinity are discussed in Koehler er al., p. 251, GUIDEBOOK ON MOLECULAR MODELING IN DRUG DESIGN (Academic Press, N. Cohen, ed., 1996).
Example 31: Tolerance Activity of Peptide Conjn~t~s Two different conjugates co~ g the same peptide were tested for their ability to induce antigen specific tolerance in vivo. Briefly, mice were immunized with the peptide conjugated to the immunogenic carrier Keyhole Limpet l~emocyanin (KLH) to generate peptide-specific memory B cells. Three weeks SUBSTIlll~E SffEET ffUlLE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 Wo 97/46251 PCT/us97lloo7s later, groups of 5 mice per group were treated with various doses of the test conjugates? one group of mice was not treated and acted as the control. Five days later, all of the mice, including the control group, were boosted with the peptide conjugated to KLH and seven days,later all of the mice were bled and their sera assayed for anti-peptide antibodies using a modified Farr assay. The Antigen Binding Capacity (ABC) was calculated for each individual serum sample according to the method described in G.M. Iverson, "Assay for in vivo adoptive immune response," Volume II, Chapter 67, HANDBOOK OF EXPERIMENTAL
IMMUNOLOGY (Blackwell Scientific Publications, Weir et al., eds., 4th ed., l 0 Oxford, 1986). These values were then used to determine a mean and standard deviation for all of the individuals of a group.
While one of the conjugates ind~lced tolerance, the other one did not inhibit antipeptide antibodies over the dose range tested. The most likely explanation for this difference is that the latter conjugate has a short in vivo half-life. To address this problem, a system was employed that induced tolerance in vitro, thereby negating half-life consideration, and then the cells were transferred to irradiated recipients. Briefly, spleen cells from mice primed with the peptide conjugated to ~LH were harvested and incubated in complete RPMI- 1640 medium for 2 hours at 37~C with various doses of the test conjugates. One group of cells was incubated without toleragen and acted as the positive control. The cells were washed, transferred to irradiated syngeneic recipients and boosted with the peptide conjugated to KLH. Seven days later all of the mice were bled and their sera assayed for anti-peptide antibodies. The conjugate that did not induce any detectable tolerance when tested in the in vivo model did induce tolerance when tested in this in vitro model. This result supports the assumption that thedifference between conjugates is due to a short half-life of the conjugate. To directly test this hypothesis, the conjugate was ~mini~tered continuously by an implanted osmotic pump over a prolonged period of time. The results clearly show that this conjugate induced tolerance when a~1ministered by sustained release but not when ~-lmini~tered as a bolus as shown in Figure 32.
SUBSmU E S~EEr ~n~ 26) Tes~in~ of (LJP685)~/MTU-AHAB-TEG for Tolerance Activity in the in vivo Model Mice were primed with LJP-685-KLH on alum plus per~ussis as an S adjuvant. Three weeks later, the mice were treated with a range of doses of the (LJP685)4/MTU-AHAB-TEG conjugate. One group was not treated and acted as a control group. Five days later, all of the mice, including the control group, were boosted with l 0 ~lg LJP685-KLH and seven days later the mice were bled. Their sera were analyzed for anti-LJP685 antibodies by a modified Farr assay as described above. The results as shown in Figure 28 demonstrate that the treatment with the (LJP685)4/MTU-AHAB-TEG conjugate, over a dose range of I to 50 nmoles, had no detectable effect on the anti-LJP685 response.
Testin~ the (LJP685),/MTU-DAP~A-TEG Conju~ate for ~ ~,lerance Induction in the in vivo Model Mice were primed with LJP685-KLH on alum plus pertussis. Three weeks later, the mice were treated with 5, 10 or 50 nrnoles of the (LJP685)4/MTU-DABA-TEG conjugate. One group was not treated and acted as a control group.
Five days later, all of the mice, including the control group, were boosted with10 ~g LJP685-KLH and seven days later the mice were bled. Their sera were analyzed for anti-LJP685 antibodies by a modified Farr assay. The results as shown in Figure 29 demonstrate that (LJP685)4/MTU-DABA-TEG conjugate induces tolerance in the in vivo model with an EDso of 5 nmoles.
Testing the (T TP685)~/MTU-AHAB-TF~G Coruu~tP for Toler;lnce Induction in the in vitro Model Spleen cells from mice primed 3 weeks earlier with LJP685-KLH were harvested and incubated in complete RPMI-1640 medium for 2 hours at 37~C
with 4, 20 or 100 ~lM of (LJP685)4/MTU-AHAB-TEG conjugate. One group of cells was incubated without toleragen and acted as a positive control group. The SUBSmUlE SHEEr ~ULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 wo 97/462st PCT/US97/10075 cells were washed, transferred to irradiated recipients and boosted with 10 ~lg of LJP685-K-LH. Seven days later, the mice were bled and their sera were analyzed for anti-LJP685 antibodies by a modified Farr assay. The results as shown in Figure 30 clearly illustrate that the (LJP685)4/MTU-AHAB-TEG conjugate can induce tolerance when tested in the in vitro model achieving an ICso of ~ 4 ~lM.
Testin~ the (LJP6851~/MTU-DAP~A-TFG conJugate for Toler:~nre Tnduction in the in vitro Model Spleen cells from mice primed 3 weeks earlier with LJP685-KLH were harvested and incubated in complete RPMI-1640 medium for 2 hours at 37~C
with 0.4. 1.3 and 4 IlM of (LJP685)4/MTU-DABA-TEG conjugate. One group of cells was incubated without toleragen and acted as a positive control group. Thecells were washed, transferred to irradiated recipients and boosted with l 0 ~lg of LJP685-KLH. Seven days later, the mice were bled and their sera were analyzed for anti-LJP685 antibodies by a modified Farr assay. The results as shown in Figure 31 demonstrate that (LJP685)4/MTU-DABA-TEG conjugate can induce tolerance when tested in the in vi~ro model, achieving an IC50 of < 4 ~lM.
Testing the (LJP685)~/MTU-AHAB-TEG Con~ugate for Tolerance Induction in vi~o U~ a Continuous l )elivery Pump Mice were primed with LJP685-KLH on alum plus pertussis. Three weeks later, the mice were divided into 5 groups of five mice per group. On day 1, one group was treated with a bolus of saline and another group was treated with a bolus cont~ining 50 nmoles of the (LJP685)4/MTU-AHAB-TEG conjugate. The three rem~inin~ groups were implanted with osmotic purnps. In one group, the pumps were filled with saline and delivered at 1 IlL/hour for 3 days. The two rem~ining groups received pumps filled with the (LJP685)4/MTU-AHAB-TEG
conjugate (50 nmoles). One group received pumps that deliver at 1 IlL/hour for three days and the other received pumps that deliver at 0.5 ~L/hour for seven days.
On day 5, the pumps that deliver for three days were surgically removed. On day SUBSmUrE SHEEr ~U~ 26) --CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 WO 97/46251 PCT/USg7/10075 7, all of the mice, including the control group, were boosted with 10 ~g of LJP685-KLH. On day 10, the purnps that deliver for seven days were surgically removed. On day 14, all of the mice were bled. Their sera were analyzed for anti-LJP685 antibodies by a modified Farr assay. The results are shown in Figure 32.
Teslin~ the U TP-Peptide)~/MTU-BMP-TEG Coruu~ate for Toler~nce Induction in the in vivo Model Mice are primed with peptide-KLH on alum plus pertussis. Three weeks later, the mice are treated with the (LJP-peptide)4/MTU-BMP-TEG conjugate, one group is not treated and acts as the control group. Five days later. all of the mice7 including the control group, are boosted with 10 ',Ig of peptide-KLH and seven days later the mice are bled. Their sera are analyzed for anti-peptide antibodies by a modified Farr assay. The results show that the (LJP-peptide)4/MTU-BMP-TEG
conjugate induces tolerance in the in vivo model at a potency equal to or greater than that of the (LJP685)4/MTU-AHAB-TEG conjugate.
SUBSmUI~ S~EEr (PtULE 26)
13 C L G dL dL G K L C
14 C L G V dL G dl; L C
C L G V dK G dL L C
16 C L G V cL G dL L C
17 C L G V dK G dK L C
18 C L G V L G dl; dL C 150 #952=S0 19 C L G V L G dL dK C
C L G V L G dK d~; C
21 C L G V L G dL dL C 140 #952=30 2' C L G V L dA }~ L C 140 #952 = S0 C L G V L G li L dC
I~'-,~lc smino ~cids ~nAA) nC L G V L G l; L C
2 ~' C L ~G ~ ':V .L ~ -~ G ~ .~; .i C
. ~ . , .. ... ,~ , ..... ...
3 C L nG V L G }~ L C 70 #952= S0 4 C L G nV L G K L C 220 C L G V nL G ~; L C 180 6 C L G V L nG ~ L C 550 7 C L G V L G nK L C
8 C L G V L G K nL C 240 #952 = S0 9 C L G V L G ~ L nC
SU~STllUrE SHEEr ~WLE 26) Others C L G V L G 1;. L C ATU Y 300 ~952 z 50 2 Y ATU C L G V L G ~; L C 170 3 C L G V L G l; L C TGR resin 500 4 C L G V L G l; L C dC TGRresin 620 dC L G V L G 1~ L C C
6 cC L G V L G ~ L C dC TGR resin Thioelhtrs: sin~le delection Hc L G V L A }~ L C
2 Hc G V L A li L C
3 Hc L V L A li L C
4 Hc L G L A ~ L C
Hc L G V A 1~ L C
6 Hc L G V L ~; L C
7 Hc L G V L A L C
8 Hc L G V L A l; C
shrink I
Hc V L A }; L C
2 Hc L A l; L C
3 Hc L A li C
br~lnch~d Hc L G V L G l; L Pe 2 Hc L G V L G li L dPe 3 Pe L G V L G ~; L Hc 4 dPe L G V L G }~ L Hc dPe L G V L G l; L dPe D ~mino ~cids dHc L G V L G ~; L C
2 dHc L G V L G }; L dC
3 Hc L G V L G l; L dC
SUBSrllUrE SHEEr ~IE 26) Des ~mino H~ L G V L G }; L Hc desamino 2 B~ L G V L G l; L C desamino HCTE
3 Pp L G V L G }~ L ~Ic desamino CHTE
4 Pp L G V L G ~; L C des~mino CHTE
SUBSmUrE SHEEr (RlJLE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 wo 97/46251 PCT/US97/10075 Abbreviations Hc......... homocysteine Cy ........ cyclohexyl alanine tL ........ tertiary leucine ML ........ alpha methyl leucine IV......... alpha methyl, alpha amino butyric acid -MP ........ alpha methyl proline mA......... alpha methyl alanine aiB ....... aminoisobutryic acid pG......... phenylglycine cG ........ cyclopropyl glycine dA ........ D alanine dP......... D proline dL ........ D leucine dV ........ D valine dK ........ D lysine nC ........ N alpha-methyl cysteine nL ........ N alpha-methyl leucine nG......... N methyl glycine nV......... N alpha-methyl valine nK ........ N alpha-methyl Iysine mK......... N epsilon-methyl lys ine Pe......... penicillamine SUBSlllUrE SHEEl' ffWI~ 26) CA 022~6449 lsss-ll-23 Abbreviations By......... butyroyl Pp......... proprionyl Or......... omithine Structure Activily Relationship of the Crossreactive ACA Epitope Relative Structure Activity AGPCLGVLGKLCPG (3G3) (LJP 688) 100 CLGVLGKLC (LJP 690) 3.5 CLGVLAKLC 1.8 C~GVLpGKLC 1.4 CLGdVdLGKLC 5.9 HCLGVLGKLC (thioether) 1.6 N. Use of a-methvl Amino Acids Substitutions and Unnatural Amino Acids to Enhance Peptide ImmunoreactivitY and Confer Resistance to Protease Attack Proline residues have a special significance due to their influence on the chain conformation of polypeptides. They often occur in reverse turns on the surface of globular proteins. In the phage epitope libraries of the present invention, all random peptide inserts are flanked by boundary prolines. In addition, most of the mimotopes discovered with ACA-6501 have a third proline which, based on computer-based predictions, likely exists as part of a ,B-turn.
~-turn mimetics can be used to enhance the stability of reverse tD confon-SUBSmUI E SHEEr fflULE 26) - CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 W O 97/46251 PCT~US97/1007 47 nations in small peptides. Such a mimetic is (S~ methyl proline (a-MePro), a proline analog that, in addition to stabilizing turn confo~nations, confers resi~t~nce to protease degradation. Protease resi~t~nre is a desirable prop~lly for a potential dlug designed to act in the plasma. Peptide ACA-6501/3B10 S AGPCLLLAPDRCPG (insert highlighted) is a consensus peptide. It has a sequence featuring the most prevalent residue at each position based on a con~ u;son with 35 other homologous sequences. Due to its representative --character, the sequence was subjected to a number of systematic modifications and deletions and its activity subsequently evaluated by aPL antibody binding.
Among the most hlll~ol ~ fintlin~ was the discovery that the prolines at the 3 and 9 positions are important for activity. Proline-3 is derived from the phage framework and is not part of the random insert. The most dramatic effect was obtained by the substitution of a-MePro for proline at the 9-position. This substitution led to a six-fold enhancement in immunoreactivity.
The results of a-methyl and a-methyl amino acid substitution studies carried out on peptide 6641/3G3 are shown above in Table 8.
In addition to the twenty naturally-occurring amino acids and their homoanalogs and noranalogs, several other classes of alpha amino acids can be employed in the present invention. Examples of these other classes include d-amino acids, N"-alkyl amino acids, alpha-alkyl amino acids, cyclic amino acids, chirrieric amino acids, and miscellaneous amino acids. These non-natural amino acids have been widely used to modify bioactive polypeptides to enhance resistance to proteolytic degradation and/or to impart conformational consllai to improve biological activity (Hruby et al. (1990) Biochem. J268:249-262;
Hruby and Bonner (1995) Me~hods in Molecular Biology 35:201-240).
The most common Na~alkyl amino acids are the NB-methyl amino acids, such as Na-methyl cysteine (nC), Na~methyl glycine (nG), Na methyl leucine (nL),N~~methyl Iysine (nK), and Na methyl valine (nV). Examples of alpha-alkyl amino acids include alpha-methyl alanine (niA), alpha-aminoisobutyric acid (aiB), alpha-methyl proline (mP), alpha-methyl leucine (mL), alpha-methyl valine (mV), SUBSmU~E SHEEr (RULE 28) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 WO 97/462~1 PCT/US97110075 alpha-methylalpha-aminobutyric acid (tv), diethylglycine (deG), diphenylglycine (dpG), and dicyclohexyl glycine (dcG) (Balararn (1992) Pure & Appl. Chem.
64:1061-1066; Toniolo et al. (1993) Biopolymers 33:1061-1072; Hinds et al.
(1991) Med Chem. 34: 1777-1789).
Exarnples of cyclic amino acids include 1-annino-1-cycloplopane carboxylic acid (cG), I-amino-1-cyclopentane carboxylic acid (Ac5 c), I-arnino-l-cyclohexane carboxylic acid (Ac6c), arninoin.dane carboxylic acid (ind), tetrahydroisoquinoline carboxylic acid (Tic), and pipecolinic acid (Pip) (C.
Toniolo (1990) Int'l. ~. Peptide Protein Res. 35:287-300; Burgess et al. (1995) J. Am. Chem. Soc. 117:3808-3819). Exarnples of chimeric arnino acids include penicillamine (Pe), combinations of cysteine with valine, 4R- and 4S-mercaptoprolines (Mpt), combinations of homocysteine and proline and 4R- and 4S-hydroxyprolines (hyP) and a combination of homoserine and proline.
Exarnples of miscellaneous alpha arnino acids include basic amino acid analogs such as omithine (Or), N~-methyl Iysine (mK), 4-pyridyl ~l~nine(pyA), 4 piperidino alanine (piA), and 4-aminophenylalanine; acidic amino acid analogs such as citrulline (Cit), and 3-hydroxyvaline; aromatic arnino acid analogs such as I-naphthy~ nine (l-Nal), 2-naphthyl~ nine (2-Nal), phenylglycine (pG), 3,3-diphenyl~l~nine (dpA), 3-(2-thienyl)alanine (TE). and halophenylalanines (e.g., 2-fluorophenyl~l~nine and 4-chlorophenylalanine); hydrophobic arnino acid analogs such as t-butylglycine (i.e., tertiary leucine (tL)), 2-arninobutyric acid (Abu), cyclohexyl~l~nine (Cy), 4-tetrahydropyranyl alanine (tpA), 3,3-dicyclohexyl alanine (dcA), and 3,4-dehydroproline.
In addition tg alpha-arnino acids, others such as beta amino acids can also be used in the present invention. Exarnples of these other amino acids include 2-arninobenzoic acid (Abz), ~-aminoplopalloic acid (~-Apr),7~-aminobutyric acid (~-Abu), and 6-arninohexanoic acid (~-Ahx). Carboxylic acids such as 4-chlorobutyric acid (By) and 3-chloro,t,ro~ionic acid (Pp) have also been used asthe first residue on the N-terîninal in the synthesis of cyclic thioether peptides.
SUBSlTrU~E SHEEI ffWLE 26) , CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 O. Preparation of CYclic Thioether Analogs T'he mimetic peptides identified by the methods of the instant invention can be further modified to contain thioether substitutions. Modification of cyclic disulfide analogs to cyclic thioether analogs will extend the plasma half-life of the analog conjugates and, therefore, require a lower dosage. Cyclic thioether analogs also elimin~te the problem of disulfide bond exchange which often occurs with cyclic disulfide polypeptides. In addition, the cyclic thioether analogs may also interfere with MHC Class I ~ presentation to T cells and, thus, facilitate induction of anergy. Finally, the cyclic thioether analogs are useful in the thiol-dependent conjugation reactions used in the production of valency platforTn molecule conjugates.
Four cyclic thioether analogs were ~re~ed according to the methodology described in co-owned, co-pending patent application, attorney docket number 252312006600, which is incorporated herein in its entirety. Using either a RilllCTM
arnide 4-methyl benzhydrylarnino resin or MBHA resin, fall length peptide analogs of 6641/3G3 were prepared, converted into chloro-peptides, cleaved from a solid support and then cyclized. See Thioether Reaction Scheme below.
Suitable cyclic thioether analogs include the analogs shown below.
CCTE HCTE
S I . ~ S~
AFLGVLG'KLAF-NH2 AFLGVLGKLAF-NH2 CHTE HHTE
~S ~ ~S ~
Af LGVLGKLAF-NH2 AFLGVLGKLAF-NH2 AF =--HN CO--SUBSTrlUlE SHEEl- ff~lJLE 26) CYCLIC THIOETHER REACTION SCHEME I
JBDMSO fBIlSS
(BOC)AFLGVLG(BOCJKLA
Ph3PCI2 Cl tBuSS
(BocJAFLGvLG(Boc)KLA
HFJDMSIEDT
(64%) ~.
C/~ HS~
AFLGVLGKl AF-NH2 Na2CO3 in H~O/ACN (1:1) (49%) CCTE
S
AFLGVLGKl AF-NH2 H
AF = H N C O
SUBSmU~E SHEET ~lUlE ~6) CA 02256449 l998-ll-23 Alternatively, thioether analogs are prepared according to the reaction scheme below.
t) isobutylchloro~orrnate N-m~ ",o pholin~ Hf CO2~1 2) N-hydr~xy-2-m~rc~p~opyndine BOCHN~ .3N E30CllN~f C~2 ~r Co2c~cH3)3 co2c~CH3)3 ~nitrophenol ~
80C~ly-pr~C02H ~BOC~ly-pr~COz~NO2 DCC,THF
(ctt~)3SS ~CO2H ~ (H~OCC (CH3)~SS~CONH2 NHFMOC 2) I~ HCO3 NHFMOC
~MO~t~utylthio~r~t ~e 1) PBu3t~aHCO3 dio~ne/l 120 2) compolJnd 1 KzCO~ ~
2~
BOCNH-Gly Pro-COHNrC~S~CONH~ BOCHNrCH~S ~CONH2 CO2H NHFMOC ~ Co2c(cHl~3 NHFMOC
l) TFA/H20/HOCH2CH2SH
2) cDmpound ~
- NaHCO~ o~ eJH20 BOCN~ P CONH~CH2--S ~CONH2 NH-I-L-CO2H NHCO-R(Prnc)-C~(Ot~3u) P~b-A-L~NHFMOC
1) OBU/CH3CN H2N~-P-CO~N --CH~S /CONH2 2) C)PPAlCH3Chl/pyrldin~ l l 3) TFA/H20/lllioanisole/EDT/phenol CO NH
HN-I-B-L-A-P~-D-R- CO
SUBSmUrE SHEEI fftllLE 28) CA 02256449 1998-ll-23 W O 97/462~1 PC~AUS97/10075 The following analogs are representative as analogs made according to cyclic thioether reaction scheme 2.
112N~;p CONIlrCH~S~
~tl2-GP-CONlt~ 5~2 C~LIlAPDR-NH
CTE c O
CO-lLlJ~bOR-NH
cl~ A ~2~GP~ONH
c~LLw HzN GP~ONH C~ a:lNH2 CTE D
r ~ Ad~-P CoNl l~c~ r CON~2 C~LLtAPDR~ : ; l I
CTE B CTE E CO~llAPDR~NH
E~emplary cyclic thioether analogs were tested for activity against ACA
antibodies ACA-6501 and ACA-6701. The results are shown in Table 10 below.
IC50 Values (llg/0.1 mL) - Thioether ACA-6501 ACA-6701 CCTE, LJP 698 11.0 5.0 HCTE, LJP 699 4.6 3.0 CHTE, LJP 702 9.2 3.2 HHTE, LJP 703 8.0 3.6 LJP 690 10.0 4 0 CTE A 0.08 CTE B 0.5 CTE C 0.9 CTE D 3.2 CTE E 6.3 The HCTE analog, LJP 699, outperforrned the reference peptide, LJP 690, which is the truncated version, CLGVLGECLC, of LJP 688, AGPCLGVLGKLCPG.
SUBSrllUl~E SHEEr (RUlE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 wo 97/46251 PCTIUS97/10075 All articles, documents, patents and patent applications cited herein are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. The following examples are intended to further illustrate the invention and its uniqueness. These examples are not intended to limit the scope of the invention in any manner.
EX~ PT F~
Example 1: Measurement of Anticardiolipin Antibodies (~CA) in serum 6501 Even numbered wells of an Inunulon I microtitration plate (Dynatech Laboratories, Inc., Chantilly~ VA) were coated with 50 ,ug cardiolipin (Sigma Chemical, St. Louis, MO) in 30 ~L ethanol per well. The plate was dried overnight at 4~C and blocked with 200 ~lL of 10% adult bovine senun (ABS) (Irvine Scientific Co., Santa Ana, CA) in phosphate-buffered saline (ABS/PBS) for 2 hours at room t~ll,pe~ re (RT). The plates were washed S times with Tris-buffered saline (TBS) prior to the addition of 10 ~lLof aPL standards and the test serum, ACA-6501. The aPL standards (APL Diagnostics, Inc., Louisville, KY) were reconstituted according to the manufacturer's instructions and diluted I :50 with 10% ABS-PBS. The test serum. ACA-6501 ~ diluted 1 :50 to 1 :2,000 in serialdilutions with 10% ABS-PBS, was added to selected duplicate wells and incubated for 2 hours at RT. The plate was washed five times with TBS and 100 ~L of 1: 1,000 goat-anti-human-lgG/alkaline phosphatase conjugate (Zymed, South San Francisco, CA, Cat No. 62,8422), in 10% ABS-PBS was added and incubated for I hour at RT. Again, the plate was washed five times with TBS and the assay was developed by adding 100 ~lL phenolphthalein monophosphate (PPNM) substrate solution (Sigma, Cat. No. P-5758), ~ ,d from a stock solution of 0.13 M PPMP and 7.8 M2-amino-2-methyl- 1 -propanol, adjusted to - pH 10.15 with HCI, after a dilution of 1 :26 with deionized water. After approximately 30 minutes, the reaction was stopped with 50 ~lL of 0.2 M dibasic sodium phosphate (Mallinckrodt, Analytical Reagent) added per well. The optical density was read at 550 nm in a microplate autoreader (Bio-Tek Instruments, SUBSTIIUIE SHEEr (FWLE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 Winooski, VT, Model EL3 1 1). The optical density of the odd-numbered control wells (blank, without cardiolipin (CL)) was subtracted from the optical density of the evennl-mhered wells. The absorbance readings of the aPL standards were plotted using Graph Pad Prizm (Graph Pad Software, Inc., San Diego, CA) to generate the GPL (IgG phospholipid) standard cunre. The diluted 6501 test serum absorbance readings were used to calculate GPL scores based on the GPL
standard curve.
In the modified ACA ELISA, Nunc Maxisorp microtitration plates were coated with 100 ~L /mL ~2-GPI made up in PBS following incubation at I hour at room temperature. Following this step, microplates were blocked with PBS
cont~3ining 2% nonfat milk and 0.4% (w/v) Tween 80 for 2 hours at room temperature. Except for the use of nonfat milk/Tween as reagent diluent and blocking agent, the Nunc microplates coated with ~2-GPI directly were used for ACA IgG binding studies as previous described for the Dynatech microplates coated first with cardiolipin before the ,B2-GPI was added.
Example 2: Anticardiolipin Antibod~ (ACA) Purification from Serum 650l In a 25 mL round-bottom flask (Kontes Scientific Co.~ Vinelands N.J.) a mixture of 1.2 mL cardiolipin (Sigma Chemical, St. Louis, MO, #C- l 649), 0.464 mL cholesterol (Sigma Diag., St. Louis, MO., #965-25), 0.088 mL of 5 mg dicetylphosphate (Sigma Chemical, St. Louis, MO, D-263 1 ) per mL chloroform was dried for approximately S minutes in a Rotavap (Buchi, Switzerland).
Following the removal of solvent, 2 mL of0.96% (wt./vol.) NaCl (J.T. Baker, Inc., Phillipsburg, NJ) Baker analyzed reagent) was added and mixed in a Vortex Genie Mixer (Scientific Industries, lnc., Bohemia, NY) for 1 minute. The liposome suspension was incubated for 1 hour at 37~C. Meanwhile, serum 6501 was spun at 600 X g in a Sorvall RT 6000 centrifuge (Dupont Co. Wilmington, DE) for 10 minutes at 8~C. Four mL of the supernatant was placed in a 25 mL
round-bottom flask with I mL of the prepared liposome suspension and the SUBS~ E SHEEr ~lULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 W O 97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 mixture was incubated with agitation at medium speed in an orbital shaker, Tektator V (Scientific Products, ~IcGraw Park, IL) for 48 hours at 4~C, and an additional 2 hours at 37~C. Twenty mL of cold TBS was added and the mixture was transferred into a 50 mL polyc~rbonate centrifuge tube (Nalge Co., Rochester, NY) and centrifuged at 27,000 X g for 15 minutes at 4~C. in an RC3 centrifuge ina SS-34 rotor (Sorvall-Dupont Washington, DE). The precipitate was washed 3 times with 25 mL of cold 0.96% NaCl using the RC3 centrifuge. The pellet was dissolved in l mL of 2% (wt/vol) solution of n-octyl-p-D-glucopyranoside (Calbiochem, La Jolla, CA) in TBS and applied to a 0.6 mL protein A/cross-linked agarose (Repligen Corporation, Cambridge, MA) column which had been pre-washed with 15 times bed volume of I M acetic acid and equilibrated with 15 times bed volumes of TBS. The antibody-protein A/agarose column was washed with 40 times bed volume of 2% octylglucopyranoside to remove lipids, followed by extensive washings with TBS until the o tical density of the eluate at 280 nmapproached the baseline. The bound antibody was eluted with I M acetic acid.
One mL fractions were collected7 neutralized immediately with 0.34 mL 3 M Tris (Bio-Rad. electrophoresis grade reagent) per fraction and lcept in an ice bath. The optical density of each fraction was deterrnined at 280 mn in a spectrophotometer (Hewlett-Packard~ 8452A Diode Array Spectrophotometer, Palo Alto, CA).
Fractions cont~inin~ antibody were pooled, concentrated and washed 4 times with TB S in Centricon-3 0 concentrators (Amicon Division, W.R. Grace & Co., Beverly, MA) per m~nnf~cturer's protocol. The final yield of purified antibody from 4 mL of serum 6501 was deterrnin~d by reading the optical density at 280 nm of an aliquot from the concentration, where I mg = 1.34 OD280. The average yield obtained was ~50 ,ug antibody from 4 mL of serum 6501. The purified antibody was tested for ACA activity and checked for purity with Laemmli SDS-PAGE. An affinity adsorbent cont~inine ~2-GPI was prepared using CNBr-activated agarose ) Pharmacia, Inc., Piscataway, NJ) or Affi-Gel 10 (BioRad. Richmond. CA) in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions SUBSrl~U~E SHEEr ~RUL~ 26) using purified ,B2-GPI obtained commercially (Perlmrnune, Rockville, MD). To a 1 mL gel column contS~ining the ~2-GPI affinity adsorbent, up to 100 ~g of liposome-purified aPL IgG in 1 mL TBS was added. After 1 hour, the colurnn was extensively washed with buffer to displace co~ nt.~ and any IgG that did not bind ~2-GPI. The ,B2-GPI-binding IgG was displaced with I M HOAc and the fractions neutralized with Tris as described above. Fractions cont~ining IgG were pooled, concentrated and subjected to buffer exchange as previously described.
Example 3: Construction of a p-I~T T ibrary Vector P~ lion fUSE 5 (Scott, J.K. and G. Smith. supra) was used as the vector ~or the construction of p-III libraries, and a variation of the method of Holmes, D.S. and M. Quigley (1981), Anal. Biochem. 144:193) was employed to generate the doublestranded replicative forrn (RF). Briefly, an 800 m' ~ulture of ~. coli K802, harboring fUSE 5, was grown in 2YT medium (Difco Labs, Ann Arbor, NU) con~ining 20 micrograms/mL tetracycline for 18 hours at 37 degrees with vigorous sh~kine. Cells were collected by centrifugation and resuspended in 75 mL STET. STET consists of 8% sucrose in 50 mM Tris/HCI pH 8.0, 50 mM
EDTA and contains 0.5% Triton X-100. Lysozyme~ 10 mg/mL in STET. was added to a final concentration of l mg/mL. After 5 minutes at RT, three equal aliquots were placed in a boiling water bath with occasional .ch~king for 3.5 minutes. The viscous slurry was centrifuged for 30 minutes at 18000 x G and an equal volume of isopropanol was added to the sUpçrn~t~nt. The solution was cooled to -20~C and the nucleic acids were collected by .centrifugation. The RF
was isolated from a CsCI gradient as described by Sarnbrook et al. MOLECULAR
CLON~G:ALABORATORY MANUAL (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, - Cold Spring Harbor, NY, 2d ed., 1989).
SUBSlmrrE SI~EEl (RULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 Wo 97t46251 PCT/U~97/10075 Proration of the random in~rt The DNA for insertion was generated by the "gapped duplex" method described by Cwirla et al. (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87:6378-6382. In this method, an oligonucleotide cont~ining a degenerate region in the middle is surrounded by short constant regions on each end of the oligonucleotide. Two shorter, complementary oligonucleotides are annealed to form a "gapped duplex"
possessing overhangs that are complementary to the sticky ends produced by the restriction endonuclease used to digest the vector. In this case, the longer degenerate oligonucleotide has the sequence:
5' GGGCTGGACCC(NNK)XCCGGGGGCTGCTG 3'where N = A or C or G or T, K = G or T, and x is the number of codons in the random regions. EpiGS2 was designed to base pair to the 5' end of the degenerate oligonucleotide and has the sequence 5' GGGTCCAGCCCCGT 3'. Simi}arly EpiGS3 was designed to anneal to the 3'end of the degenerate oligonucleotide and has the sequence 5'CAGCCCCCGG 3'. When correctly annealed, the three oligonucleotides forrn a "gapped duplex" which, when inserted into fUSE 5 digested with Sfil, restores the reading ftme of P-IIl with the random insert near the 5' end.
Oligonucleotides described above were prepared by excision from polyacrylainide gels. One nanomole of EpiGS2, EpiGS3, and 50 picomoles of the degenerate oligonucleotide were kinased separately in 66 microliter volumes. Thethree oligonucleotides were then pooled, NaCI was added to 50 mM and the mixture was heated to 65~C for 5 minnte~ followed by slow cooling to RT. The annealed oligonucleotides were then cooled on ice and used immediately in the ligation reaction with fUSE 5. The ligation reaction consisted of 10 micrograms of fUSE S DNA digested to completion with Sfil, 30 ~L of the "gapped duplex"
solution and 1000 U of T4 ligase in a total volume of 450 microliters. The ligation was incubated for 18 hours at 16~C. The mixture was then phenol-chloroform extracted, precipitated with ethanol and the precipitate dissolved in20 ~lL of water.
SUBSrlTUrE SHEEr ffWLE 26) -~
58 ~ -Generatin~ and Am~ in~ the T ibrary The ligated DNA was introduced into E. coli by electroporation (Dower et al. (1988) NucleicAcid Res. 16:6127-6145). Frozen electrocompetent MC 1061 cells (0.1 mL) were mixed with 4 ~L of ligated DNA in a cold 2 mm cuvette and subjected to 2.5 kV, 5.2 mS pulse by a BTX eleclro~olalion device (BTX Corp., San Diego, CA). Immediately after the pulse, I mL of SOC, a cell growth medium (see Dower et al., s2~pra) was added. Five separate electroporations werecarried out pooled, and incubated at 37~C for 1 hour. At that time, samples wereremoved and diluted to determine the total number of clones generated. The balance of the mixture was diluted in 1 L of 2YT (1.6% Peptone, 140, 1% Yeast Extract, and 0.5% NaCI? Difco Labs, Ann Arbor, MI) containing 20 micrograms.
per mL of tetracycline and grown for 18 hours at 37~C while shaken at 275 rpm.
Phage were purified by 2 rounds of PEGlNaCI precipitation and resuspension in 1.2 mL TBS cont~ining 0.02% sodium azide. Particle number was estimated by absorbance at 269 mn. The titer of the phage was deter-mined by mixing 10 ~lL ofdilutions of phage with 10 microliters of starved E. coli.
Example 4: Screenin.~ a p-JlT T ibrary with aPL Antibody Affinity-purified, ACA-6501 (affACA-6501, 10 ~lg, 7 ~lL of 1.44 mg/mL
stock solution) was incubated for 2 hours at RT in siliconized 1.4 mL microfuge polypropylene -tubes with pooled phage from the x, y and z libraries (epiXYZ) [11 IlL + 8.5 ~lL + 2 ~LL, respectively; total volume = 21.5 ~lL, ~101~ clones] in a final volume of 100 IlL TBS, pH 7.4, with 0.5% bovine serum albumin (BSA). During 2S this incubation, the final steps in preparing freshly starved E. coli, strain K-91, were carried out. A suspension of E. coli freshly grown in 2YT medium for about 5 hours with 250 rpm ~h~king at 370~C was spun at 1000 x g for 10 minutes at RT
in 50 mL polypropylene tubes. Twenty mL of 80 mM NaCI was added to the packed E. coli pellet and then incubated for 45 minutes at 37~C at 100 rpm.
SUBSrmllE SHEEl ~FWLE 2~i) - CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W 097/46251 PCT~US97/10075 Following centrifugation as above, the starved E. coli pellet was suspended in I mL of 50 mM ammonium phosphate/80 rnm NaCI and used later for phage amplification. Protein G-agarose beads were washed 2x in TBS/BSA and 2 times in TBS/0.5% Tween-20 and stored at 4~C as a 50% suspension in TBS/Tween.
Two hundred gL of the protein G-agarose bead suspension was then added to the ACA-6501/phage mixture and incllh~tion continued for an additional 1 hourat RT. At this point, the mixture was chilled and washed 3 times with cold TBS/Tween and the precipitate was collected in a microfuge in a cold room. The washed beads were transferred to new microfuge tubes prewashed with TBS/E~SA
and TBS/Tween to prevent non-s ecific adherence. After three additional washes with TBS/Tween, the beads with bound ACA-6501-bearing phage were eluted with 300 ,uL 0.2 N HCI/glycine, pH 2.1 by tumbling for 10 minutes at RT.
Following centrifugation at 16,000 X g, the acidic eluate supernatant was collected and an additional 100 !lL of elution solution was added to the bead pellet and the procedure repeated. After 10 minutes, the phage-cont~ining eluates (representing the unamplified first round phage) were pooled (~400 ~L) and placed in a sterile 17xlO0 mm polypropylene cell culture tube to which was added50 !lL 0.5 M NaCI followed by pH neutralization with 2.5 M Tris base (usually ~25-35 ~L). An equal volume of the starved ~. coli suspension was added immediately and then incubated for 10 minutes at 37~C at 100 rpm. The mixture was then transferred to a 250 mL sterile culture flask cont~ining 25 mL 2YT with20 ~g/mL tetracycline (Tet) and incubated overnight at 37~C at 250 rpm.
To isolate amplified phage from overnight cultures, the suspension was centrifuged at 12,000 x g for 10 minutes in polycarbonate tubes and the pellet discarded. After heating the sUp~ t~nt at 70~C for 30 minutes in polypropylene tubes, the material was spun again in polymbonate tubes and the supernatant saved. To the supernatant, 1/4 volume of 20% (w/v) polyethylene glycol, molecular weight 8000 (PEG 8000) was added to precipitate phage. The solution was mixed by inversion 100 times and then incubated at 4~C for 2 hours. After centrifugation at 35,000 x g for 30 minutes at 40~C, the phage-containing pellet SUBSmlJl E SHEEr ffWLE 2B) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 was resuspended in ~0.5 mL of TBS/BSA and transferred to a 1.4 mL microfuge tube. After a 1 minute spin in a microfuge at 16,000 x g, the supematant was transferred to a clean tube and labeled first round amplified phage.
During second, third and fourth rounds of biop~nnin~, 75 ~L of amplified phage from the prece~ine round was incubated with 7 ~LL affACA-6501 in a final volume of 100 ~L. For fifth round phage, affACA-6501 was diluted first at 1:
1000, then treated as described for the other rounds. All subsequent steps were carried out as described for the first round. Phage from five rounds of biop~nning were spottitered on 2YT/Tet plates to detemmine phage concentration. The spot titer of amplified phage requires an initial phage dilution of lx I o6 in TBS/BSA or 2YT media. For each round. 10 ~lL of the dilute phage was incubated with 40 ~lL
of starved E. coli for 10 minutes at 37~C with no ~h~kin~. Following the addition of 9S0 ,uL of 2YT/dilute Tet (0.2 llg/mL), the mixture was incubated for 30-45 minutes at ,37~C with 250 rpm shaking. Ten ~lL aliquots of neat and diluted phage solutions, 1: 10, 1: 100, and 1: 1000, were spotted in 2YT/dilute Tet using agarplates cont~ininE 20 llg/mL Tet.
Micropanning Immulon type 2 plates were coated with protein G. Protein G was prepared at 10 ~g/mL in 0. I M NaHCO3 and 100 ~lL per well was added to the wells of microtitration plates and incubated ovemight at 4~C. After discarding excess protein G solution from plates, each well was blocked with 250-300 ~LL 2YT for Ihour at RT with agitation on an oscillating platfomm. Tris-buffered saline, pH
7.4/0.5% Tween 20 (TBS/Tween), was used with an automatic plate washer to wash the wells 4 times with 200 ~L. One hundred ~L affACA-6501 (or control nomlal IgG), diluted to 2.5 ~lg/mL with 2YT, was added to washed wells. The plate was transferred to a cold room rotator near the end of a 1 hour incubation at RT on a rotating platform.
SUBSllTUTE SHEEr ffWl E 26) ~-CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 - Wo 97/46251 PCT/US97/10075 Phage to be tested by mi~;lopa~ ing were obtained from the agar plates generated by biopa~ lg. Each clone to be tested was transferred using sterile toothpicks to a separate well of a round-bottom 96-well miclotillalion plate (Corning, NY) cont~ining 250 ~L '~,YT/Tet per well and cultured overnight at 37~C. Clone desi~n~tions are based on the screening antibody, the bio~ g round of origin, and the location of the clone in the overnight culture plate, e.g., ACA6501/3B10 refers to the clone isolated by ACA-6501 in the third round located in the well designated B10 on the mi-;lotiLlation plate. Following overnight incubation, phage cultures were centrifuged using a microtitration plate holder at 1300 x g for 10 minutes at RT. Supernatants constituted the source of ' neat" phage.
Initial mi~;l. palming was restricted to six clones which were tested at dilutions expanded by factors from 1: 10 to 1: 1 o6 ~ The results from these pilot clones were used to suggest the ~plol.l.ate single dilution that would yield gradable results for clones in the source plate for each round. Plates representing cultured, randomly chosen clones from the 3rd, 4th, and 5th rounds of bioparmingwere diluted to 1: 100,000 from the "neat'' solution using 2YT in miclo~ ion plates with a final volume per well of 250 ~LL. From the last plate representing the desired dilution, 100 ~LL was added to the plate cont~ining protein G-bound ACA-6501 and norrnal IgG prepared as described above. The incubation of dilute phage with aPL antibody or control IgG was carried out for 2 hours at 4~C on a flat rotator. After 9 washes with TBS/Tween in an automated plate washer, the IgG-bound phage was eluted with 20 ~L of 0.2 N HCIglycine/0.1% BSA, pH 2.2.
The elution incubation continued for 10 minutes at RT, during which time a new Corning microtitration plate was l~le~)ared cont~ining 20 ~lL of freshly starvedE. coli per well and kept chilled. One hundred forty ~lL of 29 mM Tris was addedto the plate cont~ining the phage eluates in order to neutralize the pH, following which 20 ~L of phage suspension was transferred from each well to the corresponding well in the plate cont~inin& starved E. coli. After a 10 minute incubation at 37~C, 200 ~L 2YT/dil Tet was added and incubation carried out an SUBSTlTUrE SHEEr ~WIE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 additional 30 minutes at 37~C. Using multichannel pipettors, 10 ~L from each well was spotted on a large 2YT/Tet agar plate while retaining the original 8x12well pattern and orientation from the last microtitration plate. After allowing the spots to dry for 30 min~ltes, the plate was inr.llbated overnight at 37~C. The following day, eolonies were semi4~ tiL;~ ely seored from 0 to 4+, with 0 symbolizing <10 colonies; +/-, 10-20; 1+, 20-50; 2+, 50-70% confluent; 3+, 70-90% confluent; and 4+ representing >90% confllient colonies. Of the 94 clones that were examined at a dilution of 1:105 [representing 8 I third, 6 fourth, and 7 fifth round clones~. six clones had mic~u~ in~ scores of zero, three seored 1+, 14 scored 2+, 62 scored 3+, and 9 scored 4+. A survey of random clones from the plates representing the second through fifth rounds of biop~nning was earried out by G-track DNA sequencing as described below. The results showed a dramatic drop in sequence diversity by the fourth round of biopanning (see Figure 8), therefore, a seeond plate was micropanned using phage al a dilution of 1:3 X 10 this time including clones from an earlier (second) round. A total of 94 clones were tested, including 29 whieh had scored high at I x l Os dilution ~26 from the 3rd round, I from the 4th found, and 2 from the 5th round] plus 65 clones from the 2nd round that had not been previously tested. Of the 94 elones tested at a dilution of I :3xl 05, 26 scored zero, I I seored +/, 10 seored I +, 13 scored 2+, 34 scored 3+, and zero scored 4+.
G-track DNA Sequencin~
Single-stranded viral DNA was isolated from cultures incubated overnight at 37~C. To prepare cultures, 2YT/Tet, either as 2 mL in tubes or 250 ~IL in mier~ ion plate round-bottom wells, was inoeulated with individual phage from spread plates of previously grown cultures in microtitration plates. The purifieation of phage by 20% PEG/2.5 M NaCI plGcipitalion of eulture supernatants as well as the isolation or release of virion DNA by phenol-chloroform extraction or by alkali denaturation was performed as described in SUBSmUlE SffEEr ff'(ULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 W O 97/46251 PCT~US97/10075 Smith, G.P. and J.K. Scott, "Libraries of peptides and proteins displayed on fil~mentous phage" (1993) Meth. Enzymol. 217:228-257 for cultures in tubes and - as described in Haas, S.J. and G.P. Smith G.P., "Rapid seql~onr,ing of viral DNA
from filamentous phage" (1993) BioTechniques 15:422-431 for phage in microtitration plates. The dideoxy nucleotide chain t~rmin~tion DNA sequencing technique of Sanger et al. (Sanger et al., "DNA sequencing with chain terrnin~ting inhibitors" (1970) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 74:5463-5467) was carried out using acommercial Sequenase kit (U.S. Biochemical/ Amersharn, Arlington Heights, IL) as described by Smith and Scott, supra, for tube culture phage DNA and as in Haas and Smith~ supra, for phage DNA from microtitration plates. By using only the ddCTP termination mixture, G tracking or the sequence pattern suggested by asingle base (G~ was obtained following electrophoresis on 7%
polyacrylamide/urea sequencing gels and exposure by autoradiography. Standard gel electrophoresis and autoradiography procedures were followed (Sarnbrook et al., supJ~a) G-tracking of 76 clones from the mi~;lop~ g plate tested at a phage dilution of l:I X I05 from the ACA-6501 library screen reve~led l I unique sequences, while 64 clones from the second microp~nning plate tested at a pha~e dilution of I :3 X 105 showed 30 unique sequences. Conventional DNA
sequencing using all four dideoxynucleotide triphosphates was applied to the phage clones with the highest miclop~-t-;l-g scores and unique sequences and resulted in the 12 sequences shown in Table I for the xyz library.
Phage-Capture F.T TSA
Clones ACA-663S/3A12, 3B3, 3C8, 3A5, 3C9, and 3B7 were grown as 3 mL cultures. Affinity purified ACA-6635 was diluted to 2.5 ~lg/mL in phosphate-buffered saline, pH 7.2, and 100 ~lL added to Immulon-2 microtitration plate wells. After 2 hours, the plates were washed 3 times with TBS/Tween in an automated plate washer with no ~h~kin~. The plate was then blocked with 150 ~lL
SUBS T U E S~Er ~LE 26) .
CA 022~76449 1998-11-23 - WO 97/46251 PCT~US97/10075 0.1 % BSA (globulin-free) in PBS per well. After 1 hour at 4~C, the plate was washed 3 times as previously described. After centrifuging each phage culture 3 minutes at 17,000 x g, each supçrn~t~nt was diluted 1:10 in 0.1% BSA/PBS and 100 ~lL added to each of the wells coated with affinity purified ACA-6635 and then incubated for 2 hours at 4~C. Plates were then washed with TBS/Tween as before. Horseradish peroxidase-conjugated sheep IgG anti-M13 phage antibody (Pharmacia, Inc., Piscataway, NJ) was diluted 1 :5,000 in 0.1 % BSA/PBS and 100 ~L applied to each well. Following incubation for 1 hour at 4~C, the plate was washed 4 times as before. One hundred ~L of substrate prepared according to the conjugate manufacturer's instructions was added to each well. After 19 minutes~
the absorbance at 405 nrn of each well was read in the automated microplate absorbance reader (Biotek, Winooski, VT). The seven clones tested from the ACA-6635 phage library screen were selected because of their high micropanning scores and negative phage-ELISA scores (see below). As shown in Figure 9, three clones (3A12, 3B3, and 3AS) out ofthe seven tested exhibited a very strong immunospecific signal in the phage-capture ELISA.
Phage-F~ ISA
Three mL cultures were prepared from 35 clones previously isolated with affinity purified ACA-6501 in several phage library screens as well as one fUSE 2 phage clone lacking a peptide insert which was used as a control. After centrifugation for 3 minl-tes at 17,000 X g, 100 ~L from each phage supernatant (adjusted to -2 X 1011 particles/mL, based on absorbance) was added to microtitration plate wells ~Falcon, Becton-Dickinson Labware, Lincoln Park, NY) and allowed to incubate overnight at 40~C. Following four washes with TBS 7.4, the plate was blocked with 125 ~lL of 0.5% BSA/TBS for I hour at RT. After another four TBS washes ~00 ~lL of affACA-6501 previously diluted to 2.5 ,u~/mL in TBS/BSA was added to each well and allowed to incubate 1 hour at 37~C. Following an additional four washes, 100 ~L anti-human IgG diluted SUBSTllUrE SHEEr ~IE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 wo 97/46251 PCT/US97/10075 1:1000 in TBS/0.5% Tween was added to each well. After I hour at RT, enzyme substrate was added and the incubation allowed to proceed for 2 hours. Followingthe addition of 50 ~lL 0.2 M Na2HPO4 to stop the reaction, absorbance was measured at 550mn in the automated plate absorbance reader. As shown in Figure 10, seven of the clones had significant signals inthephage-ELISA with ACA-6501: 5A12, 3B6, 3E7, 3B10 (same sequence as 2D7), 2G11, 2H1, and 2H2. The sequences for these clones are shown in Table 2.
Peptide-ELlSA
In the standard protocol, stock solutions of tetrameric peptide in dimethylformamide were diluted 1000 times to 10 llg/mL in pH 9.5 carbonate buffer. Each microtitration plate well was coated overnight at 40~C with 100 ~lLof dilute peptide followed by blocking with buffered albumin. Peptide-coated microtitration plates were incubated 1-2 hours at room temperature with aPL seraat several dilutions starting at 1:50. Following washes, the presence of peptide-bound human IgG was determined with enzyme-conjugated anti-human lgG
according to standard ELISA procedures.
Competiti~e Bindin~ Peptide-ELISA
(A) Each well of an Imrnulon II plate (Dynatech Laboratories, Inc., Chantilly VA) was coated with 100 ~lL of a solution cont~ining 10 ~lg tetravalent peptide ACA 6501/3B10 in 50 mM sodium carbonate, p3I 9.5, containing 35 mM
sodium bicarbonate (Fisher Scientific, Pittsburgh, PA, reagent grade) for at least I
hour at ~T, except for three wells used as blank controls. The liquid was then removed from the wells and 200 ~lL of 0.5% (wt/vol) BSA (Sigma Chemical, St. Louis, MO, #A7638) in TBS was added per well including the blank wells for blocking and incubated for at least I hour at RT. Four 1.5 mL microfuge tubes were numbered I to 4. The following reagents were mixed in the first microfuge tube (Brinkman Instruments, Westbury, NY): 30 ~L of 5% BSA; 284 ~L TBS; 8 SUBSTllUI E SHEEr ~RlJlE 26) - CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O97/46251 PCT~US9711007 ~LL of a stock solution of approximately 400-500 ~lg/mL of monomeric peptide (ACA-5A12 or -CB2 or -3B l O or scrambled -3B 10 as negative control) in TBS, - and 8.2 ~L of 1:10 diluted serum 6501 in 0.5% BSA-TBS. The following - reagents were mixed in the second microfuge tube: 30 ~lL of 5% BSA; 290 ,uL
TBS; 2 ',IL of a stock solution of approximately 400-500 ~g/mL of monomeric peptide (ACA-5A12 or -CB2 or -3B10 or scrarnbled -3B10 as negative control) in TBS; and 8.2 gL of 1:10 diluted serum 6501 in 0.5% BSA-TBS. The following reagents were mixed in the third microfuge tube: 30 ~,IL of 5% BSA, 287 ~L of a 1:10 dilution of approximately 400-500 ~lg/mL of monomeric peptides (5A12, CB2. 3BlO. or scrambled sequence 3B10 control), and 8.2 ,uL of ACA-6501 serum previously diluted 1:10 in 0.5% BSA-TBS. The following reagents were mixed in the fourth Eppendorfmicrofuge tube: 60 ~L 5% BSA; 584 ~L TBS and 16.5 gL of 1:10 diluted serum 6501 in 0.5% BSA-TBS. The blocked plate was washed 5 times with.TBS. The solution in the first microfuge tube was added to triplicatewells, 100 ~LL per well. Identical amounts of the solutions in the second, third and fourth microfuge tubes were also added to triplicate wells. An aliquot of 100 ,uL
of the solution in the fourth microfuge tube was added to each of the three blocked blanli wells of the microtitration plate. The plate was incubated for I hour at RT
with agitation at 40 rpm in an orbital shaker (American Dade, Miami, FL, RotatorV) and then washed 5 times with TBS. An aliquot of 100 ~L of 1:1000 diluted goat-anti-human-IgG/~lk~line phosphatase conjugate (Zymed, South San Francisco, CA.Cat. no. 62-8422) in 0.5% BSA-TBS was added and incubated for I hour at RT. The plate was then washed 5 times with TBS and the assay was developed by adding 100 ,uL PPMP diluted substrate solution as described in Example 1. After 20 minllte~, the reaction was stopped by adding 50 ~L of 0.2 M
Na2HPO4 (Mallinckrodt, St. Louis, MO., reagent grade) per well. The optical density was read at 550 mn in a microplate reader (Bio-Tek Instrurnents, Winooski, VT, Model EL 311). The optical density at 550 mn versus the amount of the peptide per well was plotted in Graph Pad Prizm (Graph Pad Software, Inc SUBSmU~E SHEEr ~lllLE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 Wo 97/46251 PCT/US97/10075 San Diego, CA). The amount of peptide required for 50~/u inhibition of binding of serum 6501 to tetravalent 3B10 was calculated from the graph.
(B) Immulon I(~) 96-well, flat-bottom, polystyrene microtitration plates (Dynatech Laboratories, Inc., Chantilly, VA) were coated with 30 ~L/well of cardiolipin (CL, 50 gg; Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO) in ethanol. Two control wells received 30 ~lL ethanol only. After overnight evaporation at 4~C, each well was blocked with 200 ~lL of 5% (w/v) fish gelatin in PBS for 2 hours at RT. The CL-coated, blocked plate was washed 5 times with TBS and then to each well was added ~2-GPI as 100 ,uL of 2.3% (v/v in PBS) IgG-depleted human serum (Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO) and incubated 2 hours at RT.
During this incubation, variable amounts of each of six peptides were mixed with 22 ~L ACA-6501 serum diluted with 3% fish gelatin in 1:1 TBS/PBS
(final dilution of 1 :400) in a final volume of 220 ~lL using Eppendorf microcentrifugetubes. Specifically,intube#l weremixed 181.3 ~Lof3%fish gelatin in TBS-PBS, 16.7 ~lL of peptide stock solution plus 22 ~L of ACA-6501 serum diluted 40 times in 3% fish gelatin/TBS-PBS. Stock solutions ranged from 450-800 ~lg/mL for peptides #951 (diserine non-cyclized negative control), #952 (a lot of LJP 69()), and thioethers CCTE-3G3, CHTE-3G3, HCTE-3G3 and HHTE-3G3. To tube #2 the following were added: 148 ~L fish gelatin/TBS-PBS~
50 ~L of peptide stock solution, plus 22 ~L of 40 times diluted ACA6501 serum.
Tube #3 contained 48 ~lL fish gelatin/TBS-PBS, 50 ~lL of peptide stock solution,plus 22 ~L of 40 times diluted ACA-6501 serum. The control tube #4 received 396 IlL fish gelatin/TBS-PBS and 44 IlL of 40 times diluted ACA-6501 serum (no peptide). Each of the tubes incubatçd for approximately 1 hour at RT.
The CL/~2-GPI microtitration plate was washed 5 times with TBS and 100 -- ,uL aliquots in duplicate from Eppendorf tubes # 1, 2, 3, and 4 cont~ining the antibody-peptide (or no peptide mixtures) were added to the wells. A volume of 100 ~L from tube #4 was added to the duplicate control wells containing no cardiolipin. The microtitration plate was incubated for 1 hour at RT with agitation SUBSmUlE SHEEr ~UlE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 at 40 rpm in an orbital shaker (American Scientific, Rotator V), washed 5 times with TBS and then 100 ~LL of 1:1000 goat anti-human IgG :~lk~line phosphatase conjugate (Zymed, Cat No. 62-8422) in 0.5% (wlv) BSA-TBS was added.
Following incubation for I hour at RT, the microtitration plate was again washed5 times with TBS and the calorimetric eszyme detection developed by adding 100 ~L of PMPP solution (7.8 g phenolphthalein monophosphate plus 69.5 g of 2-amino-2-methyl-1-propanol in 100 mL water stock solution diluted 1 :26 with water). After 21 minutes, the reaction was stopped by adding 50 ~L of 0.2 M
Na2HP04 (Mallinckrodt) to each well. Absorbance at 550 mn was read in a microplate reader (13ioTek InstnllnPnt~, Model EL 31 1). Absorbance vs. peptide added was plotted on Graph Pad Prism (Graph Pad Software, Inc.) as shown in Figure 12. The amount of peptide that inhibited ACA-6501 binding by 50%, the IC50, was calculated from the graph at the intersection of l~alf-maximal absorbance with amount of peptide added.
(C) Nunc Maxisorp~) 96-well, flat-bottom microtitration plates were coated with 100 ~IL/well of purified human P2-glycoprotein I (Perlmrnune, Rockville, MD) at 10 ~lg/well in PBS. Two control wells received 100 ~L PBS
onl!~. After two hours incubation at room temperature, the liquid was removed.
Thc coated plate was blocked for 2 hours at room temperature with 200~LL/well of2() PBS cont~ining 2% (w/v) nonfat dry milk (Carnation, Glendale, CA) and 0.4%
(w/v) Tween 80 (Calbiochem, San Diego, CA). The blocking solution was also used as a reagent diluent.
During the second hour of incubation, variable amounts of each of four . _ .
test peptides were mixed with 2211L of ACA-6501 serum diluted with sample 2~ diluent in a fmal volume of 220,uL using Eppendorf microcentrifuge tubes.
Specifically, in tube #I, 188 ~L of sample diluent, 10 ~L of peptide stock solution (2 mg - 4 mg/mL diluent), and 22 ~L of AC-6501 serum diluted 1 :35 in sample diluent were added. To tube #2, 158 ~L sample diluent, 40 ,uL peptide stock solution and 22 ~L of I :35 diluted ACA-6501 serum were added. Tube #3 SUBSllTU~ SHEl' ff~(ULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 contained 38 liL sample dituent, 160 IlL peptide stock solution and 22 ~lL of 1 :35 diluted ACA-6501 sertim. The control tube, tube 94, contained 396 IlL sample diluent and 44 ~lL of 1:35 diluted ACA-6501 serum (no peptide). Each ofthe tubes was incubated for approximately I hours at room temperature S The ~2-GPI microplate was washed S times with TBS and 100 ~lL of themixtures contained in Eppendorf tubes 91, 2, 3 and 4 was added to duplicate wells of the microplate. 100 ~LL of the contents of tube #4 was added to each of the duplicate control wells that were not coated with ,B2-GPI. The plate was incubated for I hour at room temperature, washed 5 times with TBS and 100 ~lL of 1:1000 goat anti-human IgG/A-P conju~ate (Zymed, Cat. No. 62-8422) diluted in sample diluent buffer was added. Following incubation for I hour at room temperature, the plate was again washed 5 times with TBS and the calorimetric enzyme detection developed by adding 100 ',lL PPMP solution (7.8 g phenolphthalein monophosphate and 69.5 g 2-amino-2-methyl-1-propanol in 100 mL water stock solution diluted I :26 with water). After 22 minutes, the reaction was stopped with 50 IlL of 0.2 M Na2HPO4 (Mallinckrodt) added per well. A55Onm was read in a microplate reader (Bio-Tek Instruments, Model EL 311). Absorbance vs. peptide added was plotted on Graph Pad Prism (Graph Pad Software, Inc.) às shown in Figurc 21. The amount of peptide that inhibited ACA-6501 binding by 50~/0, the IC-50~ was calculated from the graph at the intersection of half-maximal absorbance with the amount of peptide added.
Example 5: Truncation F~periments of Peptide 3B 10 and the Resultin~ Peptide Coml-etition F.T lSA Results Microtitration plates (96-well, flat bottom polystyrene, Irnmulon-2, Dynatech Laboratories~ Inc., Chantilly, VA) were coated with 100 ~L/well for I
hour at RT with tetrameric ACA-6501/3B10 peptide at 10 ~g/mL in carbonate buffer, pH 9.6 (15 mM Na2CO3/35 mM NaHCO3). After the liquid from the wells was removed. each well was blocked for I hour at RT with 200 ,uL 0.5% (wt/vol) SUBSrllUrE SHEEr (I'~UlE 26) --CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 BSA (globulin-free, cat. no. A7638, Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO) in TBS.
Three wells on the plate were left uncoated by tetravalent peptide to serve as blank control wells.
During the blocking step, each soluble, monomer peptide to be tested was set up in three test tubes (Eppendorf micro test tubes, Brinkm~nn Instruments, Westbury, NY) each cont~inin~; 30 ~lL 5% BSA/TBS, 8.2 ~IL ACA-6501 serum (at 1: 10 dilution with 0.5% BSA/TBS), plus a variable volume of the peptide/-FBS
stock and the necessary volume of TBS buffer to yield a final volume of 330 ~L.
The 330 ~L volume was sufficient to generate triplicate 100 ',lL sarnples for each peptide concentration that was tested for its ability to block ACA-6501 bindin~ to the tetravalent peptide-coated plate. For peptide 139, which was truncated at the amino terminus and lacks the framework ala-gly contribution normally tested. theconcentration of the stock solution was approximately 340-400 ~g/mL TBS and aliquots of 19 !lL, 75 ~L. and 292 ~L were removed to prepare the three peptide concentration tubes. For peptide 142 (lacking only the N-terminal ala) and peptide ] 4~ (not truncated). stock solution concentrations were 400-500 ~g/mL in TBS. Aliquots from each stock solution of 1 ~,lL, 4 IlL, and 16 ~lL were removedto set up the three concentration tubes for each peptide. For the peptide monomer control tube (lacking peptide), a tube with a final volume of 660 ~lL was prepared cont~inin, 60 IlL 5% BSA, I 6.5 ~L of a I: 10 dilution of ACA-6501 and 583.5 IlLTBS, i.e., the same final concentrations (0.5% BSA and ACA-6501 serum at 1 :400) as the 330 ilL tubes but with twice the volume and without peptide.
Following the blocking incubation, the plate coated with tetravalent peptide was washed S times with TBS. From each 330 IlL tube cont~inin~
peptides 139, 142 and 143 at different concentrations, 100 IlL was added to coated triplicate wells. Three 100 IlL aliquots from the 660 ~L control tube without peptide were each added to coated wells and three additional I 00 ~lL ali~uots were each added to uncoated blank wells. The plate was incubated at 40 rev/min on a rotar~ orbital shaker (Rotator V, American Dade. Miami, FL) for I hour at RT andthen washed 5 times with TBS. One hundred ~L/well of goat antihuman SUBS~lllUI~ SffEEr ~(ULE 26) - CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 971462~1 PCTAUS97/10075 IgG/alkaline phosphatase conjugate (Cat. no. 62-8422, Zymed, South San Francisco, CA) diluted l :1000 in BSA/TBS was added to the microplate. After incubation for I hour at RT, the plate again was washed S times with TBS. Color development followed the addition of 100 ~lL/well of freshly prepared dilute PPMP substrate solution. A dilute solution of PPMP (phenolphthalein monophosphate, cat. no. P-5758, Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO) was prepared by making a 1:26 dilution with water of the PPMP stock solution (0. 13 M PPMP, 7.8 M amino-2-methyl-1-propanol adjusted to pH l O.15 with HCI).
After 30 minutes, the reaction was stopped by adding 50 ~lL/well of 0.2M
l 0 Na2HPO3 (reagent grade, Mallinckrodt, St. Louis, MO). Absorbance measurements at 550 nrn were carried out on a microplate reader (Bio-Tek Instruments, Winooski, VT) and the As50nm vs. peptide added per well results plotted using Graph Pad Prizrn (Graph Pad Software, Inc., San Diego, CA). As shown on Figure l l, a horizontal line has been drawn corresponding to half-maximal the binding reaction obtained in the absence of monomer peptide competitive inhibition. The amount of peptide necessary for 50% inhibition can be read at the intersection of this line with the plot for each peptide tested. The 50% inhibition values are shown on Figure 12. The results indicate that while the loss of the N-terminal Ala had no negative conse~uences, the additional loss of Gly increased by about 8-fold the concentration necessary to achieve 50%
inhibition.
F.Y~rle 6: Substitution of ~l~ha n ethyl proline into 3B l O ~nd the resultin~
~.r,lSAs Testing of peptides ACA-6501/3BlO and analogs in which prolines at the 3 and 9 position were replaced by a-Me-Pro was carried out using the methodology described in Exarnple 5. Peptides 3B10, 726 (aMe-Pro substituted at the 3 position), 727 (aMe-Pro substituted at the 9 position), and 72B (aMe-Pro substituted at both the 3 and 9 positions) were tested as soluble monomer peptides SUBSTllU~E SHEET ~UlE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 W O 97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 in a competitive- binding ELISA using tetramer peptide 3B 10-coated microtitration plates and ACA-6501 serum.
Microtitration plates were coated with tetramer 3B10 peptide as described for Example 5. For each of the four peptides tested, three peptide concentrations were prepared in tubes. As in Example 5, these twelve tubes had final concentrations of 0.5% BSA/TBS and ACA-6501 serum at a final dilution of 1 :400 in a final volume of 330 ~L. All peptide stock solutions were at 400-500 ~g/mL TBS. To tubes cont~inin~ 30 ~lL of 5% BSA/TBS and 8.2 ~L of ACA-6501 serum (diluted 1:10 with 0.5% BSA/TBS), aliquots of I ~lL, 4 ~L, or 16 ~lL of each of the four peptide stock solutions were added in addition to an applu~liate volume of TBS to achieve a final volume of 330 ~lL. A control tube with no competitor peptide present was prepared with a final volume of 660 ~lL as described in Example 5.
Following the blocking incubation of the tetravalent peptide-coated plate, three 100 ,~LL aliquots from each of the peptide concentration tubes for each of the four peptides as well as the control tube cont~ining no peptide and blank controls were tested as described in Example 5. The microtitration plate ELISA proceduresas well as the data handling were perfonned as described in Example 5. As shown in Figure 13, peptide 727, where a-Me-Pro was substituted at the 9 position, wassignificantly more active than unmodified peptide 3B10 or the analog with ~oth prolines changed (peptide728). Peptide726, which was substituted at position 3, lost activity as a result of the substitution.
Example 7: Abbréviated Description of Screen with 6626 Antibody and the Corresponding Sequences Affinity purified ACA-6626 (AffACA-6626) was isolated by affinity purification from 8 mL of ACA-6626 plasma as previously described. AffACA-6626 (10 ,ug) was incubated with the epitope xy'z phage library consisting of a pool of all p-III component libraries in a final volume of l O0 ~lL as previously SUBSIl~ SHE~ ~ULE 26) --CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 W 0 97/46251 PCT~US97/10075 described for ACA-6501 biop~nning. Following three rounds of biop~nning, randomly selected phage from the second and third rounds were tested by micropanning. Only a few clones were weakly immunopositive at a 1: 1000 dilution. An additional 4th round of biop:~nning was carried out. Miclop~
of 94 fourth round clones revealed 43 irnmunopositives, some at phage dilutions as high as 1: 100,000. G-Tracking DNA sequencing of the 43 immunopositive clones carried out as previously described for ACA-6501 revealed 5 unique sequences. After conventional four base DNA sequencing, the translated amino acid sequences of Table 3 were obtained.
Example 8: Identification of Sequences Specific for the ACA from Patient The epiX~ Z phage display library was screened using methods similar to those in Example 4 with ACA affinity purified antibody from patient number 6644. A colony blot assay as described previously was employed as the final identification step prior to peptide synthesis. Approximately 150 colonies were plated on the original nitrocellulose membrane and assayed. Antibody from patient 6644 was used at a concentration of 1 ~lg/mL. Of the 150 colonies platedon the nitrocellular membrane and assayed, only 4 were strongly positive and 2 weakly positive in this screen. Sequencing of the inserts of the six positive phage selected by this screen revealed that the inserts were all derived from the 8-mer library with a free amino-terminus (epiZ):
Gly-Ile-Leu-Ala-Leu-Asp-Tyr-Val-Gly-Gly (3 inserts) Gly-Ile Leu-Thr-Ile-Asp-Asn-Leu-Gly-Gly (1 insert) Gly-Ile-Leu-Leu-Asn-Glu-Phe-Ala-Gly-Gly (2 inserts) SUBSlllUrE SHEEl ff'(VLE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 Example 9: Sllmm~y of Ph~e T ibrary Screen with ACA-6641.
AffACA-6641 was isolated from 4 mL of plasma taken from patient number 6641. AffACA-6641 (10 llg) was incubate~ with the pooled p-III phage libraries in a final volume of 100,uL as described previously. Following four rounds of biop~nning, 45 clones from the 3rd and 4th rounds were tested by microp~nning Of the 45, 23 scored negative. The 3rd round phage yielded two clones that scored 4+, two that scored 3+ and two that scored 2+. From the 4th round, one clone scored 4+, one scored 3+ and three scored 2+. G-tracking DNA
sequencing revealed six unique sequences. Only one, clone 3G3, was strongly positive in the phage-capture ELISA. Four base DNA sequencing gave the following translated peptide sequence: _ CLGVLGKLC.
~xample 10: Peptide conjugation to non-~mmunogenic. multivalent carriers Several tetravalent platforms for the development of B cell tolerogens have been developed as described in co-owned and co-pending U.S. Patent Applications, Serial Nos., 08/118, 055, filed September 8, 1993, 08/152,506, filed November 15, 1993, and U.S. Patents Nos. 5,268,454, 5,276,013 and 5.162,515 which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. ~andidate peptidesselected by aPL antibody screens of epitope libraries are conjugated and tested for modifications of immunochemical behavior such as antibody binding.
Non-inununogenic multivalent platforms with amine groups are synthesized as shown in the following scheme.
SUBSTllUrE SHEr ~WlE 26) , .
Amine on Platfolm - Carbox~rl on Pe~tide C8atN(C~2) sCONH ~ r NHCC)(C~2)6NHCaZ
o~o~lL~N
C8Z11N(Clt~sCONH~ 12 ~ NffOO(C~2)sNHC8 PdlC
c~clohexane/EtOH
~2N(C~23scoNH~ ~ ~ NHCO(CH~)sNH~
N--II~o~,O~ o~N
H2N(C~sCONH~ 2 2-~oo(c~6NH2 PNH~(P = I IF ~3b;10 p~otec~n~ ~a~
f3 ~~ amlno t~rmi~s and sldo ~;) OMF
PHN p~OHN(~)sCO~ ~ N~tCO(C~)6NI IOO~HP
N~l ~ o ~ o,lL N
5 PHN-p~de~OHN(C~OONH ~ ~ NHCO~CH~NHCC~pep~NHP
H,2N ~COHN((~)6CO~I~~HCC)~ sNHCO~de Nt~2 ~ o ~2N1~XK~IOOHN(C~ C3~ NHC~
Compo--nd 2: ~ solution of 8.0 g (5 .7 mmol) of 1 in 50 mL of absoiute EtOH and 35 mL of cyclohexene was placed under nitrogen, and 500 mg of 10% Pd on carbon was added. The mixture was refluxed with stirring for two hours. When cool, the mixture was filtered through Celite and concentrated to give 5.0 g of 2 as an oil. IH NMR (50/50 CDCI3/CD30D) d 1.21 (m, 8H), 1.49 (m, 8H), 1.62 (m, 8H), 2.19 (t, J - 7.4 Hz, 8H), 2.67 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 8H), 3.36 (bd s, 16H), 3.67 (s, 4H), 3.71 (m, 4H), 4.21 (m, 4H).
Protected pepti~ with free ~rboxyl (PH~-peptide-CO2~
A peptide is synth~si7~1 with standard solid phase methods using FMOC
ch-?mi~try on a Wang (p-alkoxybenzyl) resin, using trifluoroacetic acid (TFA) stable pr~ lillg groups (benzyl ester or cyclohexyl ester on carboxyl groups and SUBSlTrl~ SHEr ~E 26) W O 97/46251 PCT~US97/1007 carbobenzyloxy (CBZ) OR amino groups). Amino acid residues are added sequentially to the amino terminus. The peptide is removed from the resin with TFA to provide a peptide with one free carboxyl group at the carboxy terminus and all the other carboxyls and amines blocked. The protected peptide is purified by reverse phase HPLC.
Peptide - Platform Conju~ate, 4 The protected peptide (0.3 mmol) is dissolved in 1 mL of dimethylformamide (DM'F), and to the solution is added 0.3 mmol of diisopropylcarbodiimide and 0.3 mmol of l-hydroxybenzotriazole hydrate (HOBT). The solution is added to a solution of 0.025 mmol tetraamino platforrn, 2 in 1 mL of DMF. W'hen complete, the DMF is removed under vacuum to yield a crude fully protected conjugate 3. The conjugate, 3, is treated with hydrofluoric acid (HF) in the presence of anisole for 1 hour at 0~ to give conjugate 4.
Purification is accomplished by plcl~a dlive reverse phase HPLC.
The following scheme shows the ~tt~ ment of an amino group of a peptide to a carboxy group on a platform.
- Carboxyl on Platform - Amine on L i~and ~2N(cH2)6coNH~ ~ NHCO(CH~sNH2 ) 1~ ~ o ~ N
H2N(CH2)sCONH ,, NHCO(CH2)tN~2 2 succmlc anhydride H(~2CCH2~H2COHN(C~sCONH ~ NHco~cl~sNHcocl~t2co2 N~l~ ~ O ~
H~2coHNta~scoNHJ 5 OCC~NHS (--NHCO(CH2)sNHCO~CO~
H2N-p~ptide CONH2 (~de cnains ~otedea~wi h HF
1 , labUe protectirlg ~roupS) pep NHOCa~2GH2COHN(C~sCONH~ r t~cO~C~2)d~CON
N~~ ~o~o~lLN
p3~NHOCCH2a~zCOHN(C~2)sCONH ~ ,r f~ 2 --NHOO(C~sNHCOa kC112CONH~
pep = protect~3d pepti~e ' wNHocc~l2(~2coHN(c~coNH~ ~ NHCO(C~ sNHOI~2C~Hpe N~l' a~ ~0--1~ N
pcpNHOC~l COllN(C~ 1 2 --N~O~
SU~mU~E SHEEr ~ULE 2S) . .
CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 Compound 5 - Platform with Four Carboxylic Acid Groups Succinic anhydride ( 1.0 g, 10 mmol) is added to a solution of 861 mg (1.0 mmol) of 2 and 252 mg (3.0 mrnol) of NaHCO3 in 20 mL of 1/1 dioxane/H2O, and the mixture is stirred for 16 hours at RT. The mixture is acidified with lN HCI and concentrated. The concentrate is purified by silica gel chromatography to provide 5.
Protected peptide with free ~mine (H2N-peptide-CONH2~
A peptide is synthesized with standard solid phase methods on an amide resin~ which resulted in a carboxy termin~l arnide after cleavage frQm the resin, using TFA stable protecting groups (benzyl ester or cyclohexyl ester on carboxylgroups and CBZ on amino groups). Amino acid residues are added sequentially to the amino terminus using standard FMOC chemistry. The peptide is removed from the resin with trifluoroacetic acid to provide a protected peptide with a free amine linker. The protected peptide is purified by reverse phase HPLC.
Peptide -Platforrn ConJI~ate. 7 A solution of 0.05 mmol of protected peptide with free amine, (H2N-peptide-CONH2), 0.1 mmol of diisopropylethyl amine,-and 0.01 mmol of 5 in 1 mL of DMF is prepared. BOP reagent (benzotriazol- 1 -yloxy-tris(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate) (0.1 mmol) is added, and the mixture is stirred until the reaction is complete as evidenced by analyticalHPLC. The peptide protecting groups are removed by tre~tment with HF in the presence of anisole at 0~ to give conjugate with protecting groups removed, 1 Compound 1 is purified by plel)alalive reverse phase HPLC.
The following scheme shows how to attach a sulfhydryl lir~er to the amino terminus of a peptide and, in turn, attach the peptide/linker to a tetrabromoacetylated platform to give compound 13.
SUBSIllUrE SHEEr ~(IJLE 26) ' CA 02256449 1998-11-23 . 78 Haloacetyl on Platforrn and Sulfhydryl on Peptide tri~ohor~ylmethanol H2S0~
HS(CH2)2C02H ~rS(CH2)2CO2H
E~OAc 2 R f~rut~op~7en~
DCC
1) H~N-p~p ~ r C~2CH2 - . N~
Jiu~
HS(CH2)2CONH~ r-S(CH2)2C0~ No2 1 1 2~ tr~luoro2c~ic ocid ~Y
B-C~12COHN(C~)s;CONH~ ~ NHco(cH2)sNH
N~l~c~ O~t~N
BrC1 12COHN(Cf.~2)sCONH 1~ t'll lCC~(Cf~2)sNHCOC~2f3<
F~NHCo(ct 12)2SCH2COHN(CI~2)sCONH~ ~ N~CC(Cl~12)si~1COC~2S(C~2)2 N~~
pel~NHCO(aO25C~12COHN(a~s~NHJ 13 2 (~ N~co~ 2)sNHcocH2s(c~)2 Con~3ound 9 Concentrated sulfuric acid ( 100 ~L) was added to a 60~C solution of 4.48 g (17.2 mmol) oftriphenyl methanol and 1.62 g (15.3 mmol, 1.3 mL) of 3-mercaptopropionic acid in 35 mL of EtOAc. The mixture was stirred at 60~C
for 10 minutes, allowed to cool to room temperature (RT), and placed on ice for I hour. The resulting white solid was collected by filtration to give 4.52 g (75%) of 9.
Compolmd 10 Dicyclohexyl carbodiimide (DCC) (2.41 g, 1 1.7 mmol) was added to a 0~C solution of 2.72 g (7.8 mmol) of 2 and 1.08 g (7.8 mmol) of p-nitrophenol in41 mL of CH2C I2 The mixture was stirred for 16 hours allowing it to come to RT. The mixture was filtered to remove N,N-dicyclohexylurea (DCU), and the SUBSmUrE SHEEr ffUllE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 W O 97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 filtrate was concentrated. The residue was cryst~lli7~d from hexane/CH2CI2 to give 3.17 g (86%) of 10 as pale yellow crystals.
Con~ound 11 - cyclic thioether peptide with rner~topropionyl linker S attached A solution of a cyclic thioether peptide (an analogue of a disulfide cyclized peptide in which one sulfur was replaced with a CH2) and sodium bicarbonate in water and dioxane was treated with p-nitrophenyl ester 10. If the peptide contains Iysine, it must be al.proJ~I;ately blocked. The resulting modified peptide was treated with trifluoroacetic acid to provide thiol linker modified peptide 1 1 Compound 13 - coniu~ate of cyclic thioether peptide ~nd bromoacetylated platform To a He sparged solution of 0.10 mmol of thiol modified peptide 1 1 in 100 mM sodiurn borate pH 9, was added 0.025 of bromoacetylated platform L2 as a 40 mg/mL solution in 9/1 MeOH/H2O). The solution was allowed to stir under N2 atmosphere until conjugation was complete as evidenced by ~IPLC. The conjugate was purified by reverse phase HPLC.
SUBSllIU~ SHEEI ~IULE 26) wO 97/46251 PCT/uSs7/l00 Example 12: Synthesis of LJP 685 1) is~butyldllotofotms~e N-., . ~,ll .~1, . IVI pl " ~e, 'THf C02~1 2) N-hydroxy-2-mcr~plopyridin~3 BOCHN~-- Et~N BOCHN~/ CH2-Br Co2c~cH~)3 co2C(CH?)3 4 <litlvl.llcn~,t f=\
80C-~ly-pro-CO2H DCC, THf80C~ly-pto-CO~c>--NO2 ~CH~)3SS--~CO2H ~) NHS/DCC(CH3),SS~cONl 12 NHFMOC 2) ~IH~HCO~ NHF~10C
N-~MOC-t~utyl~hiocysteine 1) P8u~ aHCO3 d:o~n~ l2~
2) ~)~npound 1 K~'COI ~
" x~2O
gocNH-Gly~ro-coH~clt~s~coNH2BOCHNrCH7 S~CONH2 18 C02H NHFMOC ~ 1 7 CO2C(CH3)3 NI~FMOC
~) rFA~H20tHOCH2CH2SH
~) compound 15 solid phase NaHCO~dio~ne~H2O
peptide synthesis E3ocNH~-p-coNH~,rcH2--S CONH2 l l 20 ~H-I-L~02H NHCO-R(Pn~c)-D(Ot~u)-P~-A-L-NI IFMOC
1) OBU/CH3CN H2N~-P-COHN~, CH~S ~CONH2 2) C~PPAlCH3Crllpyridine l l 3) TFA/H2Orll, -i5 le~~DTlpheno/ CO NH
(90%) ~ HN-I~-~-A-P~'-D-R-CO
21 (LJP 6~5) y-bromo-N-BOC-a-~minobutryic acid t-butyl ester. compolmtl 14: A solution of 4.û3 g (13.3 mmol) of N-BOC-glutamic acid-a-t-butyl ester and 1.61 mL (1.48 g, 14.6 mmol) of N-methylmorpholine in 40 mL of dry THF under N2 atmosphere was cooled to 15~. Isobutylchloroformate (1.73 mL, 1.82 g, 13.3 mmol) was added to the mixture dropwise. The mixture was stirred for 10 minllte~ and a solution of 2.03 g (16.û mmol) of N-hydroxy-2-mercaptopyridine in 8 mL of THF
was added followed by 2.23 mL (1.62 g, 16.0 mmol) of Et3N. The mixture was covered with foil to keep out light and allowed to stir at room temperature for SUBSrllllFE SHEEr ~UIE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 I hour. The mixture was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated on the rotaryevaporator taking care to minimi7~ exposure to light. The concentrate was dissolved in 20 mL of BrCC 13 and the solution was cooled to -70~C. The solid was placed under vacuum, then purged with N2, allowed to come to room S temperature, placed in a 20~ water bath, and ilTadiated from above at close range with a 500 W s.ml~mp for 5 minlltes The mixture was concentrated on the rotary evaporator and purified by silica gel chromatography (40 mm X 150 mm, toluene was used as eluent until UV active material finished eluting, 2% EtOAc/toluene (500 mL), 5% EtOAc/toluene (500 mL). Impure fractions were repurified. Pure l 0 fractions by TLC (Rf 0.23, 5% EtOAc/toluene) were combined and concentrated to give 3.23 g (72%) of compound 14 as a waxy solid.
N-P~OC-Elycylproline-4-nitrophenyl ester. con~ound 15: A solution of 3.0 g (11.6 mmol) of N-BOC-glycylproline and 1.93 g (13.9 mmol) of 4-nitrophenol in 82 mL of dry THF was cooled to 0~C and 3.34 g (16.2 mmol) of DCC was added.
The mixture was stilTed at 0~C for 1 hour, the ice bath was removed, and the mixture was stirred for 16 hours at room temperature. HOAC (579 ~lL) was added to the mixture and it was allowed to stir for 30 minutes. The mixture was kept in the freezer for 30 minutes and filtered under vacuum. The filtrate was concentrated and purified by silica gel chromatography (18 X 150 mm bed, 2.5%
EtOAc/97.5% CH2C 12/l %HOAc). Traces of acetic acid were removed by concentrating from dioxane several times on the rotary evaporator. The concentrate was lrilu-dl~d with 3/l hexane Et2O and the reslllting white solid was collected by filtration to give 4.1 g (90%) of compound 15 as a white solid; TLCRf 0.09, 40/60/l EtOAc/hexanelHOAc; lH NMR(CDC13) o 1.09-2.55 (m, 4H), 1.48 (s, 9H), 3.47-3.77 (m, 2H), 4.05 (m, 2H), 4.74 ~m, lH), 5.45 (bd s, lH), 7.35 (d, 2H), 8.30 (d, 2H).
N-FMOC-S-t-butylthiocysteine~mide. com~ound 16 A solution of 5.0 g (11.6 mmol) of FMOC-S-t-butylthiocysteine and 1.33 g (11.6 mmol) of N-SUBSlllUlE SHEEr ~UIlE 2B) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 wO 97/46251 PCTtUSg7/10075 hydroxysuccinimide in 115 mL of THF was cooled to 0~C. To the solution was added 3.58 g (17.37 rnmol) of DCC. The mixture was stirred at 0~C for I hour and 42.9 mL of a solution of 1.6 g of (NH4)HCO3 in 50 mL of water was added.
The mixture was stirred for 4.5 hours, allowing the ice bath to gradually warm to room temperature and concentrated on a rotary evaporator to remove THF and give an aqueous phase with white solid. The mixture was stirred with 200 mL of CH2C 12 until most of the solid dissolved, then was shaken with 100 mL of IN
HCI solution. The CH2C 12 layer was washed with 100 mL of saturated NaHCO3 solution~ dried (Na2SO4), and filtered. The filtrate was brought to a boil on a hot plate and crystallized from 300 mL of CH2CI2/hexane to give 4.36 g (87%) of compound 16 as a white solid: mp 127~-129~C; TLC Rf 0.29, 95/5/1 CH2CI./CH3CN/MeOH, IH NMR (CDC13) ~ 1.36 (s, 9H), 3.06-3.24 (m, 2H), 4.25 (t, lH)~ 4.55 (m. 3H). 5.56 (bd s, lH), 5.70 (bd s, lH), 6.23 (bd s, lH); 13c NMR (CD,CI3) 29.8, 41.9, 47.1, 48.5, 54.2, 67.2, 120.0, 125.0, 127.1, 127.8, 141.3, 143.6, 156.1, 172.2. Analysis, Calculated: C, 61.4%; H, 6.1%; N, 6.5%.
~ound: C, 61.5%; H, 6.0%; N, 6.5%.
Compound 17: Water (16.9 mL) was added to 2.91 g (6.75 mmol) of compound 16 in 33.8 mL of dioxane and the solution was sparged with nitrogen for 5-10 minutes. The mixture was kept under a nitrogen atmosphere and I .13 g (13.5 rnrnol) of NaHCO3 was added followed by 1.77 mL (1.44 g, 7.09 mmol) of PBu3. The mixture was stirred at room te~ Idlure for 1 hour and partitioned between 1 X 100 mL of IN HCI and 2 X 100 mL of CH2C 12. The CH2C 12 layers were combined and concentrated and the resulting white solid was partlally dissolved in 33.8 mL of dioxane. Water (9 mL) was added and the mixture was - purged with nitrogen for 5-10 minutes. The mixture was kept under nitrogen atmosphere and 2.17 g (16.9 mmol) of K2CO3 was added followed by 2.63 g (8.1 mmol) of compound 14. The mixture was stirred for 16 hours and partitioned between 1 X 100 mL of lN HCI and 2 X 100 mL of 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2. The CH2Cl2 layers were combined, dried with NaSO4, filtered and concentrated to a SUBSmUrE SHEEr ~lULE 28) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 Wo 97/46251 PCT/us97lloo7s semisolid residue. Purification by silica gel chromatography (1/3 CH3CN/CH2Cl2) gave 3.2 g (80%) of compound 17 as a white solid; TLC Rf 0.27, 1/3 CH3CN/CH2Cl2. Further purification of an analytical sample was done by recryst~lli7ing from hexane/EtOr',c; mp 104-106.5~C; IH NMR (CDCI3) o 1.47 (s, 9H), 1.49 (s, 9H), 1.96 (m, lH), 2.11 (m, lH), 2.69 (m, 2H), 2.88 (m, lH), 3.03 (m, lH), 4.29 (t, lH), 4.36 (m, 2H), 4.S0 (m, 2H), 5.21 (m, lH), 5.49 (m, lH), 5.81 (m, lH), 6.54 (m, lH), 7.34 (t, 2H), 7.42 (t, 2H), 7.61 (d, 2H), 7.80 (d, 2H); 13C-NMR (MeOH) ~ 26.1, 26.7, 28.2, 28.7, 34.8, 54.8, 55.7, 68.1, 80.5, 82.7, 120.9, 126.3, 128.2, 128.8, 142.6, 145.2, 160.0, 162.7, 173.4, 175.8. Analysis, Calculated for C3~H4~N307S: C, 62.08; H, 6.89; N, 7.01. Found: C, 62.23; H, 7.12; N, 7.39.
Compound 18: A solution of 20/1/1 TFA/H2O/mercaptoethanol (23.2 mL) was added to 1.27 g (2.11 mmol) of compound 17. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour and concentrated to a volume of about 3 mL. 50 mL of ether was added to precipitate the product. The resulting solid was washed with two more portions of ether and dried under vacuum to give 812 mg of solid. The solid was suspended in 10.6 mL of dioxane and 10.6 mL of H2O. NaHCO3 (355 mg, 4.22 mmol) was added to the mixture followed by a solution of 1.33 g (3.38 mmol)ofcompound 15in 10.5mLofdioxane. Themixturewasallowedtostirat room temperature for 20 hours and partitioned between 100 mL of lN HCI and 3 X 100 mL of CH2Cl2. The combined CH2Cl2 layers were dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated. Purification by silica gel chromatography (35 X
150 mrn; step gradient, 5195/1 MeOH/CH2CL2/HOAc (1 L) to 10/95/1). Pure fractions were concentrated and the residue was triturated with ether to give 881 mg (60%) of compound 1~ TLC Rf 0.59, 10/90/1 MeOH/CH2Cl2/HOAc; mp 116-117.5~C; IH NMR (CDC13) o 1.41 (s, 9H), 2.00 (m, 2H), 2.18 (m. 2H), 2.56 (m, lH), 2.69 (m, lH), 2.85 (m, 2H), 3.49 (m, 2H), 3.62 (m, 2H), 3.85 (m, 2H), 4.08 (m, lH), 4.12 (m, lH), 4.22 (t, lH), 4.38 (m, lH), 4.49 (m, 2H), 4.61 (m, 2H), 7.78 (d, bd s, lH), 6.12 (bd s, lH), 6.43 (bd s, lH3, 7.35 (d, 2H), 7.40 (d, SUBSTllUrE SHEEr ff'(ULE 26) 2H), 7.61 (d, 2H), 7.78 (d, 2h); 13C NMR (CDCL3) o 25.3, 27.8, 28.6, 29.4, 32.6,35.1, 44.1, 46.9, 47.3, 52.2, 53.9, 61.2, 67.8, 80.8, 120.8, 125.7~ 128.2, 129.0, 142.0, 144.5, 157.6, 157.8, 170.6, 181.2, 182.9, 183.1. Analytical, Calculated for C34H43NsO9S: C, 58.52; H, 6.21; N, 10.03. Found: C, 58.38, H, 6.17; N, 10.20.
S F f FmocHN ~~ ~ F
CH3 ~ F F
c~O Fmoc~N ~ N~
H HBr N~Ht~O~ CO2H
HOBtll~MF (66%) 10a-rnethyl proline 19 N-FMOC-L-Alanyl-L-2-metllylprolin~? co~o--n~ 19: A solution of 2-methylproline (Seebach et al. (1983) JAm. Chem. Soc. 105:5390-5398) (1.00 g5 4.76 mmol), 4.00 g (47.6 mmol) of NaHCO3, and 31 mg (0.23 mmol) of HOBT in 6.9 mL of DMF was cooled to 0~C and 3.18 g (6.66 mmol) of N-FMOC-L-alanine was added. The ~ ~ction was stirred for 1 hour at 0~C, then at room temperature for 18 hours. The mixture was partitioned between 50 mL of EtOAc and 3 X
50 mL of lN HCI. The EtOAc layer was dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated. Purification by silica gel chromatography (step gradient 45/55/1 EtOAc/Hexane/HOAc to 47/53/1 EtOAc/Hexane/HOAc to 50/50/1 EtOAc/Hexane/HOAc) gave 1.72 g (86%) of compound 19 as a white solid. The product was concentrated several times from dioxane to remove traces of acetic acid: mp 59-60~C; IH NMR (CDC13) ~ 1.39(d, 3H), 1.93 (m, 2H), 2.06 (m, 2H), 3.78 (m, 2H), 4.22 (m, lH), 4.40 (d, 2H), 4.56 (m, lH), 5.09 (t, lH)5 5.69 (d, lH), 7.32 (t, 2H), 7.42 (t, 2H), 7.62 (d, 2H), 7.78 (d, 2H); 13C NMR (CDCl3) ~ 17.8, 21.8, 23.8, 37.9, 47.1, 48.5, 65.9, 67.0, 120.0, 125.1, 127. 1, 127.7, 141.3, 144.1, 155.6, 172.9, 175.1.
N-FMOC-L-T eucinyl-HMPF~-~RHA resin: A solution of N-FMOC-L-leucine in 22.5 mL of CH2C12 and a few drops of DMF was prepared and cooled to 0~C. To SUBS~lIUlE SHEEI ffWLE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 Wo 97/46251 PCT/US97/10075 the solution was added 1.71 ml (1.38 g, 10.9 mmol) of diisopropylcarbodiimide (DIC) and the mixture was stirred for 20 minutes at 0~C. The mixture was concentrated to an oil; meanwhile, enough DMF approximately 3 mL) was added to 2.5 g (0.87 mmol/g, 2.18 mmol) HMPB-MBHA resin (Nova Biochem) to swell the resin. The concentrated oil was dissolved in a minim~l amount of DMF
(approximately 1 mL) and added to the swelled resin followed by a solution of 266 mg (2.18 mmol) of DMAP dissolved in approximately 1 mL of DMF. The mixture was gently rocked for 1 hour and washed (2 X DMF, 2 X MeOH, 2 X
DMF, 2 X MeOH). The resin was dried under vacuum to give 2.77 g (85%) and the substitution was determined by the Geisen test to be 0.540 mmol/g.
N-FMOC-linear peptide with t-butyl ester on aspartic acid ;~n~l Pmc ~roup on ar~inine and with thioether in~ert~ compound~Q: This peptide was prepared by standard FMOC synthesis on N-FMOC-L-leucinyl-HMPb-MBRA resin. Three equivalents of amino acid HOBT and (DIC) were used for each coupling step with the exception of the coupling step of compound 18. Two equivalents of compound 18 were used with three equivalents of HOBT and diisopropy}carbodiimide. Each step was monitored by using 10 ~L of bromophenol blue indicator. Completeness of the reaction was also assessed with a ninhydrin test (beads turn blue for incomplete reaction with 1 mg is heated at1 00~C for 2 minutes with one drop of pyridine and one drop of 5% ninhydrin in EtOH and one drop of 80% phenolin EtOH). Thus, 1.13 mg (0.613 mmol) of resin was used to prepare the peptide. After the final coupling step, cleava~e from the resin was accomplished by treatment with 15 mL of a solution of 1%
trifluoroacetic acid in CH2C12 for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes, the solution was filtered under pressure into 30 mL of 10% pyridine in MeOH. This was repeated ten times and the filtrates which contained peptide as evidenced by HPLC (C18, ~radient, 60/40/0.1 CH3CH/H20/TFA to 90/10/0.1 CH3CN/H201TFA, 210 mn, 1 mL/min, 4.6 mm X 250 mm column) were combined and concentrated. The SUBSrllUTE SHEEr (I'~ULE 26) - CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 97/46251 PCT~US97tlOO75 concentrate was dissolved in 40 mL of 10% HOAc solution and purified by HPLC
to give 0.528 g (49%) of peptide ~.
Conversion of peptide 20 to cyclic peptide 21 (removal of FMOC ~roup cyclization and removal of protecti~ grou~s: A solution (5 mL) of 99 ~lL of DBU in 10 mL of CH3CN was added to 96 mg (0.052 mmol) of peptide ~Q. The solution was stirred for I hour and concentrated to a residue. The residue was triturated with 2 X 10 mL of Et2O to give a white solid. The solid was dissolvedin 100 mL of CH3CN and 312 IlL (0-312 mmol) of 0. I M solution of diphenylphosphorylazide (DPPA) in CH3CN. The mixture was stirred for 20 hours and concentrated on a rotary evaporator. The residue was triturated with 2 X 50 ml of Et20 and the white opaque residue was treated with 5 mL of 9213I213 TFA/anisole/EDT/Me~S for I hour. The product was precipitated by adding the mixture to 40 mL of Et2O in a 50 mL polypropylene centrifuge tube.
The precipitate was cooled to 0~C and centrifuged for S minutes at 2000 rpm. Thesupernatant was decanted and the pellet was washed with Et2O and recentrifuged.
The pellet was dried and dissolved in 4 mL of 50/50 CH3CN/H2O. The mixture was diluted with 36 mL of H2O/0.1 % TFA, filtered and purified by HPLC (1 " C 18column, gradient, 10/90/0/l CH3CN/H20/TFA to 35/65/0.1 CH3CN/H20/TFA.
230 nm). The pure fractions, as evidenced by HPLC, were Iyophilized to give 52 mg (90%) of compound 21.
S~BSmUrE SffEEr ~nE 26) CA 02256449 l998-ll-23 W O 97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 . 87 Example 13: Synthesis of conju~ates of LJP 685 H2N~-P-COHN ~ CH~S ~ CONH2 CO NH
I~N-l-L-L-A-p~ D-R-co 21 (LJP 6~5) O
Hs~)~HN~-p-coHN~--CH~S CONH2 ~ ~) TrscH2cH2co2pNp --1~ EtJNlDMF 2~TFA~cH2c~ aphen 2 2 CO'NH 2)TFA/CH2CI21thiophenol H~-L-L-A-p~-D-R- CO
HS O O O ~
HN-~P-COHNf CH2-S ~CONH2 HN-I-L~-P~b~R-co O H
t\o O t'l H ~S~ff2CH2CONH-peptide \ 2 ~ N~~~N~S CH2CH2CON~peptid~ -O H
2 5 ~ p~ptid~ = a JP 6~5~
O O 11 N HH N~\o NH~epcde 2 \ N~f~~'' ~S O O~O NH-peptide O H \~
26 pepLide = (I JP 6a5) SUBS~llUlE SHEr ~ULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 WO 97/46251 PCT~US97110075 LJP 685, also referred to as compound 21, was treated with the PNP ester of 3-tritylmercaptopropionic acid and the resulting product was detritylated to give compound ~, the peptide with the free thiol linker. Reaction of an excess of compound ~ with valency platform molecule 12 produced tetravalent conjugate ~. Treatment of compound 21 with the longer linker, compound 33 (see reaction scheme below), followed by detritylation, gave compound ~. Compound 24 reacted with valency platform molecule 12 to give the tetraconjugate 2~. Both conjugation reactions appeared very clean by HPLC.
Attachment of MTU linker to LJP 685. synthesis of compound 24: To 15 mg.(0.013 mmol) of compound 21 was added 160 IlL of a solution of 29.5 mg of compound 23 and 17.5 ~L of diisopropylethylamine in 0.5 mI, of DMF. The mixture was stirred for 2 hours and precipitated from Et2O. The precipitate was dried and dissolved in 650 ~L of a solution of 1/1/0.056/0.040 TFA/CH2CI2/thiophenol/Me2S and the solution was allowed to stand for I hour.
Precipitation from Et20 gave crude compound ~L which was purified by HPLC
(Cl8,15-45% CH3CN/H2O, 0.1% TFA). Fractions Cont~ining pure product were Iyophilized to give 8.6 mg of compound 24 as a white solid.
LJP 685-MTU-AHAB-TEG~ compound 26: To a solution of 8.6 mg (6.3 X 10 6 mol) of compound 24 in 630 ~L of He sparged pH 8.5 200 mM borate buffer was 40 ~lL of a 40 mg/mL solution of compound 12 in 9/1 MeOH/H20. The mixture was stirred for 24 hours and I mL of 10% HOAc/H2O solution was added. The mixture was purified ~y HPLC (C~8, gradient 25-55% CH3CN/H20, 0.1% TFA) to give 8.3 mg of compound 26 (LJP 685-MTU-AHAB-TEG).
Example 14: Development of extended SH linkers The thiobenzoate ester, compound 28, was prepared from compound 27.
Compound 28 was converted to compound ~ in portions. The thiobenzoate was SUBSTllUrE SHEET ~WLE 26) .
. . .
removed by ethanolysis and the resulting thiol was tritylated. The ethyl ester was then hydrolyzed to give compound 29. The nitrophenyl phosphate (PNP) ester, - compound 30, was ~ p~d from compound 29. Aminotrioxoudecanoicacid ethylester, compound 3 1, was ~Ic~ud~ed by treatment of compound ~ Z with sodium azide and reduction to the amine. Amine 3-1 was acylated with cornpound 3-0 to prbvide compound 32. Hydrolysis of compound 32 was achieved by tre~tmPnt with sodium hydroxide to give a free carboxylic acid. The intermediate carboxylic acid was con-l~Pn~e~l with p-nitrophenol to give para-nitrophenyl (PNP) ester, compound 33. Linker 33 was attached to the peptide and the trityl group removed to give compound 34, which was used to produce an MTU-ATU-AHAB-TEG conjugate.
a o o o-cf1,ca ~ D9U ~8 O O O-CH2CO2R
27 2~ 1) N-OEUEtOH
2t ~
~ , 3)~4ROt~, TrS O O O-CH~CO2PNP ~ ./~
TrS O O O--a~2Co~H
1) N,N~Mfl~2~~
a o o o-~2co2E~ 2) Il~ C ~ C/ 0 3-a~ ,B
~0 , r ~4 TrS o O o HN O O O-c1~2co2E
I) N~OH 2 EIOH
__ ~ ; 2) f . ~L ~
TrS O O O ~ O O O-CH2CO2PNP
H~ O O O ~N O O o-CH2CONH-G-P.COHN --CH2-5 ~CONH2 tl~l~-~-/~-D-R CO
SUBST TU~E SHEEr ~n~ 26) CA 02256449 199~ -11- 23 rCT/11S97/tO075 WO g7146251 Example 15: Synthesi~ of a (I lp68s~4/~Tu-ATl~-AHAB-TEG CoF~ t~
co~ollnd 35 Tetravalent conjugate 3~ was prepared as shown below. The peptide with - ~ linkers attached, compound 34 was dissolved in ~e sparged, p~ 8.~, 200 ni~ borate buffer To the mixture was added 0.3 mo~ e~uivalents of platform compound 1-2.
~he mixture was stirred for I hour and the product was purified by HPLC.
~~~o~~or~4~N~~ ~ o~C~2C~NIt G P --r CONff2 HN-l~-L A-P~e-D R CO
34 ~ 12 R~S O O O ~l~l O O O-CH2CONH-G P COHN--~-- 2 S~CQN~) 3 5 ffN-t~ L~ P~e~l}R~o Fc = O , ~N~J
H O
Example 16: Synthesi~ of a (l~lP685~lll)ARA-PEG conju~ate compollnd 36 Treatment of IA-DABA-PEG with compound ~ in ~.5 borate buffer gave conjugate 36 O
t~S 24 t\of\oio~N--N~ ~ Pep=WP685 IA-D~BA-P~G HN~I O
~0 0~~--~ Pe,c ~\~ --N~
HN~S o~0 0--SUBS~T~ SHEr ~E26) . , . , . _ .. .. . .
CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 wo 97/46251 PCT/US97/10075 91 '' Example 17: T cell assay for activation Tritiated thymidine uptal~e by peptide-stimulated T cells was monitored in 96well round bottom plates. A single-cell suspension of draining Iymph node cells (mice) or isolated peripheral blood Iymphocytes (human), 5 x 105 were mixed with between I and 30 jig of peptide in a final volume of 150 ,uL per welland incubated for 5 days at 37~C in 5% C02. At that point, I micro curie of labeled thymidine was added and incubated for an additional 15-24 hours. The harvested cells were collected on filters and counted by liquid scintillation spectrometry.
Example 18: In vitro induction of tolerance Eight groups~ each cont~ining five C57Bl/6 mice, were primed with 10 ~lg/mouse of a conjugate of LJP685-KLH on alum plus B. pertussis vaccine as an adjuvant. After three weeks~ spleen were harvested and single cells suspensions were prepared, washed three times with balanced salt solution and resuspended in complete RPMI-1640 medium at a concentration equivalent to one spleen/1.5 mL of medium. The cell suspension was divided into aliquots of 2.5 mL /petri dish and incubated for 2 hours at 37~C with (LJP685)4-DABA-PEG, compound 36, and (LJP685)4-TEG~ compound 35, in concentrations of 100 ~M, 20 !lM and 4 IlM. One group of cells was incubated without toleragen and acted as the positive control. The cells were then washed with large volumes of balanced salt solution and resuspended in 2.5 mL of b~l~nced salt solution. The cells were then injected into 650R irradiated syngeneic recipient mice in such amanner that all of the cells from a given treatment group were divided evenly into five recipients. All of the recipient mice, including the positive controls, were then given a booster imrnunization of 10 ~lg of LJP 685-KLH in saline, intraperitoneally. Seven days after the booster immunization, the mice were bledand their sera tested for the presence of anti-LJP 685 antibody. Treatment with either conjugate produced a significant, dose-dependent reduction of anti-LJP 685 SUBSll~ SffEEr (P(llL~ 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 antibodies as shown in Figures 16 and 17, which is measured by Antigen Binding Capacity (ABC) as described in Iverson, G.M., "Assay for in vivo adoptive imrnune responses," in HANDBOOK OF EXPERIMENTAL IMMUNOLOGY, Volume 2, Cellular Immunology ~Weir, D.M., ed., Blackwell Scientific S Publications, Palo Alto, CA, 1986).
Example 19: NMR solution structure ~n~lysis of the SA12. CB2 ~nll 3G3 peptides Two peptides isolated from pliage library screens using the methodology 0 described in the examples above were subjected to NMR analysis. The original peptide has a proline in the second to last position. however, this amino acid was removed since two dimensional (2D) double quantum filtered correlated spectroscopy (DQF-COSY) NMR data suggested the presence of two different structures from the Ci5' and trans isomers at this position. Removal of the proline gave peptides with KD'S in the 50-100 nM range for binding to ACA antibodies, and the expected number of peaks in the fingerprint region of the DQF-COSY
spectrum. The resulting cyclic peptides are SA12 (GPCLILAPDRCG) AND CB2 (GPCILLARDRCG). The major difference between the peptides was the substitution of arginine for proline at position 8 which resulted in much less 2() dispersion in the ID IH NMR spectnun of CB2 which was consistent with SA12 being a more rigid peptide. The arginine substitution also produces a 0.55 kcal/mol stabilization of the ionized aspartyl carboxy group as reflected in pKa values. A structural analysis was carried out on the more ordered SA12 peptide. Although deuterium exchange and tempelaLure coefficient data show no evidence of hydrogen bonding, the Nuclear Overhauser Effect (NOE), Rotating Overhauser Effect (ROE) and coupling data are consistent with one structure.
Distance geometry calculations yielded a family of 50 structures. The 15 best had a mean root mean square deviation (RMSD) for all atoms of 2.1 + 0.2 angstroms.
We determined that the peptide has an oval shape with turns at opposite ends of the molecule, at the disulfide and at Proline 8 which is cis. There is also a kink in SUBSTI~Ul E SHEEr (RlllE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 -wO 97/46251 PCT/US97/10075 93 ~ -the backbone LIL region. Finally, the carboxy terminal glycine is very mobile asit is the only residue with a positive intraresidue NOE. This represents the first structural infon-nation determined about a peptide that mimics the ACA epitope on ,B2-GPI.
NMR data coupled with distance geometry calculations were used to determine the three dimensional structure of peptide 925 (CLGVLAKLC), a truncated version of peptide 3 G3 (AGP CLGVLGKLCPG) with alanine substituted for glycine in position 6 of the 925 peptide. The structure of peptide 925 was detenriined in water at pH 3.8 and at 25~C. An ensemble of nine l 0 structures were calculated all of which were consistent with the NMR data. The RMSD for all non-hydrogen atoms was 2.45 + 0.36 angstroms when each structure was compared to the centroid. Figure 18 displays the structure closest to the centrold of the ensemble and, therefore, is a reasonable representation of the shape of the peptide 925 molecule. Figure 19 compares the structure of peptide 925 (labeled at the bottom of the figure as 3G3) with the structure of peptide 5Al2.
Both peptides have turns at approximately the same positions in the peptide sequence.
The pharmaeophore of the peptides has been tentatively identified as a small hydrophobic group and a positively charged group. The gem-dimethyl and amino groups of peptide 925 are tentatively identified as the pharmaeophore of this peptide as shown in Figure 20. The hydrocarbon linkers that tether the pharmacophore groups to some scaffold have the lengths specified in Figure 20 and the points at which these linkers are attached to the scaffold are separated by the distance specified. Finally, the dihedral angle defining the relative orientation of the two linkers was determined to be 22~.
SUBSlTlUlE SffEEr ~lJLE 26) , ..
W O 97/46251PCT~US97/10075 .
Example 20: Synthesis of TFG carbamate linker Cl~/~o~O~O~
fBuSH, DBU
~ (99% ) t~US~o~~~ OH
CICOO ~NO2, Pyr.
O
BuS O ~~ o~o~NO2 2-[2-(2-tert-Butylthioethoxj~)ethoxy]ethanol. com~ound 38: To a mixture of 2-[2-(2-chloroethoxy)ethoxy]ethanol (11.0 g, 65.24 mmol) and tert-butylthiol (7.35 mL, 65.23 mrnol) cooled in an ice bath was slowly added 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.40]undec-7-ene ~DBU, 9.75 mL, 65.23 mmol). The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room termperature and stirred overnight. This mixture was then diluted with ethyl acetate and filtered. The crude product in the - filtrate was purified on a filter colurnn eluted with ethyl acetate to give yellowish oil (14.4 g, 64.6 mmol, 99%): lH NMR (300 Mhz, CDCI3): d 3.73 (br s, 2H), 3.69-3.60 (m, 8H, 2.75 (t, J= 7.4, 2H), 2.62 (br s, lH), 1.32 (s, 9H); 13C NMR
(75 Mhz, CDC13): d 72.47, 71.08, 70.33, 70.27, 61.71, 42.09, 30.95, 27.87; MS
(ESI): m/e (M+l) Calcd. for CloH23O3S: 223, obsd.: 223.
SVBSllTUrE SHEEr ~WE 26) , CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 wo 97/46251 PCT/US97/10075 2-~2-(2-tert-Butylthioethoxy)ethoxy]ethyl p-nitrophenyl carbonate, compound 39:
To a solution of compound 38 (2.0 g, 8.98 mmol) and p-nitrophenol chloroforrnate (1.81 g, 8.98 mmol) in 5 mL of dry THF cooled in an ice bath was slowly added dry pyridine (0.73 mL, 8.98 mmol) in 1 mL of dry THF. White S precipitate came out imrnediately. After stirred at room temperature for 15 min, the reaction mixture was diluted with 10 mL of ether and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated and used directly in the peptide synthesis without further purlficatlon.
Example 21: Synthesis of the Tetravalent Platform IA/DAB~/ATEG. 46.
Bis-N-(t-butoxycarbonyl)-diaminoben70ic acid. corr~ound 40: A solution of 7.18 g (32.9 mmol of di-t-butyldicarbonate in 5.5 mL of MeOH was slowly added to a solution of 2.5 g (16.4 mmol) of 3,5-diaminobenzoic acid :~nd 2.76 g (32.9 mmol)of NaHCO3 in 44.5 mL of H20 and 22.5 mL of MeOH, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 24 h. The mixture was cooled to 0~, and 6.53 g of citric acid was added, and the mixture was extracted with EtOAc. The combined EtOAc layers were dried (MgS04), filtered, and concentrated. The residue was dissolved in 40 mL of Et,O and the solution was filtered through Celite. The Et20 layer was extracted with two 40 mL portions of HCl. The Et20 layer was dried (MgSO4), filtered, and concentrated to give 3.81 g (66%) of 40 as a foamy pink solid.
N-hydroxysuccinimidyl ester of co~r~ound 40. comround 41:
Dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (3.34 g, 16.2 mmol) was added to a solution of 3.8 g (10. 8 mmol) of compound 40 and 1.24 g (10.8 mrnol) of N-hydroxysuccinimide in 55 mL of EtOAc which had been cooled to 0~, and the resulting mixture was stirred for 18 h allowing to come to room t~ p~ldL~re. To the mixture was added 0.55 mL of acetic acid. The mixture was stirred for 30 min and placed in the freezer for 2 h. The mixture was filtered to remove solids, and the filtrate was SUBSllTUlE SHEr ff~ E 26) ~-CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 concentrated to give 5.80 g of pink foamy solid. Purification by silica gel chromatography (60/40/1 hexane/EtOAc/HOAc) gave 4.30 g (89%) of compound 41 as a slightly pink solid.
Mono-N-(t-butoxycarbonyl)-ethylene~liAmine. compound 42: A solution of 1.5 g (25.0 mmol) of ethylene~ mine in 15 mL of CH2CI2 was cooled to 0~, and a solution of 1.82 g (8.33 mmol) of di-t-butyldicarbonate was added slowly to the mixture. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 h and filtered, and the filtrate was concentrated. Purification by silica gel chromatography (90/10/1 CH2CI2/MeOH/HOAc) gave 0.98 g (67%) of compound 42 as an oil.
Bis- N-(t-butoxycarbonvl)-~mino-TFG. compound 43: To a solution of 750 mg (4.25 mmol) compound 42 and 345 uL (337 mg, 4.25 mmol) of pyridine in 6 mL
of CH2CI was added 445 uL (559 mg, 2.02 mmol) of triethyleneglycol bis-chloroforrnate. The mixture was stirred for 3.5 h, and the mixture was partitioned between 35 mL of CH2CI2 and 35 mL of I N HCI. The CH2CI2 layer was washed with H2O? dried (Na,SO4), filtered and concentrated to give I .14 g of crude compound 43 which was used directly in the next step.
Diamino-TEG bis-tr;fluoroacetate salt~ compound 44: 300 mg (0.57 mmol) of compound 43 was dissolved in 3.5 g of CH2Cl2, and 3.5 mL of trifluoroacetic acidwas added. The mixture was stirred for 3 h at room temperature, and the solutionwas concentrated to give 398 mg of crude compound 44 which was used directly in the next step.
Compound 45: A solution of 567 mg of compound 41 in 6 mL of dioxane was added to a solution of 398 mg of crude, compound 44 (est. 316 mg, 0.57 mmol) and 193 mg (2.30 mmol) of NaHCO3. The mixture was stirred for 3 h and acidified with I N HCI and partitioned between 20 mL of I N HCI and 30 mL of EtOAc. The combined EtOAc layers are washed with sat NAHCO3 solution, SUBSllIUI E SHEEr ffWlE 26) - CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 97/462~1 PCT~US97/10075 dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated to give 490 mg (86%) of crude compound 45 as a white foamy solid. Purification by silica gel chromatography (EtOAc) gave 276 mg (48%) of compound ~ as a white foamy solid.
IA/DABAIATFG. Con~l?o~lnd 46: A solution of 100 mg (0.1 mmol) of compound 45 was prepared, and I mL of trifluoroacetic acid was added, and the mixture wasstirred for I h at room temperature. The mixture was concentrated under vacuum.
The residue was triturated with Et2O and dried under vacuum to give a white crystalline solid. The solid was dissolved in I mL of DMF, 104 uL (77 mg, 0.6 mmol) of diisopropylethylamine was added, the mixture was cooled to 0~, and 212 mg (0.6 mmol) of iodoacetic anhydride was added. The ice bath was removed, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h. The mixture .
was cooled to 0~, acidified with I N H2SO4, and partitioned between 10 mL of I N H2SO4 and 6 X 20 mL portions of 8/2 CH2CI2/MeOH. The combined organic layers were dried (MgS04), filtered, and concentrated to give 330 mg of orange oil. Purification by pl~.ai~tive HPLC (25 cm X 22.4 mm C~g, gradient: 30%B to 40%B 0-40 min, A = H2O/0. 1% TFA, B = CH3CN/0. 1% TFA, 12 mL/min) gave I g mg of compound 46 as a white solid.
SUBSmUrE SHEEr ~UlE 2B) NH2 (BOC)20 NHBOC NHS NHBOC O
40 ~ 41 O O
3,5-diaminobenzoic acid NH2~ NH2 (BOC)20 NH2~ --NHBOC
ethylenediamineCH2CI2 42 ¦ triethyleneglycol bis-chloroformate ~ pyridine/CH2CI2 NH o ~ i 2 CH2CI2 BOCNH N ~ r~
Compound 2 NaHC03 dioxane/H20 1)TFA
B OC N H ~ N ~ N ~ o~L2 I C H2 CO H N ~[~ ~ N ' ' ~ ~1L2 2) iodoacelic-NHBOC -- anhydride ICH2COHN 46 (IA/DABA/ATEG) DIPE~DMF
Example 22: Synthesi~ ofthe Tetravalent Platfonn BA/PABA/DTITFG. 51.
N-(t-butoxycarbonyl)PARA~ compound 47: A solution was prepared of 3.0 g(21.9 mmol) of p-aminobenzoic acid in 60 mL of H2O. Na2CO3 (2.16 g, 25.7 SUBSrllUrE SHET (RUlE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 97/46251 PCT~US97/10075 mmol) was added slowly followed by 30 mL of MeOH. When all solids were dissolved. a solution of 4.77 g (21.9 mmol) of di-t-butyldicarbonate in 10 mL ofMeOH was added and the mixture was stirred at room telllpeld~ure for 18 h. To the mixture was added 4.92 g (25.6 mmol) of citric acid and the resulting cloudyS mixture was partitioned between 200 mL of H2O and 200 mL of EtOAc. The EtOAc layer was washed successively with 200 mL of 0.1 N HCI and 200 mL of H20, dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated to yield 3.0 g (58%) of compound47 as a white solid.
N-(t-butoxycarbonyl)P~BA N-hydroxysuccinimidyl ester~ compound 48: DCC
(2.61 g, 12.6 mrnol) was added to a 0~ solution of 2.0 g (8.43 mmol) of compound47 and 0.97 g (8.43 mrnol) of N-hydroxysuccinimide in 5(~ mL of EtOAc. The ice bath was removed, the mixture was stirred, for 16 h at room temperature, and 0.5 mL of acetic acid was added. The mixture was stirred for an additional 30 l S min, placed in the freezer for l .S h, filtered, and concentrated to give 3.75 g of crude 48. Purification by silica gel chromatography (50/50 hexane/EtOAc) gave 2.53 g (90%) of compound 48 as a white solid.
Compound 49: A solution of 3.00 g (8.97 mmol) of compound 48 in 50 mL Of CH2CI2 was added dropwise over 30 min to a solution of 485 uL (4.49 mmol) of diethylenetriamine in 30 uL of CH2CI2 which had been cooled in an ice bath. The mixture was stirred at 5-7~ for 30 min then at-room temperature for 16 h. The milky mixture was placed in a separatory funnel with 200 mL of H20, the pH of the H2O layer was adjusted to 10 with 3 M NaOH solution, and the mixture was extracted with 200 mL of 4/1 CH3Cl/MeOH. The organic phase was dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated to give 0.971 g (40%) of compound 49 which was pure enough to be used in the following step. The aqueous layer was extracted with six 100 mL portions of 4/1 CH3CI/MeOH. The organic layers were combined, dried (Na,SO4), and concentrated to give another 1.08 g (44%) of compound 49 which required further purification. Further purification can be SUBSrllUrE SHEEr ff'~ULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-ll-23 W O 97/46251 PCT~US97/10075 accomplished by silica gel chromatography (gradient~ 80/20 to 70/30 CH3CI/MeOH).
Compollnd 50: A solution of 135 uL (0.66 mmol) of triethyleneglycol bis-chloroformate in 0.3 mL of THF was added to a 0~ solution of 855 mg ~1.58 mmol) of compound 49 and 275 uL (1. mmol) of diisopropylethylamine in 13 mL
of THF. The cloudy mixture cleared when the ice bath was removed. An additional 70 uL of dilsopropyethylamine was added to m~int~in a basic pH. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for a total of 3 h and partitioned between 25 mL of H2O and 25 mL of EtOAc. The aqueous layer was extracted with a second 25 mL portion of EtOAc, and the combined EtOAc layers were dried (Na2CO3), filtered, and concentrated to give 0.986 g of crude 50. Purification by silica gel chromatography (80/4/16 CH3CI/dioxane/isopropanol) gave 516 mg (61%) of compound 50 as a white solid.
P,e~a.d~ion of BA/PABA/DT/TEG. compound 51: Compound 50 (487 mg, 8.79 mmol) was dissolved in 9 mL of CH2Cl2 and 5 mL of trifluoroacetic acid.
The mixture was stirred for 1.5 h and concentrated. The residue was triturated with 7 mL of Et2O, and dissolved in 5 mL of MeOH and 1 mL of 48% HBr solution. The mixture was concentrated and placed under vacuum until a dry.
The resulting HBr salt was dissolved in 10 mL of H2O, and 191 mg (2.27 mmol) of NaHCO3 was added. A solution of 591 mg (2.27 mmol) of bromoacetic anhydride in 10 mL dioxane was added to the mixture. An additional 2 mL of dioxane was used to rinse. More NaHCO3 was added as needed to m~int~in a basic pH. The mixture was stirred for 2 h at room temperature, and acidifiéd with I N H2SO4. The mixture was extracted with 3 X 25 mL of ~tOAc. The combined EtOAc layers were dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated to give 773 mg of an oil. Purification was accomplished by silica gel chromatography (gradient~
90/10 to 85/15 CH3CI/MeOH) to give 401 mg (77%) of 51 as a white solid.
SUBSTlTUlE SHEEI- ~WI~ 26) W O 97/46251 PCT~US97/10075 (BOC)20 O MeOH/H2o ~ 0 H2N ~ OH Na2CO3 BOCH N ~~' OH
4-aminobenzoic acid 47 NHS
DCC
EtOAc /=\ 11 diethylenetriamine BOCHN~ ~ ~ CH2C12 0 ~_ H N - H ~ BOCHN~O-N~
BOCHN~ N J
triethyleneglycol bis-chloroformate ~ Et3N/THF
BOCHN~ N ~10 1) TFAJCH2CI2 BrCH2COHN~ H ~\ ~ '~
H ~7/2 H NuO o7'2 BOCHN~, H J BrCH2COHN~ N J
0 50 2) bromoacetic anhydride ~
NaHCO3 51 (BAIPABA/DT/TEG) dloxane/H2~
Example 23: Synthesis of the Tetravalent Platform BMP/TEG. 55.
Dimethyl-5-bydroxyisophth~l~t~. compound 52: A solution of 2.00 g (11 mmol) of 5-hydroxylsophthatic acid and 0.5 mL of con HCI in 30 mL of MeOH was refluxed for 5 h. The mixture was concentrated and the resulting residue was disso~ved in 100 mL of EtOAc. The EtOAc solution was washed successivel~
with two 50 mL portions of 5% NaHCO3 solution two 50 mL portions of sat NaCI
solution, dried (Na2CO3), filtered, and concentrated to give 2.09 g (90%) of 52 as a white crystalline solid.
Compound 53: Triethyleneglycol ditosylate 546 mg (1.19 mmol) was added to a suspension of 500 mg (2.38 mmol) of compound 52 and 395 mg (2.86 mmol) of K2CO3 in 11 mL of CH3CN and the mixture was refluxed under N2 for 16 h. The mixture was concentrated, alld the residue was dissolved in 25 mL of CHCI3 and washed with 25 mL of H2O and 25 mL of sat NaCI solution. The CHCl3 layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated. Purification by silica gel chromatography (gradient, 50/50 hexane/EtOAc to 100% EtOAc) gave 93 mg (41 %) of compound 53.
SUBSlllUrE SHEE~ ff'lUlE 26) - CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 Compound 54: A suspension of 93 mg (0.18 mmol) of compound 53 in 4 mL of THF was stirred under a N2 atmosphere while 1.82 mL(1.82 mmol) of a I M
solution of LiBHEt3 was added to the mixture dropwise. A clear solution was obtained which was stirred for 18 I~, ~t which time 10% solution of HOAc in water was added until the pH was acidic. The mixture was concentrated under vacuum and the residue was dissolved in 10 mL of water. The mixture was extracted witl 3 X 10 mL portions of EtOAc, and the combined EtOAc layers were dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated. Purification was accomplished by silica gelchromatography (gradient, 90/10 to 85/15 CH3CI/MeOH) to give 20 mg (27%) of 54 as a white solid.
Cornpound 55: To a suspension of 20 mg (0.048 mmol) of 54 in 5 mL of Et,O
and I mL of THF is added 9.6 uL (0.1 mmol) of PBr3. The mixture is stirred for 3 h and partitioned between and EtOAc. The EtOAc layer is dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated, and the residue is purified by silica gel chromatograph~
(CH3CI/MeOH) to pro~ide compound 55.
HO2C HCOH MeO2C
~ OH > ~OH
HO2C MeO2C 52 5-hydroxyisophthalic acid K2Co3/CH3CN
r\~
TosO O/ 2 HO~_ LiBHFt3 M c~ 53 PBr TH~/Et20 Br~
~O/ \Or/2 Br 55. fBMP/TEG) SUBSllTUl E SHEEr (P((ILE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 97/46251 PCT~US97110075 Example 24: Synthesis of the Telravalent Platfo~n BA/P17/~DA/TF.G. 60.
Compound 56 To a solution of 1.02 g (4.37 mmol) of N-(t-butoxycarbonyl)-iminodiacetic acid (compound 5 in U.S. 5,552,391, Chemically-Defined Non-Polymeric Valency Platform Molecu!es and Conjugates Thereof) and 1.01 g (8.75 mmol) of N-hydroxysuccinimide in 50 mL of dry THF. cooled to 0~, was added 2.26 g (10.94 mmol) of dicyclohexylcarbodiimide. The mixture was stirred for 16 h allowing to slowly warrn to room temperature, and a solution of 2.22 g ( 10.1 mmol) of mono-CBZ-piperazine in 25 mL of THF was added to the mixture followed by 1.22 mL (887 mg, 8.75 rnmol) of Et3N. The mixture was stirred for 7 h at room temperature, filtered. The filtrate was concentrated and the residuewas dissolved in 125 mL of EtOAc and shaken with 2 X 125 mL portions of I N
HCI, 125 mL of sat NaHCO3 solution, dried (MgSO4 filtered, and concentrated to give 2.39 g of a sticky solid. Purification by silica gel chromatography (95/J
CH2CI~/MeOH) gave 1.85 g (66%) of 56.
Compound 57: To a solution of 1.74 g (2.74 mmol) of compound 56 in 10 mL of CH2CI2 was added 10 mL of trifluoroacetic acid, and the mixture was stirred for 3 h at room te,llpe,~ re. mixture was concentrated, and the residue was dissolved in 5 mL of CH2CI2. The mixture cooled to 0~ and 100 mL of sat NaHCO3 was added. The mixture was then extracted with four 100 mL portions of CH2CI2.
The CH2CI2 layers were combined, dried (MgS04), filtered, and concentrated to give 1.46 g (99%~ of 57 as a sticky hygroscopic solid which was used directly the next step.
- Con~ound 58: To a solution of 0.7 g (1.3 mmol) of compound 57 and 226 uL
( 168 mg~ 1.30 mmol) of diisopropylethylamine at 0~ was added a solution of 127 SUBSmUlE SHEEr ffWl E 2S) CA 022~6449 l998-ll-23 uL of triethyleneglycol biscmoroforinate in 4 mL of CH2CI2, and the ~ e was stirred for 3 h at room temperature. mixture was partitioned between 80 mL of CH2CI2 and 80 mL of I N HCI. The ~ 2 ~ layer was washed with two 80 mL
portions of water, dried (MgSO4), filtered, and concentrated to give 736 mg (93%) of compound 58 as a crystalline solid.
Compound 60: Compound 58 (61 mg, 0.48 mmol) was dissolved in 3 mL of 30%
HBr/HOAc and the resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for I h at which time 5 mL of Et2O added. The mixture was placed in the freezer for 1 h and centrifuged. The resulting pellet was washed with Et2O and dried to give thetetralaydrobromide salt 59 which was dissolved in 1 mL of H2O. To the mixture is added 49 mg (0.58 mmol) of NaHCO3 and 3 mL of dioxane. More NaHCO3 is added, if needed, to make the mixture basic. The mixture - i cooled to 0~, and 748 mg (2.89 mmol) of bromoacetic anhydride is added. The mixture is stirred for 2 h and partitioned between 20 mL of I N H2SO4 and 20 mL of 80/20 CH2CI2/MeOH. The organic layer is dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated to give crude 60 which is purified by silica gel chromatography (CH2CI2/MeOH) to ,~ive 60.
SUBSllTUrE SHEEr (RUI~ 26) CA 02256449 1998-ll-23 NCBZ N-BOC iminodiacetir~acid A ~
HN THF CBZN N~
mono-CBZ-piperazine ~ A NBOC
CBZN N~
\_/ 0 56 TFAICH2Cl2 ~rielhyleneglycol bis-o chloroformate/DlPEA O
CBZN N~ CH2CI2 CBZN N
I O l--r/
/_\ N ~ ~/ 2 ~ / \ îNH
CBZNJN~ CBZN N~
HBr acetic acid bromoacetic anhydride NaHC03 ~_~ o dloxane/H20 A ~
~/ ~N ~ Ol~Or/ 2 ~J ~ 0 1~ r/' HBr.HN N~ BrCH2CON N~
~ 59 60 (sAlplzllDAlTEG) Example 25: Synthesis of the Tetravalent Platform tetrakis-BATPI7/PMA. 63.
Compound 61: To a 0~ solution of 640 mg (2.52 mmol) of pyromellitic acid and 1.16 g (10.1 mmol) of N-hydroxysuccinimide in 50 mL of THF was added 2.6 g (12.6 mmol) of dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, and the mixture was allowed to come to room telllp~,dl-lre while stirring for 16 h. A solution of 2.5 g (11.3 mmol) of mono-CBZ-piperazine in 25 mL of THF was added to the mixture followed by 1 .4 mL (1.02 g, 10.1 mmol) of Et3N. The mixture-was filtered, and the filtrate was concentrated. The residue was partitioned between 100 mL of EtOAc and 2 X 100 mL of 1 N HCI, and the EtOAc layer was washed with 100 mL of sat NaHCO3, 100 mL of H2O, 100 mL of sat NaHCO3, dried (MgSO4;, filtered, and - 25 concentrated. Purification was accomplished by silica gel chromatography (97.5/2.5 CH2C1~/MeOH) to give 1.78 g (66%) of 63 as a white crystalline solid.
SUBSmUI E SHEr ~RUlE 26) W O 97/46251 PCT~US97110075 Compound 63: Compound 6 l is converted to compound 63 in essentially the same manner as described for the conversion of 58 to 60 in Example 23.
Purification is accomplished using silica gel chromatography.
HO2C,~ 02H DCC CBZHN N~N NCBZ
1 ,2,4,5-benzenetetracarboxylic acid 6 (pyrometlitic acid) HBr/HOAc bromoacetic anhydride HBr.HN N~ ~N N11.HBr NaHC03/diOxanelH2o A ~
HBr.HN N~N NH.HBr BrCH2CON N~N NCOCH2Br 62 BrCH2CON N N NCOCH2Br 63 (tetrakis-BA/PlZ/PMA) ~O
Example 26: Synthesis of the Tetravalent Platform 3A/PIZ/II)A/E~B/TEG 68.
Compound 64: Triethyleneglycol ditosylate (1.0 g, 2.18 mmol) was added to a solution o 725 mg (4.36 mmol) of ethyl 4-hydroxybenzoate and 723 mg (5.23 mmol) of K2CO3, and the mixture was refluxed for 16 h. The mixture was concentrated, and the residue was partitioned between 20 mL of water and 3 X
20 mL of Et2O. The combined organic layers were washed with 2 X 40 of sat NaHCO3 solution, 40 inL of sat NaCI solution. The aqueous layers were washed with Et2O, and the combined Et2O layers were dried (MgSO4), filtered, and concentrated. Purification by silica gel chromatography (70/30 hexanes/EtOAc) have 902 mg (93%) of 64 as a crystalline solid.
SUBSllTUlE SHEET ~UI,E 26) Compound 65: Compound 64 is dissolved in acetone cont~inine 2.2 equivalents of LiOH and mixture is stirred for 3 h (until complete as evidenced by TLC). Themixture is acidified with acetic acid and concentrated, and the residue is purified by silica gel chromatography to give 65.
Compound 66: Compound Ç~ is prepared similarly to the method of preparing compound 56 in example 23. Compound 65 is used instead of N-BOC-iminodiacetic acid? and compound 57 is used instead of mono-CBZ-piperazine.
Purification is accomplished using silica gel chromatography Compound 68: Compound 66 is converted to compound 68 in essentially the same marmer as described for the conversion of 58 to 60 in Example 23.
Purification is accomplished usin~ silica gel chromatography.
Ho2c acetone MeO2C
~_ A r/ ~ ~~ ~ ~/2 HO2C 69 MeO2C 53 NHS
DCC
THF
HN NCBZ
CBZN N ~ ~ HBr/HOAc HBr.HN N ~=~
~ <~0 2 ~ ~ ~~ ~ 2 CBZN N ~; 7Q HBr.HN N ~
bromoacetic anhydride ~" NaHCO3/dioxane/H20 ~ o BrCH2CON N ~=N A r/
~ ~o o/2 72 (BA/PIZIHIP/TE(~) BrCH2CON N~
SUBSllTUrE SHER ffWI~ 28) ---, CA 02256449 1998-ll-23 W O97/46251 PCTrUS97/10075 Example 27: Synthesis of the Tetravalent Platfonn BA/PT7./HIP/TFG. 72.
Compound 69: Compound 53 is hydrolyzed with LiOH in essentially the same manner as described for the hydrolysis of 64 in example 25 with the exception that 4.4 equivalents of LiOH is used.
Comr~o~nd 70: The tetra-acid, compound 69, is converted to compound 70 in - essenti~lly the same manner as described for the conversion of pyromellitic acid to 61 in example 24 with the exception that 69 is used instead of pyromellitic acid.
Compound 72: Compound 70 is converted to compound 72 in essentially the same manner described for the conversion of 58 to 60 in Example 23. Purificationis accomplished using silica gel chromatography.
t~ r/
TosO O/2 ~ ~/.
EtO2C ~ OH ~ ESO2C ~ o O~/2 ethyi4-hydroxybenzoate 64 A ~acetone C BZN N
CBZN N~CBZN N~
N~O O/2 ~ O HOzC~O (~
CBZN N ~ DCC
\~ 11 66 NHS 65 o -- THF
HBr acetic aci;l bromoacetic anhydride NaHCO3 ~_~ O dioxanetH20 ~ ~
HBr.HN N 1l . Bt-CH2CON N~
\~ ~ O r=~ r~ r/ ~ \J I O ~ r~ r/
N~O O/2 ~_~ N~o O/2 HBr.HN N~ BrCH2CON N~
0 6, 6~3 (BtVPlZ/lDA/HBtTEG) SUB~ SHEEr ~RlJlE 26) .
WO 97/46251 PCT~US97tlO075 Example 28: Sy~thesis of Coruu~t~s of Haloacetylated Tetravalent Con~ounds Synthesis of (~ rP685)1/MTU/A/DABA/AT~G corU-~eAt~
compound 73:
A solution was prepared of 21 mg ( 15.5 umol) of compound 24 in Helium S sparged pH 8.5 200 mM borate buffer To the solution was added a second solution consisting of 3.25 mg'(2.6 urnol) of IA/DABA/ATEG, compound 46, dissolved in 396 uL of MeOH. A precipitate fo~ned, and I mL of MeOH was added to dissolve all the solids. The mixture was stirred for 18 h at room temperature, and 6 mL of 9/1 H2O/HOAc was added. The mixture was diluted ] 0 with 50 ML of H2O/CH3CN and loaded onto an HPLC p~ e~aldlive column.
Purification was accomplished by p.~ d~ive HPLC (25 cm X 22.4 mm C~8.
gradient: 35%B to 45%B 0-40 min, A = H2O/0. 1% TFA, B = CH3CN/0. 1% TFA, 12 mL/min) to provide 10.8 mg (67%) of compound 73 as a solid after Iyophilization.
Pep~O~O~O~SH Pep = LJP 685 ICH2COHN~ ~NILO ~~2 ~r ICH2COHN 46 (IA/DABA/ATEG) P ~~ ~ ~ ~S ~~~
HN~ ~N 'l HN
~0~~ O~S~
73 (LJI'68~)4/MTU/A/DA8A/ATEG
Syntllesis of (T TP685)~/MTU cor~lu~tP~ co~oIm~lc 74, 75. 76. 77. and 78:
These conjugates are prepared from platform compounds 51, 60, 63, 68~ and 72, respectively~ by the same reaction conditions as described above for the synthesis of conjugate 73 by substituting the ay~u-oyl;ate platform compound for platform compound 46. Pep can be LJP685 or other relevant peptide.
SU~SmUrE SHEEr ~RULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 97/46251 PCTrUS97/1007S
~0 ~0 o~ S ~l~ a~ H--l O ~
P ~O O~O 5~ ~H N"O ~/2 ~~--o~S~t~,N/--\N~
Jl~, o ~ O s ~ N
O O
~ ~ o ~ S J~ NN 4~ N N ~ S O ~ O ~O ~-P~P~ --o~~ S~N N~NN~1~5~o 0~ ~~Pep ~~~ ~O~ ~ N ~
~ ~1 or~r/
N ~ O 0/ ?
c~~~ 0~~ - s~NN~
~O~O o~S~,,U~ /~~ O
Pop~ --o~O S~N\ N
Example 29: Synthesis of Con~in~t~s Tetravalent Platforrn 55~ Co~ ~te Con~ol-nd 79. a TP685)JMP/TEG:
A solution is prepared of four equivalents of compound 2~L and five equivalents of Cs2C3 in DMF. One equivalent of BMP/TEG, platform compound 55, is added to the mixture is then stirred for I h. The mixture is diluted with80/20/10 H20/CH3CN/HOAc and loaded onto a plep~d~ e HPLC column.
Purification is accomplished by plc~a~live HPLC (C~x. A = H20/0.1% TFA. B =
25 CH3CN/0.1% TFA) to give compound 79 after Iyophilization. Pep can be LJP685 or other relevant peptide.
SUBS~TUlE SHEEl ~ULE 26) -'-Pep~O~O~ O~sH Pep = LJP 685 o 24 Br cs2co3 ~\ / \ ,7l DMF _~~ ~/ 2 Br - 55 (BMP/~EG) PepJ~~ 'O~ 0 ~~/ '~7L2 Pep~f~O~\/O~ - O~/S
o 79 ((LJP685)4/MTlJ/MP/TEG) l~xample 30: Synthesis of Cor~u~ates Tetravalent Platforn- tetrakis-BMB~
Conjug~t~ Compound B0, (L~P685)~/MTU/tetrakis-MR:
A solution is ~le~a~ed of four equivalents of compound 24 and five equivalents of Cs2C3 in DMF. One equivalent of tetrakis-bromomethylbenzene is added to the mixture which is then stirred for 1 h. The mixture is diluted with 80/20/10 H2O/CH3CN/HOAc and loaded onto a p,e~ dli~e HPLC column.
Purification is accomplished by pIepdldlive HPLC (Cl8 A = H2O/0.1% TFA, B =
CH3CN/0.1% TFA) to give compound 80 after Iyophilization. Pep can be LJP685 or other relevant peptide.
SUBSrlTU~ SHEEr (~ULE 26) Pep ~O ~~~O~ SH Pep = LJP 685 Br ~=~Br Br ~Br tetrakis-BMB
5~s~ ~o~ ~Pep --' o ~ O ~~ ~'~ ~T' Pep ~ 80 ((LJP685)4/MTU/MB) ~
Example 30: ~luorescence po~ri7~tion Peptide Bin~lin.~ Assa~s Synthesis of FITC-GPCILLARnRCG (CR2*) A solution of the cyclic disulfide peptide GPCILLARDRCG (20.0 m~.
14.4 !lmol) and fluorescein isothiocyanate (FITC) (5.6 mg. 14.4 ~umol) in 20 mL
of ACNlwater (1:1), co~ 20 mg sodium carbonate (Na2CO3, pH ~ 10.5), was stirred at room telll?~ u~ e. The reaction was monitored by analytical HPLC.After consuming the fluolescent labeling reagent, the crude material was purified on a ~l~;par~live HPLC eluted at 10 mL/min with a linear gradient from 30 to 55%B over 40 minutes where A was 0.1% (vlv) TFA in H2O and B was 0.085% (vlv) TFA in CAN. The FITC peptide was obtained as a bri~ht yellow powder after lyophi~i7~tion (3.7 mg, 15% yield): MS (ESI): rnle (M+l) Calcd. for C73H,02N,902oS3: 1661, obsd.: 1661.
SUBSmUlE St~EEr ~WLE 26 . .
CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 . 113 Direct Binclir~ Fluorescence Polarization Rintli~ A~y (dbFP) The methodology is described in PanVera Application Guide (1994), PanVera Corporation. Briefly, a trace amount of fluorescein isothiocyanate (FITC) labeled peptide (CB2*-F) is titrated with antibody (ACA 6501 or 6701) and the polarization for the sample is plotted versus the antibody concentration.
Polarization was measured with the PanVera Beacon instrument. Data were fitted to Equation 1.
Equation I KD/ R + 1 0 where Y is the Y-axis value (milli-polarization units, mP), R is the total concentration of antibody receptor, PL is the polarization for free F}TC-labeledpeptide (F), and PH is the polarization for F complexed with R (FR). KD is the dissociation constant (reciprocal binding constant) for F from the FR complex.
l S For these equations to be valid, it must be true that F <~ R. This titration is shown in Figures 22 and 23 for CB2*-F binding to ACA-6701 and ACA-6501 antibodies. respectively. A complete titration was not obtained with ACA-6501 asshown in Figure 23, but a previous titration is shown in Figure 24 gave a KD of 241 nM. By adding CB2* (GPCILLARDRCG) in slight excess over antibody 6701, to displace CB2*-F from 6701 (see Figure 25), a dissociation rate constantof Kofl~ = 0.0184 sec~', which corresponds to t~2 = 38 seconds, was determined for CB2*-F. Given the KD of 256 nM, this corresponds to an association rate constantof Kon = 3.6 X 104 M-l sec~l (after correcting for antibody bivalency). Thus, CB2*-F binding to ACA-6701 is limited only by diffusion ofthese two molecules together.
SUBSITnUTE SHEEr ffUULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 - WO 97/46251 PCT/USg7/10075 Competitive Fluorescence Pol~ri7~tion A~ y (cFP) The above described dbFP assay provides binding constants for FITC-labeled peptides and requires on the order of 0.5 mg of purified antibody. The cFP assay provides binding constants for peptides that lack the FITC group and it consumes less antibody, on the order of 10 llg. The cFP assay is modified from that reported in PanVera Applications Guide (1994) PanVera Corporation such that it consumes 50-fold less antibody. Briefly, antibody (ACA 6701) is mixed with trace FITC labeled peptide (CB2*-F) and enough time is allowed for equilibrium to be reached. This was I hour for ACA 6701 and CB2*-F.
Increasing concentrations ofthe unlabeled peptide being tested (CB2* or 3B10) are then added to the tube. After each addition, sufficient time, approximately 15 minutes, is allowed for equilibrium to be reached and the mP value was read.
Although it is necessary to choose concentrations of 6701 (~) and CB2*-F (F) such that F << R, the concentration of R need only be high enough such that the measured polarization (PH) is significantly higher than PL (see Figure 22). This A
(mP) value should be 20 or more mP units to insure reliable results.
Equation 2 ~(mP) = Pl~ - Pl As unlabeled (no FITC) peptide (I) is added to inhibit F from binding to R, Y
decreases from its maximum value of PH to a plateau of PL which should agree with that in Equation 1. These titrations are shown in Figures 26 and 27 for displacement of CB2*-F from ACA-6701 by CB2* and 3B10, respectively. The equation describing this titration was derived and is:
Equation 3 y = PH +PL * (I / Kl ' ) I/KI'+l.O
SUBSTllUrE SHEEr ~UILE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O 97/46251 PCT~US97/1007 where PLjS the same as in Equation 1, I is the concentration of unlabeled peptide competitor, and K~' is the apparent dissociation constant for that peptide. Values for these parameters were obtained by fitting cFP titration data to the above equation.
S The true dissociation constant for I is obtained from Equation 4.
Equation 4 Kl= Kl'/~1.0 + RUKD) where R and Kl, are defined as in Equation 1. The R/KD ratio is obtained from the values Of PH' (from Equation 3) and PH and PL (from Equation I ) and using Equation 5. .
Equation S RJKD =(PH _PL)I(PH_PH ) In general, Equation 5 can be used to determine aPL antibody concentrations oncethe titration defined by Equation I is performed as a ''standard curve." Thus, in addition to providing a means for detçnnining Kl, this method provides a means of standardizing all aPL antibody stock solution concentrations and of analyzingtheir binding activity/stability over time using only 5-10 ~g of antibody per cFP
assay.
SUBSTrrUlE SHEEl- ~llllE 26) - CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 W O97/46251 PCT~US97/10075 DISSOCIATION CONSTANTS DFTERMRNED BY dbFP AND cFP
Peptide Antibody Sequence KDa or K
CB2*-F 6501FITC-GPCILLARDRCG 482 nMa CB2*-F 6701FITC-GPCILLARDRCG 512 nMa CB2* 6701 GPCILLARDRCG 35 nM
3B10 6701 AGPCLLLAPDRCPG 313 nM
a The KD values have been multiplied by 2 to correct for KD values determined from Equation I that do not factor in the bivalency of the antibody.
The results demonstrate that CB2*-F cross reacts with two very different aPL
antibodies, ACA-6501 and ACA-6701, binding to both with equal high affinity.
Removal of the FITC group improved binding of CB2* to ACA-6701 by 14-fold.
Binding of a related peptide, 3B 10, was 9-fold less than binding of CB2* to ACA-6701. While this result may be due to additional framework residues on 3B10, it may also be due to the substitution of a proline for arginine at position 8 in CB2*.
Previous NMR structure studies of SA12, a peptide similar to 3B 10, showed that this proline that is in a turn position gives the structure rigidity. CB2 is a much more flexible peptide and it has an arginine in this position. A more flexible peptide like CB2 may be more cross-reactive because it may more readily adjust its shape to fit a given antibody binding site. The implications of drug rigidification on binding affinity are discussed in Koehler er al., p. 251, GUIDEBOOK ON MOLECULAR MODELING IN DRUG DESIGN (Academic Press, N. Cohen, ed., 1996).
Example 31: Tolerance Activity of Peptide Conjn~t~s Two different conjugates co~ g the same peptide were tested for their ability to induce antigen specific tolerance in vivo. Briefly, mice were immunized with the peptide conjugated to the immunogenic carrier Keyhole Limpet l~emocyanin (KLH) to generate peptide-specific memory B cells. Three weeks SUBSTIlll~E SffEET ffUlLE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 Wo 97/46251 PCT/us97lloo7s later, groups of 5 mice per group were treated with various doses of the test conjugates? one group of mice was not treated and acted as the control. Five days later, all of the mice, including the control group, were boosted with the peptide conjugated to KLH and seven days,later all of the mice were bled and their sera assayed for anti-peptide antibodies using a modified Farr assay. The Antigen Binding Capacity (ABC) was calculated for each individual serum sample according to the method described in G.M. Iverson, "Assay for in vivo adoptive immune response," Volume II, Chapter 67, HANDBOOK OF EXPERIMENTAL
IMMUNOLOGY (Blackwell Scientific Publications, Weir et al., eds., 4th ed., l 0 Oxford, 1986). These values were then used to determine a mean and standard deviation for all of the individuals of a group.
While one of the conjugates ind~lced tolerance, the other one did not inhibit antipeptide antibodies over the dose range tested. The most likely explanation for this difference is that the latter conjugate has a short in vivo half-life. To address this problem, a system was employed that induced tolerance in vitro, thereby negating half-life consideration, and then the cells were transferred to irradiated recipients. Briefly, spleen cells from mice primed with the peptide conjugated to ~LH were harvested and incubated in complete RPMI- 1640 medium for 2 hours at 37~C with various doses of the test conjugates. One group of cells was incubated without toleragen and acted as the positive control. The cells were washed, transferred to irradiated syngeneic recipients and boosted with the peptide conjugated to KLH. Seven days later all of the mice were bled and their sera assayed for anti-peptide antibodies. The conjugate that did not induce any detectable tolerance when tested in the in vivo model did induce tolerance when tested in this in vitro model. This result supports the assumption that thedifference between conjugates is due to a short half-life of the conjugate. To directly test this hypothesis, the conjugate was ~mini~tered continuously by an implanted osmotic pump over a prolonged period of time. The results clearly show that this conjugate induced tolerance when a~1ministered by sustained release but not when ~-lmini~tered as a bolus as shown in Figure 32.
SUBSmU E S~EEr ~n~ 26) Tes~in~ of (LJP685)~/MTU-AHAB-TEG for Tolerance Activity in the in vivo Model Mice were primed with LJP-685-KLH on alum plus per~ussis as an S adjuvant. Three weeks later, the mice were treated with a range of doses of the (LJP685)4/MTU-AHAB-TEG conjugate. One group was not treated and acted as a control group. Five days later, all of the mice, including the control group, were boosted with l 0 ~lg LJP685-KLH and seven days later the mice were bled. Their sera were analyzed for anti-LJP685 antibodies by a modified Farr assay as described above. The results as shown in Figure 28 demonstrate that the treatment with the (LJP685)4/MTU-AHAB-TEG conjugate, over a dose range of I to 50 nmoles, had no detectable effect on the anti-LJP685 response.
Testin~ the (LJP685),/MTU-DAP~A-TEG Conju~ate for ~ ~,lerance Induction in the in vivo Model Mice were primed with LJP685-KLH on alum plus pertussis. Three weeks later, the mice were treated with 5, 10 or 50 nrnoles of the (LJP685)4/MTU-DABA-TEG conjugate. One group was not treated and acted as a control group.
Five days later, all of the mice, including the control group, were boosted with10 ~g LJP685-KLH and seven days later the mice were bled. Their sera were analyzed for anti-LJP685 antibodies by a modified Farr assay. The results as shown in Figure 29 demonstrate that (LJP685)4/MTU-DABA-TEG conjugate induces tolerance in the in vivo model with an EDso of 5 nmoles.
Testing the (T TP685)~/MTU-AHAB-TF~G Coruu~tP for Toler;lnce Induction in the in vitro Model Spleen cells from mice primed 3 weeks earlier with LJP685-KLH were harvested and incubated in complete RPMI-1640 medium for 2 hours at 37~C
with 4, 20 or 100 ~lM of (LJP685)4/MTU-AHAB-TEG conjugate. One group of cells was incubated without toleragen and acted as a positive control group. The SUBSmUlE SHEEr ~ULE 26) CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 wo 97/462st PCT/US97/10075 cells were washed, transferred to irradiated recipients and boosted with 10 ~lg of LJP685-K-LH. Seven days later, the mice were bled and their sera were analyzed for anti-LJP685 antibodies by a modified Farr assay. The results as shown in Figure 30 clearly illustrate that the (LJP685)4/MTU-AHAB-TEG conjugate can induce tolerance when tested in the in vitro model achieving an ICso of ~ 4 ~lM.
Testin~ the (LJP6851~/MTU-DAP~A-TFG conJugate for Toler:~nre Tnduction in the in vitro Model Spleen cells from mice primed 3 weeks earlier with LJP685-KLH were harvested and incubated in complete RPMI-1640 medium for 2 hours at 37~C
with 0.4. 1.3 and 4 IlM of (LJP685)4/MTU-DABA-TEG conjugate. One group of cells was incubated without toleragen and acted as a positive control group. Thecells were washed, transferred to irradiated recipients and boosted with l 0 ~lg of LJP685-KLH. Seven days later, the mice were bled and their sera were analyzed for anti-LJP685 antibodies by a modified Farr assay. The results as shown in Figure 31 demonstrate that (LJP685)4/MTU-DABA-TEG conjugate can induce tolerance when tested in the in vi~ro model, achieving an IC50 of < 4 ~lM.
Testing the (LJP685)~/MTU-AHAB-TEG Con~ugate for Tolerance Induction in vi~o U~ a Continuous l )elivery Pump Mice were primed with LJP685-KLH on alum plus pertussis. Three weeks later, the mice were divided into 5 groups of five mice per group. On day 1, one group was treated with a bolus of saline and another group was treated with a bolus cont~ining 50 nmoles of the (LJP685)4/MTU-AHAB-TEG conjugate. The three rem~inin~ groups were implanted with osmotic purnps. In one group, the pumps were filled with saline and delivered at 1 IlL/hour for 3 days. The two rem~ining groups received pumps filled with the (LJP685)4/MTU-AHAB-TEG
conjugate (50 nmoles). One group received pumps that deliver at 1 IlL/hour for three days and the other received pumps that deliver at 0.5 ~L/hour for seven days.
On day 5, the pumps that deliver for three days were surgically removed. On day SUBSmUrE SHEEr ~U~ 26) --CA 022~6449 1998-11-23 WO 97/46251 PCT/USg7/10075 7, all of the mice, including the control group, were boosted with 10 ~g of LJP685-KLH. On day 10, the purnps that deliver for seven days were surgically removed. On day 14, all of the mice were bled. Their sera were analyzed for anti-LJP685 antibodies by a modified Farr assay. The results are shown in Figure 32.
Teslin~ the U TP-Peptide)~/MTU-BMP-TEG Coruu~ate for Toler~nce Induction in the in vivo Model Mice are primed with peptide-KLH on alum plus pertussis. Three weeks later, the mice are treated with the (LJP-peptide)4/MTU-BMP-TEG conjugate, one group is not treated and acts as the control group. Five days later. all of the mice7 including the control group, are boosted with 10 ',Ig of peptide-KLH and seven days later the mice are bled. Their sera are analyzed for anti-peptide antibodies by a modified Farr assay. The results show that the (LJP-peptide)4/MTU-BMP-TEG
conjugate induces tolerance in the in vivo model at a potency equal to or greater than that of the (LJP685)4/MTU-AHAB-TEG conjugate.
SUBSmUI~ S~EEr (PtULE 26)
Claims (74)
- WE CLAIM:
l. An aPL analog that binds specifically to B cells to which an aPL
epitope binds. - 2. The analog of claim 1 wherein the analog lacks a T cell epitope.
- 3. The analog of claim 1 wherein the analog is a peptide.
- 4. The analog of claim 3 wherein the peptide comprises the sequence CLILAPDRC, CLILTPDRC, CLLLAPDRC, CTILTLDRC, CLVLALDRC, CTILTPDRC, CILLAHDRC, CGNAADARC, CTNWADPRC, CGNIADPRC, CTNLTDSRC, CGNPTDVRC, GILLNEFA, GILTIDNL, GILNALDYV, LSDPGYVRNIFH or LTDPRYTRDISNFTD.
- 5. The analog of claim 3 wherein the peptide comprises the sequence AGPCLGVLGKLCPG, GPCLGVLGKLCPG, PCLGVLGKLCPG, CLGVLGKLCPG, AGPCLGVLGKLCG, CLGVLGKLC, GPCILLARDRCG or AGPILLARDRCPG.
- 6. The analog of claim 3 wherein the peptide contains at least one proline and further wherein .alpha.-methyl proline is substituted for at least one said proline.
- 7. The analog of claim 3 wherein a D-ainino acid is substituted for at least one L-amino acid.
- 8. The analog of claim 3 wherein the peptide is cyclized by a disulfide bond.
- 9. The analog of claim 8 wherein a thioether bond is substituted for the disulfide bond.
- 10. The analog of claim 3 wherein the peptide contains at least one leucine and further wherein isoleucine is substituted for at least one said leucine.
- 11. A composition for inducing specific B cell tolerance to an aPL
immunogen comprising a conjugate of a nonimmunogenic valency platform molecule and an aPL antibody-binding analog that (a) binds specifically to B cells to which an aPL immunogen binds and (b) lacks the T cell epitope(s) of the immunogen. - 12. The composition of claim 11 wherein the aPL antibody-binding analog is a peptide comprising the sequence CLILAPDRC, CLILTPDRC, CLLLAPDRC, CTILTLDRC, CLVLALDRC, CTILTPDRC, CILLAHDRC, CGNAADARC, CTNWADPRC, CGNIADPRC, CTNLTDSRC, CGNPTDVRC, GILLNEFA, GILTIDNL, GILNALDW, LSDPGWRNIFH or LTDPRYTRDISNFTD.
- 13. The composition of claim 11 wherein the aPL antibody-binding analog is a peptide comprising the sequence AGPCLGVLGKLCPG, GPCLGVLGKLCPG, PCLGVLGKLCPG, CLGVLGKLCPG, AGPCLGVLGKLCG, CLGVLGKLC, GPCILLARDRCG or 5 AGPILLARDRCPG.
- 14. The composition of claim 11 wherein the aPL antibody-binding analog is an analog according to claim 6.
- 15. The composition of claim 11 wherein the aPL antibody-binding analog is an analog according to claim 7.
- 16. The composition of claim 11 wherein the aPL antibody-binding analog is an analog according to claim 8.
- 17. The composition of claim 11 wherein the aPL antibody-binding analog is an analog according to claim 9.
- 18. The composition of claim 11 wherein the aPL antibody-binding analog is an analog according to claim 10.
- 19. The composition of claim 11 wherein the nonimmunogenic valency platform molecule comprises triethylene glycol.
- 20. The composition of claim 19 wherein the valency platform molecule comprises AHAB-TEG.
- 21. The composition of claim 19 wherein the valency platform molecule comprises compound 46, A-DABA-ATEG.
- 22. The composition of claim 19 wherein the valency platform molecule comprises compound 51, A-PABA-DT-TEG.
- 23. The composition of claim 19 wherein the valency platform molecule comprises compound 55, MP-TEG.
- 24. The composition of claim 19 wherein the valency platform molecule comprises compound 60, A-PIZ-IDA-TEG.
- 25. The composition of claim 19 wherein the valency platform molecule comprises compound 68, A-PIZ-IDA-HB-TEG.
- 26. The composition of claim 19 wherein the valency platform molecule comprises compound 72, A-PIZ-MP-TEG.
- 27. The composition of claim 11 wherein the nonimmunogenic valency platform molecule comprises polyethylene glycol.
- 28. The composition of claim 28 wherein the valency platform molecule comprises DABA-PEG.
- 29. The composition of claim 11 wherein the nonimmunogenic valency platform molecule comprises tetraaminobenzene.
- 30. The composition of claim 11 wherein the nonimmunogenic valency platforrn molecule comprises heptaaminobetacyclodextrin.
- 31. The composition of claim 11 wherein the nonimmunogenic valency platform molecule comprises tetraaminopentaerythritol.
- 32. The composition of claim 11 wherein the nonimmunogenic valency platform molecule comprises 1,4,8,11-tetraazacyclotetradecane (Cyclam).
- 33. The composition of claim 11 wherein the nonimmunogenic valency platform molecule comprises 1,4,7, 10-tetraazacyclododecane (Cyclen).
- 34. The composition of claim 11 wherein the nonimmunogenic valency platform molecule comprises compound 63, tetrakis-A-PIZ-PMA.
- 35. The composition of claim 11 wherein the nonimmunogenic valency platform molecule comprises compound 55, MP-TEG.
- 36. The composition of claim 11 wherein the conjugate is derived from tetrakis-BMB.
- 37. A non-immunogenic valency platform molecule comprising AHAB-TEG.
- 38. A non-immunogenic valency platform molecule comprising compound 46, 1A-DABA-ATEG.
- 39. A non-immunogenic valency platform molecule comprising compound 51, BA-PABA-DT-TEG.
- 40. A non-immunogenic valency platform molecule comprising compound 55. BMP-TEG.
- 41. A non-immunogenic valency platform molecule comprising compound 60, BA-PIZ-IDA-TEG.
- 42. A non-immunogenic valency platform molecule comprising compound 68, BA-PIZ-IDA-HB-TEG.
- 43. A non-immunogenic valency platform molecule comprising compound 72, BA-PIZ-HIP-TEG.
- 44. A non-immunogenic valency platform molecule comprising compound 63, tetrakis-BA-PIZ-PMA.
- 45. A method of treating an individual suffering from an aPL
antibody-mediated disease comprising administering an effective amount of the composition of claim 11 to an individual in need thereof. - 46. The method of claim 45 wherein said aPL antibody-mediated disease is stroke.
- 47. The method of claim 45 wherein said aPL antibody-mediated disease is fetal loss.
- 48. The method of claim 45 wherein said aPL antibody-mediated disease is antiphospholipid antibody syndrome (APS).
- 49. The method of claim 45 wherein said aPL antibody-mediated disease is primary antiphospholipid antibody syndrome (PAPS).
- 50. The method of claim 45 wherein said aPL antibody-mediated disease is thrombosis.
- 51. A method for identifying analogs of epitopes which specifically bind aPL antibodies isolated from humans suffering from an aPL
antibody-mediated disease comprising:
(a) preparing phage random peptide libraries;
(b) screening said libraries with aPL antibodies to identify aPL
mimetic epitopes, wherein said screening comprises (i) screening said libraries by biopanning;
(ii) further screening phage isolated by biopanning in (i) by micropanning; and (iii) identifying phage containing aPL antibody high-affinity binding peptides recovered in (ii) by immunoassay. - 52. A method of biopanning phage random peptide libraries to identify and isolate peptides which bind to aPL antibody comprising:
(a) reacting affinity-purified aPL antibody with phage bearing random peptide inserts;
(b) recovering phage bearing random peptide inserts which bind to the aPL antibody;
(c) infecting a microorganism with phage recovered in (b); and (d) culturing the infected microorganism in an antibiotic-containing medium in order to isolate the phage. - 53. A method of micropanning phage random peptide libraries to identify and isolate peptides having a high binding affinity to aPL antibodies comprising:
(a) isolating phage bearing random peptide inserts by biopanning;
(b) incubating the phage recovered in step (a) in microplate wells coated with aPL antibody bound to Protein G;
(c) washing the microplate wells to remove unbound phage;
(d) eluting bound phage; and (e) infecting a microorganism with phage recovered in (d); and (f) culturing the infected microorganism in an antibiotic-containing medium in order to isolate the phage. - 54. The method of claim 51 wherein the immunoassay is a phage-capture ELISA comprising:
(a) incubating phage bearing random peptide inserts isolated by micropanning in the microplate wells coated with aPL antibody;
(b) washing away unbound phage;
(c) incubating a labeled anti-phage antibody to the wells;
(d) washing away unbound labeled anti-phage antibody;
(e) adding a label substrate; and (f) measuring signal development of the substrate to identify high affinity-binding phage. - 55. The method of claim 54 wherein the label is an enzyme.
- 56. The method of claim 54 wherein the substrate is colorimetric.
- 57. The method of claim 54 further comprising performing an additional phage-capture ELISA assay of the high affinity-binding phage comprising:
(a) coating a uniform amount of the phage on microplate wells, (b) incubating aPL antibody in the wells, (c) washing away unbound antibody, (e) incubating a labeled anti-aPL antibody with the bound aPL
antibody;
(f) washing away unbound labeled anti-aPL antibody;
(g) adding a substrate to the wells; and (h) measuring signal development of the substrate to measure the relative binding affinity of the phage. - 58. The method of claim 57 wherein the label is an enzyme.
- 59. The method of claim 57 wherein the substrate is colorimetric.
- 60. The method of claim 51 wherein the immunoassay is a colony-blot immunoassay comprising:
(a) culturing a microorganism infected with phage bearing random peptide inserts on a membrane atop an agar-containing culture medium;
(b) replicate transferring the microorganism cultured in (a) by blotting the microorganism on a membrane atop an agar-containing culture medium;
(c) incubating the transferred microorganism;
(d) lysing the microorganism;
(e) digesting the microorganism;
(f) blocking the membrane;
(g) incubating the membrane with aPL antibody;
(h) washing away unbound aPL antibody;
(i) incubating a labeled anti-aPL antibody with the membrane;
(j) washing away unbound labeled anti-aPL antibody;
(k) adding a substrate; and (l) measuring signal development of the substrate to identify high affinity-binding phage. - 61. The method of claim 60 wherein the membrane is nitrocellulose.
- 62. The method of claim 60 wherein the microorganism is digested with lysozyme.
- 63. The method of claim 60 wherein the blocking solution is gelatin.
- 64. The method of claim 60 wherein the label is an enzyme.
- 65. The method of claim 60 wherein the substrate is colorimetric.
- 66. A method for assaying and ranking for affinity-binding characteristics epitopes which specifically bind aPL antibodies isolated from humans suffering from an aPL antibody-mediated disease is also encompassed, the method comprising:
(a) coating wells of a microtitration plate with cardiolipin;
(b) adding adult bovine or human serum as a source of .beta.2-GPI
to bind to the cardiolipin and to prevent non-specific binding to the wells of the plate;
(c) incubating a solution of monomeric analog and a high-titered aPL antibody for a pre-determined time;
(d) adding the aPL antibody/analog mixture to wells of the microtitration plate and incubating for a pre-determined time;
(e) washing the wells to wash away unbound aPL antibody;
(f) adding anti-human IgG conjugated with a label to the wells of the plate and incubating for a pre-determined time;
(g) washing the wells to wash away unbound anti-human IgG
conjugate;
(h) adding a substrate for the labeled conjugate and developing the substrate/label reaction for a pre-determined time;
(i) measuring the end-product of the substrate/label reaction to quantitate the amount of aPL antibody bound to the well;
(j) calculating the percentage inhibition, if any, of binding of the aPL antibody to determine the affinity of the analog to the aPL antibody. - 67. The method of claim 66 wherein the conjugate is labeled with an enzyme.
- 68. The method of claim 66 wherein the substrate is colorimetric.
- 69. A diagnostic immunoassay for determining the presence of aPL
antibody in body fluids taken from subjects suspected of suffering from an aPL
antibody-mediated disease comprising (a) contacting a sample of a body fluid with an analog of an epitope which specifically binds aPL antibodies (b) detecting aPL antibodies bound by the analog. - 70. The immunoassay of claim 69 wherein the immunoassay comprises:
(a) coating wells of a microtitration plate with an analog of an epitope which specifically binds aPL antibodies;
(b) washing the wells to wash away unbound analog;
(c) adding a test sample of a body fluid to the wells and incubating for a pre-determined time;
(d) washing the wells to remove unbound test sample;
(e) adding anti-human IgG conjugated with a label to the wells of the plate and incubating for a pre-determined time;
(f) washing the wells to wash away unbound anti-human IgG
conjugate:
(g) adding a substrate for the labeled conjugate and developing the substrate/label reaction for a predetermined time;
(h) measuring the end-product of the substrate/label reaction to determine the presence of anti-aPL antibody in the test sample. - 71. The inununoassay of claim 70 wherein the label is an enzyme and the substrate is colorimetric.
- 72. Hydrophilic linkers for connecting peptides or other bioactive molecules to valency platform molecules with the formula R1S(CH2CH2O)nCH2CH2O(CH2)mCO2R2 wherein n = 0-200, m = 0 to 10, R1 = H or a protecting group such as trityl, R2 = H or alkyl or aryl, such as 4-nitrophenyl ester.
- 73. The linkers of claim 72 wherein m = 0 to 2.
- 74. The conjugate of claim 11 wherein the aPL analog is bound to the nonimmunogenic valency platform molecule by a sulfhydryl containing moiety.
Applications Claiming Priority (5)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US08/660,092 US6207160B1 (en) | 1995-06-07 | 1996-06-06 | aPL immunoreactive peptides, conjugates thereof and methods of treatment for aPL antibody-mediated pathologies |
US76050896A | 1996-12-05 | 1996-12-05 | |
US08/760,508 | 1996-12-05 | ||
US08/660,092 | 1996-12-05 | ||
PCT/US1997/010075 WO1997046251A1 (en) | 1996-06-06 | 1997-06-06 | aPL IMMUNOREACTIVE PEPTIDES, CONJUGATES THEREOF AND METHODS OF TREATMENT FOR aPL ANTIBODY-MEDIATED PATHOLOGIES |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
CA2256449A1 true CA2256449A1 (en) | 1997-12-11 |
Family
ID=27097975
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
CA002256449A Abandoned CA2256449A1 (en) | 1996-06-06 | 1997-06-06 | Apl immunoreactive peptides, conjugates thereof and methods of treatment for apl antibody-mediated pathologies |
Country Status (7)
Country | Link |
---|---|
EP (1) | EP0954531A1 (en) |
JP (1) | JP2000512981A (en) |
KR (1) | KR20000016414A (en) |
AU (1) | AU734638B2 (en) |
CA (1) | CA2256449A1 (en) |
NO (1) | NO985636L (en) |
WO (1) | WO1997046251A1 (en) |
Families Citing this family (73)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO1992009690A2 (en) * | 1990-12-03 | 1992-06-11 | Genentech, Inc. | Enrichment method for variant proteins with altered binding properties |
US5874409A (en) | 1995-06-07 | 1999-02-23 | La Jolla Pharmaceutical Company | APL immunoreactive peptides, conjugates thereof and methods of treatment for APL antibody-mediated pathologies |
US7888466B2 (en) | 1996-01-11 | 2011-02-15 | Human Genome Sciences, Inc. | Human G-protein chemokine receptor HSATU68 |
US8212004B2 (en) | 1999-03-02 | 2012-07-03 | Human Genome Sciences, Inc. | Neutrokine-alpha fusion proteins |
US6812327B1 (en) | 1996-10-25 | 2004-11-02 | Human Genome Sciences, Inc. | Neutrokine-alpha polypeptides |
US6858210B1 (en) * | 1998-06-09 | 2005-02-22 | La Jolla Pharmaceutical Co. | Therapeutic and diagnostic domain 1 β2GPI polypeptides and methods of using same |
WO2000006717A2 (en) | 1998-07-27 | 2000-02-10 | Genentech, Inc. | Improved transformation efficiency in phage display through modification of a coat protein |
US6238860B1 (en) | 1998-11-05 | 2001-05-29 | Dyax Corp. | Binding moieties for human parvovirus B19 |
US6399578B1 (en) | 1998-12-09 | 2002-06-04 | La Jolla Pharmaceutical Company | Conjugates comprising galactose α1,3 galactosyl epitopes and methods of using same |
US6458953B1 (en) | 1998-12-09 | 2002-10-01 | La Jolla Pharmaceutical Company | Valency platform molecules comprising carbamate linkages |
US6197526B1 (en) | 1999-01-04 | 2001-03-06 | Dyax Corp. | Polypeptides for binding human factor VIII and fragments of human factor VIII |
US7112438B2 (en) | 1999-01-04 | 2006-09-26 | Dyax Corp. | Binding molecules for human factor VIII and factor VIII-like proteins |
GB9919452D0 (en) * | 1999-08-17 | 1999-10-20 | Osteometer Biotech As | Specific autoimmune reactions against isomerised/optically inverted epitopes:application for diagnosis of autoimmune diseases |
WO2001032858A1 (en) * | 1999-11-05 | 2001-05-10 | Novozymes A/S | A high throughput screening (hts) method |
EP1233791A2 (en) | 1999-11-28 | 2002-08-28 | La Jolla Pharmaceutical Company | Methods of treating lupus based on antibody affinity and screening methods and compositions for use thereof |
US20030031675A1 (en) | 2000-06-06 | 2003-02-13 | Mikesell Glen E. | B7-related nucleic acids and polypeptides useful for immunomodulation |
US7879328B2 (en) | 2000-06-16 | 2011-02-01 | Human Genome Sciences, Inc. | Antibodies that immunospecifically bind to B lymphocyte stimulator |
WO2002002641A1 (en) | 2000-06-16 | 2002-01-10 | Human Genome Sciences, Inc. | Antibodies that immunospecifically bind to blys |
AU2001288301A1 (en) | 2000-08-18 | 2002-03-04 | Human Genome Sciences, Inc. | Binding polypeptides and methods based thereon |
EP1674477B1 (en) | 2000-08-18 | 2009-12-09 | Dyax Corp. | Binding polypeptides for B lymphocyte stimulator protein (BLYS) |
CN1564826A (en) | 2001-02-09 | 2005-01-12 | 人类基因组科学公司 | Human G-protein chemokine receptor (CCR5) HDGNR10 |
DK1385864T3 (en) | 2001-04-13 | 2010-08-16 | Human Genome Sciences Inc | Anti-VEGF-2 antibodies |
US20070160576A1 (en) | 2001-06-05 | 2007-07-12 | Genentech, Inc. | IL-17A/F heterologous polypeptides and therapeutic uses thereof |
KR100628425B1 (en) | 2001-06-20 | 2006-09-28 | 제넨테크, 인크. | Compositions and Methods for the Diagnosis and Treatment of Tumor |
JP4598389B2 (en) | 2001-06-21 | 2010-12-15 | ダイナバックス テクノロジーズ コーポレイション | Chimeric immunomodulatory compounds and methods of use thereof |
AU2002330015B2 (en) | 2001-09-18 | 2008-02-07 | Genentech, Inc. | Compositions and methods for the diagnosis and treatment of tumor |
CA2471431A1 (en) | 2002-01-02 | 2003-07-17 | Genentech, Inc. | Compositions and methods for the diagnosis and treatment of tumor |
AU2003230874A1 (en) | 2002-04-16 | 2003-11-03 | Genentech, Inc. | Compositions and methods for the diagnosis and treatment of tumor |
CN100471486C (en) | 2002-08-12 | 2009-03-25 | 戴纳伐克斯技术股份有限公司 | Immunomodulatory compositions, methods of making, and methods of use thereof |
MX341074B (en) | 2003-07-08 | 2016-08-05 | Genentech Inc | Il-17 a/f heterologous polypeptides and therapeutic uses thereof. |
SI2295073T1 (en) | 2003-11-17 | 2014-07-31 | Genentech, Inc. | Antibody against CD22 for the treatment of tumour of hematopoietic origin |
PL1794174T3 (en) | 2004-09-01 | 2012-11-30 | Dynavax Tech Corp | Methods and compositions for inhibition of innate immune responses and autoimmunity |
JP2008535796A (en) | 2005-03-10 | 2008-09-04 | ジェネンテック・インコーポレーテッド | Methods and compositions for regulating vascular integrity |
US9168286B2 (en) | 2005-10-13 | 2015-10-27 | Human Genome Sciences, Inc. | Methods and compositions for use in treatment of patients with autoantibody positive disease |
US8211649B2 (en) | 2006-03-31 | 2012-07-03 | Human Genome Sciences, Inc. | Methods of diagnosing and prognosing hodgkin's lymphoma |
CA2647277A1 (en) | 2006-04-05 | 2007-11-08 | Genentech, Inc. | Method for using boc/cdo to modulate hedgehog signaling |
EP2057465A4 (en) | 2006-08-09 | 2010-04-21 | Homestead Clinical Corp | Organ-specific proteins and methods of their use |
US20080096208A1 (en) | 2006-09-06 | 2008-04-24 | Connors Richard W | Biomarkers for assessing response to c-met treatment |
JPWO2008032833A1 (en) | 2006-09-14 | 2010-01-28 | 株式会社医学生物学研究所 | Antibody with enhanced ADCC activity and method for producing the same |
AU2008218199B2 (en) | 2007-02-22 | 2013-10-31 | Genentech, Inc. | Methods for detecting inflammatory bowel disease |
AU2008317261B2 (en) | 2007-10-26 | 2015-04-09 | Dynavax Technologies Corporation | Methods and compositions for inhibition of immune responses and autoimmunity |
EP2304439A4 (en) | 2008-05-29 | 2012-07-04 | Nuclea Biotechnologies Llc | Anti-phospho-akt antibodies |
WO2009154025A1 (en) | 2008-06-20 | 2009-12-23 | 国立大学法人岡山大学 | ANTIBODY AGAINST OXIDIZED LDL/β2GPI COMPLEX AND USE OF THE SAME |
US9182406B2 (en) | 2008-08-04 | 2015-11-10 | Biodesy, Inc. | Nonlinear optical detection of molecules comprising an unnatural amino acid possessing a hyperpolarizability |
ES2564207T3 (en) | 2009-10-22 | 2016-03-18 | F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag | Methods and compositions for modulating hepsin activation of macrophage stimulating protein |
EP3002297B1 (en) | 2009-11-30 | 2020-04-08 | F. Hoffmann-La Roche AG | Antibodies for treating and diagnosing tumors expressing slc34a2 (tat211) |
AR080243A1 (en) | 2010-02-23 | 2012-03-21 | Genentech Inc | COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS FOR DIAGNOSIS AND TUMOR TREATMENT |
KR20130079384A (en) | 2010-05-03 | 2013-07-10 | 제넨테크, 인크. | Compositions and methods for the diagnosis and treatment of tumor |
US8940310B2 (en) | 2010-06-16 | 2015-01-27 | Dynavax Technologies Corporation | Methods of treatment using TLR7 and/or TLR9 inhibitors |
CA2822442C (en) * | 2010-12-22 | 2021-03-16 | The Salk Institute For Biological Studies | Cyclic crf antagonist peptides |
WO2012129347A1 (en) | 2011-03-21 | 2012-09-27 | Biodesy, Llc | Classification of kinase inhibitors using nonlinear optical techniques |
EP2756300A1 (en) | 2011-09-15 | 2014-07-23 | F.Hoffmann-La Roche Ag | Methods of promoting differentiation |
MX2014004426A (en) | 2011-10-15 | 2014-07-09 | Genentech Inc | Scd1 antagonists for treating cancer. |
BR112014017626A2 (en) | 2012-01-18 | 2018-05-22 | Genentech Inc | methods for treating a disease or dysfunction, methods for identifying an individual, method for predicting whether an individual with a disease or dysfunction is more or less likely to develop treatment toxicity, method for determining whether an individual with a disease or dysfunction should continue or suspend treatment comprising an fgf19 modulator, therapeutic efficacy optimization method and assay method. |
MX366804B (en) | 2012-02-11 | 2019-07-25 | Genentech Inc | R-spondin translocations and methods using the same. |
JP2015511598A (en) | 2012-03-16 | 2015-04-20 | エフ・ホフマン−ラ・ロシュ・アクチェンゲゼルシャフト | Method of treating melanoma using PAK1 inhibitor |
MX2014010943A (en) | 2012-03-16 | 2014-11-26 | Genentech Inc | Engineered conformationally-stabilized proteins. |
US9139863B2 (en) | 2012-03-16 | 2015-09-22 | Genentech, Inc. | Engineered conformationally-stabilized proteins |
GB2517857A (en) | 2012-04-25 | 2015-03-04 | Biodesy Inc | Methods for detecting allosteric modulators of proteins |
WO2013170191A1 (en) | 2012-05-11 | 2013-11-14 | Genentech, Inc. | Methods of using antagonists of nad biosynthesis from nicotinamide |
US9228184B2 (en) | 2012-09-29 | 2016-01-05 | Dynavax Technologies Corporation | Human toll-like receptor inhibitors and methods of use thereof |
SG10201701380TA (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2017-04-27 | Genentech Inc | Biomarkers and methods of treating pd-1 and pd-l1 related conditions |
WO2015116902A1 (en) | 2014-01-31 | 2015-08-06 | Genentech, Inc. | G-protein coupled receptors in hedgehog signaling |
JP2017524371A (en) | 2014-05-23 | 2017-08-31 | ジェネンテック, インコーポレイテッド | MIT biomarkers and methods of use |
JP6655074B2 (en) | 2014-06-20 | 2020-02-26 | ジェネンテック, インコーポレイテッド | Scugacin-based scaffold compositions, methods and uses |
WO2016106286A1 (en) | 2014-12-23 | 2016-06-30 | Biodesy, Inc. | Attachment of proteins to interfaces for use in nonlinear optical detection |
AU2016252773B2 (en) | 2015-04-24 | 2022-06-02 | Genentech, Inc. | Multispecific antigen-binding proteins |
WO2018049275A1 (en) | 2016-09-09 | 2018-03-15 | Genentech, Inc. | Selective peptide inhibitors of frizzled |
WO2018152496A1 (en) | 2017-02-17 | 2018-08-23 | The Usa, As Represented By The Secretary, Dept. Of Health And Human Services | Compositions and methods for the diagnosis and treatment of zika virus infection |
US11236151B2 (en) | 2017-04-25 | 2022-02-01 | The United States Of America, As Represented By The Secretary, Department Of Health And Human Services | Antibodies and methods for the diagnosis and treatment of Epstein Barr virus infection |
WO2019018629A1 (en) | 2017-07-19 | 2019-01-24 | The Usa, As Represented By The Secretary, Dept. Of Health And Human Services | Antibodies and methods for the diagnosis and treatment of hepatitis b virus infection |
CA3134016A1 (en) | 2019-05-09 | 2020-11-12 | Genentech, Inc. | Methods of making antibodies |
CN112480209B (en) * | 2020-11-16 | 2022-03-04 | 昆明学院 | Skin photodamage-resistant protective active polypeptide RL-PL9 and application thereof |
Family Cites Families (8)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
AU640699B2 (en) * | 1989-10-19 | 1993-09-02 | Yamasa Shoyu Kabushiki Kaisha | Carrier for binding antiphospholipid antibody, immunoassay using the same, and kit therefor |
US5268454A (en) * | 1991-02-08 | 1993-12-07 | La Jolla Pharmaceutical Company | Composition for inducing humoral anergy to an immunogen comprising a t cell epitope-deficient analog of the immunogen conjugated to a nonimmunogenic carrier |
US5552391A (en) * | 1990-01-16 | 1996-09-03 | La Jolla Pharmaceutical Company | Chemically-defined non-polymeric valency platform molecules and conjugates thereof |
US5498538A (en) * | 1990-02-15 | 1996-03-12 | The University Of North Carolina At Chapel Hill | Totally synthetic affinity reagents |
CA2058769C (en) * | 1990-04-06 | 1999-03-02 | Steven Anthony Krilis | Methods for determining phospholipids and antibodies thereof |
WO1991015722A1 (en) * | 1990-04-10 | 1991-10-17 | Masur, Walter | Process for operating a compression heat pump and compression heat pump |
ATE359830T1 (en) * | 1993-09-08 | 2007-05-15 | Jolla Pharma | CHEMICALLY DEFINED NON-POLYMERIC PLATFORM MOLOCULES AND THEIR CONJUGATES |
US5874409A (en) * | 1995-06-07 | 1999-02-23 | La Jolla Pharmaceutical Company | APL immunoreactive peptides, conjugates thereof and methods of treatment for APL antibody-mediated pathologies |
-
1997
- 1997-06-06 WO PCT/US1997/010075 patent/WO1997046251A1/en not_active Application Discontinuation
- 1997-06-06 AU AU36404/97A patent/AU734638B2/en not_active Ceased
- 1997-06-06 JP JP10500927A patent/JP2000512981A/en active Pending
- 1997-06-06 CA CA002256449A patent/CA2256449A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 1997-06-06 KR KR1019980709997A patent/KR20000016414A/en not_active Application Discontinuation
- 1997-06-06 EP EP97933138A patent/EP0954531A1/en not_active Withdrawn
-
1998
- 1998-12-03 NO NO985636A patent/NO985636L/en not_active Application Discontinuation
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
NO985636D0 (en) | 1998-12-03 |
EP0954531A1 (en) | 1999-11-10 |
EP0954531A4 (en) | 1999-08-31 |
AU734638B2 (en) | 2001-06-21 |
NO985636L (en) | 1999-02-08 |
WO1997046251A1 (en) | 1997-12-11 |
KR20000016414A (en) | 2000-03-25 |
AU3640497A (en) | 1998-01-05 |
JP2000512981A (en) | 2000-10-03 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
CA2256449A1 (en) | Apl immunoreactive peptides, conjugates thereof and methods of treatment for apl antibody-mediated pathologies | |
US6207160B1 (en) | aPL immunoreactive peptides, conjugates thereof and methods of treatment for aPL antibody-mediated pathologies | |
WO1996040197A9 (en) | aPL IMMUNOREACTIVE PEPTIDES, CONJUGATES THEREOF AND METHODS OF TREATMENT FOR aPL ANTIBODY-MEDIATED PATHOLOGIES | |
WO1997046251A9 (en) | aPL IMMUNOREACTIVE PEPTIDES, CONJUGATES THEREOF AND METHODS OF TREATMENT FOR aPL ANTIBODY-MEDIATED PATHOLOGIES | |
AU772851B2 (en) | Therapeutic and diagnostic domain 1 beta2GPI polypeptides and methods of using same | |
Valadon et al. | Peptide libraries define the fine specificity of anti-polysaccharide antibodies toCryptococcus neoformans | |
JP6254527B2 (en) | Modulating the specificity of structured polypeptides | |
US20050214852A1 (en) | Peptides for the treatment and diagnosis of systemic lupus erythematosus | |
CN103263664A (en) | Method for preventing and treating alzheimer's disease | |
US6410775B1 (en) | APL immunoreactive peptides, conjugates thereof and methods of treatment for APL antibody-mediated pathologies | |
JP2011016763A (en) | Method for producing antibody against hydrophobic peptide | |
Cook et al. | Mimotopes identified by phage display for the monoclonal antibody CII-C1 to type II collagen | |
US7569541B2 (en) | Method for synthesizing conformationally constrained peptides, peptidomimetics and the use thereof as synthetic vaccines | |
WO2022025264A1 (en) | Amino acid sequence derived from sars-cov-2 and use thereof | |
US20040176283A1 (en) | Methods and compositions for the design of synthetic vaccines | |
US20030118604A1 (en) | Antigenic structural peptide, antigenic and immunogenic compounds, and uses for detecting, preventing and treating an HCV infection | |
US7592421B1 (en) | HLA class II peptide mimics | |
AU2004201699A1 (en) | Therapeutic and diagnostic domain 1 Beta2GPI polypeptides and methods of using same | |
Tuteja | 7 Mimotopes: An Overview | |
CN1225015A (en) | APL immunoreactive peptides, conjugates thereof and methods of treatment for aPL antibody-mediated pathologies | |
MXPA00012040A (en) | THERAPEUTIC AND DIAGNOSTIC DOMAIN 1&bgr;2 | |
Khudyakov | Artificial | |
Zhi-Jian Yao et al. | Identifying antigenic region of hepatitis B surface antigen by patient's serum with random peptide library |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
FZDE | Dead |